Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

Narrator P.O.V.

Thunder rumbled in the sky as a baby boy and a baby girl were born. They are brother and sister and very powerful. However, that may have something to do with their father being Chaos, the creator of the universe, and their mother being Ananke, a primordial goddess of necessity, compulsion, and inevitability. On the day of their birth, the whole planet of Etnotopia was celebrating. They celebrated for 2 days and nights straight through. Welcoming their future leaders, even Chaos and Ananke are happy about that, but some Etnotopia residents aren't. They want to steal the kids and use them as bargaining tools to control Chaos to do what they want. Chaos and his wife decide after a long few weeks about where to send the kids. They debated on what planet they should stay on, and after a few options, they finally decided on the only world with other godly beings on it: Earth. Chaos and Ananke gave their kids the names of Perseus and Thalia Chaos. So Chaos himself embarks on the journey to Earth and to Olympus.

Three days have passed since Chaos left his planet and arrived on Earth with Perseus and Thalia in front of the Empire State Building. It would have been quicker if he had just teleported, but he couldn't because of his kids, and travelling across dimensions with them was already risky. With one more look at the quiet kids, he walks in and goes to the reception desk to get the key that goes up to Olympus."
"Key to the 600th floor, please." Chaos asked him. The man mumbles something you couldn't understand, but then gives Chaos the key card. He goes over to the elevator and inserts the key card. He presses the button on the floor, and the elevator begins to move upward. There is terrible elevator music, and baby Perseus, also known as Percy, covers his ears with his tiny hands, making Chaos awe and cry. Chaos begins to bounce baby Percy to calm him down gently. He then wills the elevator to go faster. The doors finally open instantly, making baby Percy stop crying, and Chaos begins his walk towards the throne room. Every minor god, satyr, and nymph who walks by bows to him and then moves on to their business. Chaos hates it when people do that, but he can't stop them even if he tries. He finally arrives at the throne room, and when he opens the doors, there is yelling, arguing, and screaming going on. Hera is yelling at Zeus about how he keeps cheating on her and how many children he has with mortals. Apollo and Artemis argue about who is the best at archery, and Poseidon and Athena argue about who should have gotten Athens. Dionysius is asleep on his throne, Aphrodite is fixing her makeup, Hephaestus and Ares are verbally fighting over who should have Aphrodite, and the rest are just wondering why they are here. Chaos clears his throat and gets the attention of the council. Of course, Zeus, not realizing who is standing in front of him, demands to know who would barge in unannounced and disturb the meeting."
"I am Chaos, creator of the universe, and I am here to ask you a favour." He tells the council, and all the Olympians instantly fall silent and bow.
"What favour would that be?" Zeus asks carefully as he gets back up.
"My daughter and son need a place to grow up and become of age until I can come and get them, or they decide to come home by themselves. Keeping them away from the danger and all the people that want to use them as a bargaining tool to control and use me." Chaos tells them. The gods look at each other as if not knowing how to answer, but they nod their heads, and it is the first thing that the gods agree on without complaining. Chaos then gives them a look at his kids. Perseus has charcoal black hair that is messy and untameable. He has black eyes with stars in them and a birthmark on his shoulder that is a star with multiple symbols. Thalia has black hair with a few silver streaks and black eyes with galaxies swirling within them. She has a birthmark in the shape of different-sized and shaped arrows that form a circle. The gods are taken away by their beauty. Hestia is the first to approach and examine them. She first takes Percy out of Chaos's left arm, and he instantly has a smile on his face. Then she takes Thalia out of Chaos's right arm, and she also smiles. Chaos then thanks them and disappears in a poof teleporting back to his planet. After Chaos leaves, Hestia summons a crib for the babies and puts them in it. They instantly fall asleep arm in arm.
"What should we do with them?" Zeus asks the council.
"We should raise them on Olympus until they are ready to go to camp half-blood." Athena suggests. Everyone nods in agreement, but they still have the problem of their eyes and birthmark that identifies them as the children of Chaos. As if someone thought about it, Poseidon comes up with the answer.
"Why don't we put a powerful mist on them that covers their Chaos powers and then adopt them." Poseidon suggests. It seems that everyone agrees, so they all chant and cover the two kids with a mighty mist. Then Poseidon takes the boy, and Zeus takes the girl. The twins eyes change as soon as the fathers pick them up. Percy's to sea green and Thalia's to sky blue. They decide to raise the kids the right way and not fight in front of them.

Zeus P.O.V

(3 years later)

Percy and Thalia are now 3 years old. The twins are an excellent addition to the people on Olympus. Percy is really loyal and kind to everyone around him. He loves black and blue, which is funny since he will only wear something with those colours. His style is a mix of army boot camp and casual, yet comfortable. It all surprised us that Artemis has taken a liking to him, even though she hates men. But since Percy was a baby, she was determined to raise him right and treat all women kindly. Hera and Hestia joined her on this mission, and now Percy respects everyone. Percy, Apollo and Hermes had become brothers and always pull pranks on everyone except Artemis. Hestia and Percy are like mother and son, which makes me happy. Ever since Hestia gave up her throne to Dionysius, she has always seemed sad, and ever since Percy took a liking to her, she has been happier every day. Sometimes I think they are mother and son.
Thalia is a little rebel, but she is also kind to the people around her and treats them well. She loves the colours red and silver, which makes finding outfits hard, especially ones with silver in them. Her style is casual, yet mixed with extravagant and practical elements. Artemis and Thalia have formed a sisterly bond with each other. It is funny since whenever Percy does something wrong, Thalia punishes him and the other way around. Those two are true brother and sister. Even though they fight, they always make up in the end. They have taught us a great deal about forgiveness and the importance of listening to one another.

Right now, I am babysitting Percy together with Thalia since everyone else seems to have vanished. It doesn't matter to me; ever since they arrived, I have been kinder to my family. Even Hera has warmed up and no longer treats everyone with hatred. We are playing hide and seek in my palace, and I know that I will get in trouble with Poseidon if I can't find Percy soon. Ever since he adopted Percy, he has raised him to be a great man, one that he missed with all his other kids. He even likes him more than Triton, which is very surprising. However, finding Percy is challenging because he has been a master at hiding ever since he spent a day with Hermes and Apollo, which we later realized was a bad idea, given that those two were not equipped to handle the responsibility of a child. I hear a giggle coming from the sky room. It is an endless room that you can float in. I instantly know that it's Percy and Thalia, and not too soon, because the second I find them, the doorbell rings, and I know it's Poseidon. When Percy hears the doorbell ring, he instantly smiles, knowing that it's his dad. He half-ran, half-wobbled to the door. I am there instantly and pick him up, then carry him the rest of the way there. I give Percy to my brother, but he kisses me and hugs me before letting go. Then he jumps into his dad's arms, and they leave. I go back to playing with Thalia.

7 years later

On the 10th birthday of Thalia and Percy, a great prophecy was told, and it goes something like this.

"A Half-Blood of the eldest gods
Shall reach sixteen against all odds
And see the world in endless sleep
The hero's soul-cursed blade shall reap
A single choice shall end his days
Olympus to preserve or raze."

It didn't stop us, though, from celebrating their birthday. We had made Percy prince of the sea and Thalia princess of the sky on their 5th birthday, and they have been great at their role since they were born into them, although Percy hates his crown. Percy's crown is a silver band with spikes that rise up, connected by swirls. On the tips of his crown is a sapphire in the center, and the others only have black pearls. It looks good on him, but he still hates it. Thalia's tiara is also silver and quite simple. Going up from the half-silver band in the middle is a heart, and extending to the outsides are slight winds, decorated with diamonds. They both love their crown, even though they don't want to admit it. Currently, both of them are 12 and have learned everything they can, from fighting style to combat techniques, and even though we don't want to, we decided to send them to Camp to learn more. Today is the winter solstice, and the kids from Camp half-blood are coming over. We had told Chiron that they will meet two kids and take them with him back to Camp to learn all the things that we can't teach them. Percy and Thalia are loyal to their family, and even though it will be difficult, they will accept it in time. We haven't told them that they will go to Camp and we are worried about how they are going to take the news. A nymph soon comes in with the news that the kids from Camp half-blood have arrived. I tell the nymph to get Percy and Thalia. Once she vanishes, I call the council; strangely, Apollo appears with popcorn.

Percy's P.O.V

Zeus and Father told us to wait for a nymph to arrive before we can show up at the throne room. The only thing that they really told us is that today visitors are coming to Olympus. So when the nymph arrives, Thalia and I get dressed. I'm wearing black cargo pants, a black shirt with a trident on the sleeve, a black cape, and my crown, which I hate. Father had threatened to glue it to my head if I didn't wear it to important meetings. I have two swords strapped to my sides. One is called Fluctus, the other Riptide. Thalia is wearing a black skirt, a white shirt with silver stars in the corner, she's wearing her tiara, which she also hates to wear but doesn't want to admit it, she has a bow and arrow charm and a dagger on her side. Once we are ready, we both head to the throne room. About halfway there, we meet a group of kids that are walking around. They are probably the kids from Camp half-blood with their famous teacher Chiron. We stop in front of them, they are confused as to why we are here and who we are, but instead of talking to them, we just run to the throne room laughing and begin happy like we have been for the past 12 years, and those have been the best. Every god and goddess loves us, even Ares, although he is still a pain in the ass most times. When we reach the throne room, all of the Olympians are already there waiting and, for once, not fighting about stupid things.
"You are late." Zeus says as he sees us coming in.
"We couldn't find some stuff." I say casually, just now noticing that Apollo has popcorn on his lap. Every time Apollo has popcorn on his lap means nothing good will come, and he will get great entertainment out of it.

Zeus tells us to sit in the lounging area by Hestia instead of sitting in our thrones. Ever since we were old enough to walk, the gods have stayed in their human size and turned everything small so it doesn’t look weird. So we join Hestia by the hearth, and she enjoys the company. I find it unfair that she had to give up her throne to Dionysus, and I plan on changing that soon. Just as we sit down, the doors open, and the kids from Camp half-blood walk in. They bow in front of the Olympians like they have been taught. We stopped doing that since we became the prince and princess of Olympus. The meeting soon begins, and while the adults talk about unimportant things, I begin to scan the crowd of campers. I notice a daughter of Athena looking amazed at the Architecture of the building. Then her eyes land on us. She has blond hair that curls down her back, grey eyes and this calculating look in her eyes. She pokes the guy beside her, and he looks at us. He is a son of Hermes with his blond hair and mischievous blue eyes. He looks at us for a second, then goes to Chiron, pointing at us and where we are sitting. He nods his head then addresses Zeus.
"Lord Zeus. If I may ask, who are those two kids sitting by the hearth?" He asks Zeus.
"Those are Thalia and Percy, prince and princess of Olympus and the pride and joy of the council." He says, sounding very proud.
"Who are their parents?" One of the Campers asks.
"I am Percy's dad, and Zeus is Thalia's dad, but they are from the same mother. We took them in when she died giving birth to them." Poseidon tells the campers.
"So that makes them brother and sister just from different dads." The blond girl says.
"Exactly, Annabeth, but they are also twins." Athena tells her daughter looking proud.
"Why aren't they at camp with us?" The blond boy asks.
"To answer your question Luke they will be coming to Camp Half-Blood to train when the day is over." Zeus said. When I hear this I couldn't believe my ears, they were going to send us to the Camp. Thalia doesn't seem happy about that either. Living on Olympus is fun, and we have our family around us. I don't want to leave my family to attend some stupid camp. So I ask Hestia to send me back to dad's palace before I kill someone. She nods her head, and with that, I am sent back to my room in dad's palace.

Thalia's P.O.V.

I can't believe my ears; they actually want us to attend the Camp. I have heard father talk about it, but I didn't think it was true. Percy isn't taking it too well either the thought of not being with his family must have been a stab through the heart for him. Since one moment he's there and the next he's gone. Zeus looks around for Percy, but I know that he isn't here anymore and that he's in his room.
"I will find him." I tell dad, who only nods his head. I head to find my brother, and I don't need to search very far since I already know his location.
"Hey, bro." I tell him, walking into his room.
"Why are the gods doing this to us? We are fine here with learning things." He tells me.
"I don't know, brother, but it's the gods, and we have to obey what they say." I tell him.
"I just don't want to leave dad and all the other gods behind." He says.
"I feel the same way, but there is no point in running away." I tell him, and he only nods his head and comes over to me and pulls me into a hug. We stand there for a few minutes, just enjoying each other's company. Just as we pull apart, Poseidon shows up.
"Okay, I will go to the camp, but only if I can come every weekend to visit you." Percy tells him. Poseidon thinks for a minute.
"Okay, we have a deal." Uncle says. With that, we both hug each other out of happiness. I asked Poseidon if we could stay together for the night, and he tells me that I will have to let my dad know. With that done, we teleport back to the throne room where the campers are just leaving, but Chiron stays behind.
"We have decided to join the camp, uncle, but every weekend we get to come back to visit you and hang out." Percy tells him. Since Zeus knows that there is no arguing with Percy, he agrees. He tells us that we are leaving tomorrow for Camp and that Chiron is picking us up. With that, Chiron also goes, and we head back to Percy's room.
"Dad, can Percy and I sleep together tonight and share a cabin at camp?" I ask dad. He thought for a few moments and was about to say no when Hera interrupts.
"Come Zeus, it will be good for them to sleep in the same cabin since they are brother and sister, and they won't be lonely at camp but rather together." Hera tells him, and with that, Zeus agrees. We are happy and off go to uncle's palace. Percy's room looks like the ocean, and it is incredible. He has a water bed, an ocean wall, a T.V. with the latest game systems from Apollo and Hermes. We get comfortable and put on a movie. I know that demigods aren't allowed to use electronic devices, but we can use phones and anything else thanks to something that Hermes and Hephaestus invented. We fight over which movie we were going to watch but ended up watching "James Bond." Halfway through the film, Percy is asleep on the couch and is drooling all over the place. I smile as he hasn't changed since we were little. I leave the movie running but also fall asleep.

I am standing on a ledge overlooking a kingdom. The castle of said kingdom is a black diamond, and when the sunlight hits it, it turns into shimmers in millions of different colours. It easily stands out among the other houses around it, and I stand there in pure awe at its beauty.
"Nice, isn't it." Says a voice beside me. I look to my left and see a man standing there with a black suit that has galaxies swirling around. His hair is black that looks wild, like it never behaves, which looks familiar. His eyes are black but also with galaxies in them. I have seen a picture of him before with lessons from Athena and recognize the man to be Chaos, the creator of the universe, the most potent primordial there is. I am about to bow, but Chaos seems to sense what I am planning and stops me.
"There is no need to bow. I hate formalities." He says, but then his demeanour changes.
"Beware of what is to come, you and your brother have a hard time in front of you, the path is uncertain, the outcome of the prophecy not written in stone, beware of your friends that you make, and make sure you and your brother stay together." He tells me, then he disappears, leaving me scared. I wake up panting and full of sweat and wondering what the man means by the path of the prophecy is uncertain. I look over to Percy, who is still passed out on the couch. I stand up and walk over to the balcony that overlooks all of Olympus. It's a cool morning, colder than usual. It must be that someone is in a bad mood which often happens. I feel a person behind me.
"Pretty, isn't it. I find it sad that we are leaving it." Percy says as he comes up behind me and leans on the balcony railing.
"Yeah, it is. The bright side is that we get to make friends at the Camp that are our age." I tell him, and he only nods his head, then turns around and walks back inside. I join him, and in no time, we are packed and seen off by the Olympians and are following Chiron out of Olympus and towards Camp.

Chapter Text

Percy’s P.O.V

The way to camp isn’t long and I really don’t want to go. Sure we will meet new people but the thought of being away from the place I grew up is going to be hard. Right now we are driving in a Delphi Strawberry Van that is being driven by Argus a one hundred eye dude that never talks and Chiron who is telling us all about camp, with all the fun activities and other things. Thalia is listening while I just tune him out and have my own thoughts. We drive out of New York and towards a secluded part on Long Island where the camp is. Once we arrive Chiron ushers us towards the camp which is protected by a barrier to keep out the monsters that hunt us demigods. A large pine tree protects the barrier. Zeus put it there when one of his kids back in the 80’s was killed. He turned her into a tree to protect other camper’s from being killed. Once we enter the camp there are a lot of kids and teens running around doing various activities. Chiron then gives us a tour of the place and the things are pretty awesome. Amongst the activities is; lava climbing wall, a canoe area, stables with pegasis for flying, swimming lessons, and the sword fighting arena with various weapons. We look around the arena and found various weapons that look to be in bad shape thankfully we have our own weapons so we won’t need to use theirs. We then continue the tour and find they have an amphitheater, a dining area that is outside, and lastly we see the big blue house where the two people from yesterday are waiting for us.
“Annabeth, Luke meet Percy and Thalia they are staying here for a few years.” Chiron tells them.
“I know we have already met but I am Annabeth Chase daughter of Athena and head of the Athena cabin.” Annabeth introduces herself.
“I am Luke Castellan son of Hermes and head of the Hermes Cabin.” Luke says.
“Hey.” I say, but Thalia punches me in the side with her elbow.
“Fine, I am Perseus Jackson but I prefer Percy son of Poseidon and prince of Olympus.” I say.
“I am Thalia Jackson daughter of Zeus and princess of Olympus.” She tells them.
“So I am guessing that Jackson was your mother’s maiden name then?” Annabeth asks.
“We don’t really know a lot about her only that our fathers visited her at the same time and she gave birth to us a few months later. We choose the last name because people kept asking if we have last names since we are demigods so we choose Jackson.” Thalia answers and it’s the truth. Our fathers never talked about our mother and we respect that. After that they leave to do who knows what and we talk to Chiron about our sleeping situation. He already seems to know that we want to sleep together so he leads us to a cabin that I never expected to be allowed to sleep in or to see the person standing outside the door. It was Hera, queen of Olympus and actually a nice person and she somehow wasn’t mad at Zeus for having a child that with another woman.
“Percy, Thalia I am allowing you two to stay in my cabin for the duration of your visit. I would very much love for you to stay me my cabin.” Hera tells us.
“We would love to stay in your cabin Hera it would be our pleasure.” Thalia tells Hera. She smiles at us and steps aside so we can have a look inside.
“It is huge it has been modified and upgraded from its previous form to suit our taste. It is still a small cabin on the outside but inside it is a two story mansion. Why don’t you two go exploring.” Hera tells us and soon as she says it both Thalia and I are running around.

There is a living room with a couch and the latest play station, x-box, Wii and other things along with thousands of games, a small kitchen with a fridge that will never go empty if we ever want a snack between the meals, a training room with every weapon imaginable and dummies to hack at plus an archery range, and a bathroom. If you go up the spiral staircase that is in the middle of the foyer it takes you up to the two bedrooms and they look exactly like our personality which is awesome. Thalia’s room is the sky the sun shining down on the green meadow floor but it will change throughout the day going from dawn till dusk and the night sky. The clouds are moving and sometimes you can see a bird or a plane passing bye. Her bed looks like it is made out of clouds and believe me it is, she has a wall of books on the left side of her room while on the right side there are two doors one leading to her closet and the other to the bathroom. She also has a TV, couch and a few other things in her room. My room is like the underwater world, with clear ocean blue walls, coral, and fish swimming around, and a beach sand carpet for the floor. The bed is a water bed which I love, on my left wall there stand 2 tall book shelf's and beside them is an area full of couches, pillows and other comfy stuff for an awesome reading corner, on the other side there are also two doors that lead me to my closet and bathroom on the right end and a TV that is huge again with every kind of trinkets imaginable. We then go and explore the basement where we find a huge pool just sitting there ready to be used and a bar for refreshments among other stuff plus the coolest sound systems ever. As soon as we are done exploring we run back to the foyer where Chiron and Hera were talking. We tackle Hera and say thanks so many times but we also knew that all the other Olympians are involved in the making of it since everyone put some of their personality in it and will thank them later.
“There is one more thing that I want to show you.” Hera tells us. She leads us back upstairs to our bedrooms but stops in front of the doors. Just now do I notice the switched that is beside our doors.
“When you want to visit Olympus you just have to turn the switch on and when you open your door and step inside you will automatically be transported to your rooms on Olympus so that you can visit any time you get homesick or want to see one of us.” Hera tells us. We both hug her for that and are so excited that we will be able to visit anytime we want too. Chiron just shakes his head at that but he knows that we have to attend meetings and other stuff on Olympus since we are part of that and the portal will make it way easier.
“Does it also work from Olympus?” Thalia asks Hera. She nods her head and we know that we can even sleep in our own rooms at home. Since its only 2 pm we decide that we want to try the lava wall. At the wall we meet Annabeth who is just coming down with a few burnt spots on her t-shirt which is just simply orange, the color I simply hate with the Half-Blood logo over the right heart and a pair of blue jeans. She smiles when she sees us coming. In that moment Luke also comes and when he sees us he frowns but quickly makes a small smile but you can still see the dislike in his face. We smile back although it was a kind of forced smile.
“Percy, Thalia.” He greets
“Luke.” We both say back.
“Percy, would you mind sparring with me for a bit?” Luke asks me eyeing the two swords on my waist.
“Sure why not.” I tell him. We start to walk toward the sword arena, Thalia and Annabeth deciding to join us. Once we enter the arena both Luke and I take our places on the opposite side. Luke pulls out his sword and I can tell that it is mortal steel and celestic bronze. I decided to pull Fluctus letting both metals shine bright and see Luke visibly gulping.

At that moment Chiron walks into the arena and sees us ready to fight each other. He quickly explains the rules about no killing, no powers, and just a fair sword fight the first one to yield or lose his sword loses. We bow to each other than wait for the first person to make a move. Luke has a very good stand and no weaknesses as far as I can see but if you get a person moving you can always tell what is exposed and what is well guarded. Luke decides to attack, he races forward and moves his right arm down in an arch aiming for my left side. I pull up my sword and block his attack, we both make sword strikes trying to get the upper hand. I use my still small size as an advantage and weave in and out of his guard. We switch from offence to defense and back again always tangling with each other as if it was a mere game. He tries to slash at across and I quickly drop to the floor. Thinking he has the advantage, he advances but I hit him in the chest with my feet then flip upright only having a few second before I have to block a heavy upper cut that lands him inside my guard. Seeing his chance Luke tries a disarming move that I don’t see coming but catch myself before my sword flies out of my hand and I turn the tides on Luke using the same attack on him and he isn’t so quick so it results in his sword flying across the arena and landing with the blade stuck in the ground. I step back the same time as Chiron yells the game over and me the victor. Only then do I notice that the whole camp is watching us. I look over at Thalia and see her smile at me so I give her a lopsided grin then walk over to her. She hands me a canister of nectar to heel my wounds then a bottle of water which I immediately gulp down. She then gives me a pat on the back and tells me I did well.
“I wasn’t just good, I was awesome.” I tell Thalia.
“Don’t let your ego get to big or I’ll stick the hunter on you” She tells me. I stick out my tongue but just as she is about to hit me we hear a loud horn and not just any horn the hunters horn. Thalia and I race towards the hill and just as we reach the top the hunters come running in. When they see us they smile and we join them. They all give us hugs and the campers are confused as to why the man hating hunters are giving a boy hugs. It’s a long story but let’s just say that under the orders of Zeus, Artemis was our archery instructor and that meant hanging out with her and her hunters, for the first week I was tortured but by the second they warmed up to me and by the time we learned how to shoot a bow and arrow like a pro well more Thalia then me, the hunters and I were best friends. Now we get along just great.
“Hey Artemis what are you doing here?” Thalia greets and asked.
“There will be a meeting on Olympus soon, so I was ordered to bring the girls and go to Olympus in 3 Days for the meeting which you will have to attend too.” She tells us.
“Great, another meeting where there will be more fighting and other stuff that is boring that always outweigh the important topics.” I say throwing my hands up.
“You sleep thru most of it anyways.” Thalia points out.
“Yah but with good reasons, it’s so uninteresting at times that you don't really miss anything.” I say back.
“You should really pay more attention because there are some interesting things discussed and said at those meeting.” Thalia says back.
“Why should I pay attention at the meeting if I can watch it on the Olympus TV channel after thanks to the camera's Apollo and Hermes installed.” I say back.
“Percy paying attention at the meetings will sometimes give you info in advanced and you are less surprised when they happen.” Zoe says.
“But the meetings are so boring I can’t help it.” I say but before anyone could say anything else a scream comes from over the hill. We all run up to see what is going on when we see a boy with dark brown hair and green eyes running up the hill with a hell hound chasing after him. Thalia and I both run to help him, while I distract the hell hound Thalia will help the boy across. The hunters are shooting arrows but they seemingly just bounce off the hell hound so I use my swords to kill him. The hell hound erupts into gold dust but just as I think that the area is clear another hell hound jumps out from behind a tree and runs to Thalia and the boy. I knew that I’m not going to reach them in time.
“Thalia watch out.” I yell at her but it is too late, she just has enough time to push the boy out of the way before the hell hound pounces on her. She lets out a loud scream and I know that the hell hound had dug it claws into her chest. I race towards the hell hound and kill it but it is too late. I know that the wound is deep and that it punctured important organs meaning that Thalia isn’t going to make it.
“Please don't die Thalia. I need you to keep me in check and to be my bigger sister.” I say already crying. Artemis comes running trying to help but as soon as she sees Thalia she knows that it’s no use.
“Be strong Percy, you can make it without me and I will always be in your heart.” Thalia says reaching up to cup my cheek. I try to give her a small smile but fail.
“But I want you to stay with me. “I say.
“Don’t worry my son she won’t die.” A voice says in my head but I knew that it isn’t Poseidon or Zeus but the voice did seem familiar.
“How?” I ask back.
“I will turn her into a tree the same as the other, then when you find the Golden Fleece you can save her.” The voice says.
“Ok. So I will get my sister back?” I ask.
“Yes.” The voice says and with that Thalia turns into a tree. Everyone is amazed and astounded at what is happening. They thankfully believed that it was Zeus since a thunderbolt hit Thalia. I just sat there crying over her apparent death but that escaped my mind and I just sat there crying. A few people try to drag me away but I am stuck. Artemis and the girls even try but fail so they leave me there to cry and think about who the voice belongs too.

I don’t know how long I sit there but it is long. It isn’t until my stomach starts to growl that I slowly make my way back to the cabin where I just grab a box of cereal and go to my room, I flip the switch and enter my Olympian room where I flop down on the couch and turn on the TV. After a while I hear the door opening and dad comes walking in. He sees me on the couch and joins me. He doesn’t look any better than I do but that was to be expected since Thalia is also like a daughter to him.
“It’s going to be alright Percy, we will find a way to save her.” He tells me. I just mumble something not even paying attention.
“Are Thalia and I really your children?” I ask dad out of the blue. He seemed startled by the question.
“No but you have been with us since you were babies. I can’t tell you who your real parents are yet, but it will be revealed over time as of right now I can’t tell you.” He tells me. I don’t mind and just snuggle myself closer to him just wanting some company. Being only a kid, I still want some snuggle time and be comforted by someone. We just sit there for a while until a knock comes from my door and another person enters the room. I look over and see that it’s Zeus and he looks as bad as dad.
“We will save her Percy. Right now you have to get back to camp since the new kid that arrived may be a crucial part in the prophecies to come.” Zeus tells us.
“What part will he play in the prophecies to come and what is to come?” I ask.
“That I can’t tell you but you will find out in time.” He answers. I know that answer is coming so I get myself out of dad’s comfortable position and go into the bathroom to freshen up. I take my time since I know a lot of questions were going to be asked once I return. So when 2 hours are up I go back to the cabin.

Chapter Text

As I walk into the cabin it feels like there is a hole in the building, the emptiness without my sister being here. Deciding to change since I have been wearing the same outfit for 2 days I step into my closet, I look around and choose some black clothes like usual. I take out a pair of black jeans and a black cargo shirt. On my way out I catch a glimpse of silver. I step closer and smile as I pick up the item. It's a chain with a ring that says “together forever” on it from Thalia, she gave it to me on our 3rd birthday saying that I should wear it although I never did. I grab it give it a quick kiss then put it on and hide it under my shirt. The meaning came from a huge fight that we had about something and we didn’t talk for a while until it was our birthday. She gave it to me and said that no matter what happens we stick together through thick and thin. She has her ring always around her neck or on her finger and always bugs me that I didn’t wear the ring she gave me and I always replied it was to cheesy. Though this time I am wearing it and determine to change that attitude from this day forth.

As I walk to the front door of our cabin, I stop for a few minutes and take a deep breath then I open the door and am greeted by everyone walking to the dining hall and I can tell from the setting of the sun that it is dinner time. So I join the crowds and walk towards the dining pavilion. When Chiron sees me he smiles and came over.
“Percy it’s good to see that you are okay, after the unfortunate circumstance.” He says.
“I’m alright I figured that staying in my cabin isn’t going to help anyone.” I say. With that he nods his head and I walk to the Poseidon table and take a seat. I see that the new kid is sitting at the Hermes table so I figure that his godly parent hasn’t claimed him yet, but then I remember the thing that Zeus told me before I left and I figured that he would be claimed by tonight.
“We welcome the hunters to camp and as tradition states there will be a friendly capture the flag game. That will be Campers vs. Hunters.” Chiron announces. The crowd starts cheering and dinner is served. After dinner the teams gather and do strategy thinking. Since it’s against the Hunters the whole camp is one team. Annabeth and Clarisse a daughter of Ares are fighting over the position on who will lead the teams. I don’t pay attention to them, my attention is on the new kid.
“What’s his name?” I ask Luke who is standing next to me.
“That’s Eric King. His godly parent hasn’t claimed him but since he lived with his mom I would say that it is one of the guys.” Luke replies.
“So any guess on whose kid he is?” I ask.
“No clue what so ever. Although he has the eyes of Poseidon it’s just that the hair doesn’t match.” Luke replies
“Your right, hopefully we will find out soon.” I say. Luke only mumbles a yes and with that our team runs of into the forest to hide the flag. I don’t want to be guarding the flag so I pull out my swords and go to find some hunters but I am actually trailing Eric. Annabeth positioned him by the creek which is also the boarder to guard and stop any hunter from getting thru.
“Annabeth sent me here to help you guard the creek.” I tell him. He sighs in relieve.
“Thank gods. I probably would of have been killed in the first few seconds of the game.” He tells me.
“No prob. She probably just wants to test your skills. She does that with everyone she meets. I got to fight Luke when I first came here.” I tell him.
“You had to fight the best swordsmen at camp. How did you survive?” He asks me.
“Easy, you observe your opponents find his weakness then attack.” I tell him.
“I’m sorry about your sister. I didn’t want her to die by saving me.” He says.
“No worry. Now stop talking we got company.” I tell him. At that moment Zoe and two other hunters step out of the bush and smile at me.
“Hey Percy. Long-time no see.” She says.
“It hasn’t been that long Zoe. It has only been 3 days since I last saw you.” I reply. She smiles at me then pulls out her hunting knives her sisters doing the same but she orders them to stand back. She then readies herself and attacks. I push Eric out of the way making him fall into the creek and pull my two swords up making an x just in time for Zoe’s knife to land in the middle in the blink of an eye I see her second move coming. She pulls out another knife and tries to stab my side. I push up with my two swords then swing the left one to my right side blocking her knife. We stand there a while not doing anything before both of us strike. I pull my right sword up in an arch aiming for her stomach and swing my left sword sideways. She pulls her right knife so it can block the right sword and use her second knife to make me loss my holding on my left sword. So to her satisfaction I drop my left sword.
“Two weapons against one isn’t fair Zoe.” I say but she doesn’t care. So we go back and forth for a while before I bent low picking up my other sword and sweeping her legs out from under her. I then pop up, putting my one sword over her heart and the other under her chin. Zoe knows that she can’t get out up so she drops her hunting knifes and surrenders.
“It’s good to know that you haven’t gotten rusty Percy.” Zoe says then jumps up and disappears into the trees with her sisters who are going to tease her for a while. I smirk and put my swords back into their sheaths.
“That was amazing. You beat one of the oldest and best hunters.” Eric says. I look at him he was still sitting in the creek.
“Aren’t you going to get out of the creek.” I tell him. He also seems to notice that he is still sitting in the creek so he gets out. He isn’t wet though which confirms my suspicions on that he is a son of Poseidon. Now the question is why he hasn’t claimed him. Although I get that dad is slow since he still has Atlantis to watch over and isn’t always paying attention to both the worlds. I look up into the sky.
“Hey dad if you can hear me, Eric is waiting for his claiming.” I tell him thru the mind link. Now you might think why I’m not mad at dad but since dad told me that they aren’t out real fathers I don’t mind and if my dad is an important person I can wait till he comes.
“Are you ok with him being my son.” Poseidon asks in my mind.
“Yah I’m fine with it. Just wait till we get back to the dining hall till you claim him so that everyone can see.” I tell him. I don’t hear a reply but I can tell that he is agreeing with my suggestion. We hear the horn in the distance signaling that the game is over. We walk back to the dining hall to find that the hunters have won another capture the flag game and thus continuing their unbeaten streak. The campers are sad about another loss to them and the hunters as happy as ever. I go over to congratulate the hunters on capturing the flag when everyone's eyes turn to Eric and I can tell that he has just been claimed.
“All hail Eric King, son of Poseidon god of the sea.” Chiron announces. Everyone goes onto their knees but I don’t. Eric seems to be happy that he can get out of the Hermes cabin and be on his own. He smiles once he sees me.
“I would say that this make us half brothers.” Eric tells me.
“Guess it does.” I say not sounding very excited about it but no one seems to notice my non excitement. No one seems to notice my sudden change in mood either but that was alright. Eric walked over to the Poseidon cabin but he was wondering why I am not joining him.
“Percy where are you going?” Eric asks me.
“I’m going to my cabin. Since I made a deal with Hera that I will sleep in her cabin and I can’t break that deal. So see you tomorrow.” I tell him and with that I walk into Hera's cabin. Inside the cabin I see Hera standing there and she knows that I am missing Thalia since she is the goddess of family. Then the tears come again and I run into Hera and she embarrasses me with a hug. We stand there for a while and she tells me that everything is going to be alright. We then sit down on the couch, just talking about what is going on at Camp and how I like it, and we talk about what is going on in Olympus. When we finish our conversation Hera leaves and I go to bed deciding to sleep on Olympus because the cabin still seems so empty. At 7 in the morning I am rudely awakened by Poseidon shaking me furiously.
“Percy wake up there is an emergency meeting at Olympus and you need to attend, so get up, out of bed and ready.” Dad says.
“Fine just give me 15 minutes and I will be ready.” I say, but I knew that dad isn’t going to leave till I am ready. So I stand up and go into the bathroom. I shower to freshen up and 10 minutes later I am out of the bathroom, then I go into the closet and change into my formal outfit. So black pants, black shirt, both my swords at my side, crown on my head and a black cape in the back.

Poseidon nods in agreement and as promised 15 minutes later we are walking on the street towards the throne room. Once we enter we go towards our respected seats. The air is tight in here and the tension even higher.
“Since we are all here now we can finally begin the meeting.” Zeus says.
“Why did you call us here at this ungodly hour?” I ask Zeus.
“It’s 7:20 in the morning Percy, it's not an ungodly hour.” Apollo says.
“It is for Percy.” Poseidon says trying to suppress a laugh.
“To answer your question Percy I called you here because my master thunderbolt was stolen during the night.” Zeus says.
“Who do expect stole your master bolt?” I ask.
“It could have been anyone and to be honest before you changed us I would have accused my brothers of steeling my weapon by hiring a minion to do it since we made an oath never to steel each other’s power weapon but I wouldn't know who would steel it now.” Zeus says.
“So you want me to find out who stole your master bolt?” I ask him. Zeus nods his head in agreement.
“When you return to camp tell Chiron that a camper has to go to the Oracle to get the prophecy to retrieve the bolt.” Apollo tells me. I nod my head with that I bow to the council then leave to go to camp. Once I arrive and change my outfit into something more practical I go to Chiron and tell him to call a meeting after breakfast.
“What’s it about son?” Chiron asks
“Zeus master bolt was stolen and one of the campers needs to go to the Oracle to get the Prophecy to retrieve it and I already know that I am not the one in the prophecy, just a helper.” I tell him.
“So the child can only be Eric then.” He says.
“I guess it does make him the kid.” I say and with that I walk to the dining pavilion to get some food. Since I’m not very hungry I put most of my food into the fire as an offering for the gods. I don’t sit with Eric although he is waving at me to come and join him but instead I just lean myself onto a column and eat the rest of the food. At that moment Chiron comes marching into the pavilion. He put his stick down and struck the ground a few times to get everyone's attention.
“There will be a meeting for all head counselors in the big house in 10 minutes, so finish up your food and come.” He announces. Since I am already done with my food I give the plate to one of the harpies and already go to the big house's meeting room which is a ping pong table with chairs set around it. I lean myself against the wall and wait for the others. One by one everyone comes in. Katie Gardner as head for the Demeter cabin, Clarisse La Rue for the Ares Cabin, Lee Fletcher for the Apollo Cabin, Luke Castellan for the Hermes Cabin, Annabeth Chase for the Athena, Eric King for the Poseidon Cabin since I gave him that position, Castor for the Dionysus cabin, Charles Beckendorf for the Hephaestus Cabin and Silena Beauregard for the Aphrodite Cabin then comes Chiron.
“I have called you all here because Zeus master bolt has been stolen.” Chiron announces. There is uproar, Chiron trying to calm everyone down but nothing is working so I have to take matters into my own hand.
“SHUT UP.” I yell over the noise and at once as if someone turned on the mute switch everyone is quiet. I motion for Chiron to continue.
“A quest shall be given to someone so we can help Zeus retrieve the bolt and find who stole it.” He says
“Who is going on the quest?” Annabeth asks.
“I have thought long about this and decided that Eric shall be the leader of the quest. Now Eric go up to the attic and ask the Oracle for the prophecy.” Chiron tells him. He numbly stands up and walks towards the attic to ask the Oracle. As soon as he leaves there is complaining on why he gets to go.

Eric's P.O.V

When I hear my name called to lead the quest, I am stunned like why would they choose me to find the bolt. Chiron had told me to go up to the attic and get the prophecy so right now I stand in front of the stairs. I pull all my courage together and climb up the stairs. Once I am at the top I walk towards the end of the attic room. There is a whole bunch of stuff lying around the room that has name tags of stuff gathered in different quests. I approach the Oracle. The moment I step close she comes to live.
“Approach seeker and ask.” An old raspy voice says. I realized that it is the Oracle.
“How do I find and bring back Zeus master bolt?” I ask. The Oracle is quiet for a few seconds before green mist flows out of her mouth and she begins to talk.
“You shall go west, and face the god who has turned
You shall find what was stolen, and see it safely returned
You shall be betrayed by the one who calls you a friend
And you shall fail to save what matters most in the end.”
With that the Oracle falls quiet. I take that as my que to walk back downstairs.

Percy's P.O .V (While Eric is in the attic)

The meeting room is in disagreement some say they should go, the others say that he should go. No one agrees to anything, before I tell everyone to be quiet again Chiron slams his stick into the ground and like the other time everyone instantly quiets down.
“He is leading this quest because sources tell me that he is the child of the major prophecy.” Chiron says.
“Eric is only 10 years of age, what about Percy?” Annabeth asks.
“I may be 12 but that doesn’t make me the child.” I tell him.
“It still doesn’t make sense.” She says.
“I know it doesn’t but I am on strict orders from Zeus and he says that Eric is the child and that I should help a little but mostly stay out of it.” I tell her.
“So who is going on the quest with him?” Lee asks.
“That is Eric’s decision.” Chiron says. At that moment Eric comes back from the attic and he doesn’t seem very cheerful.
“So what did the Oracle say?” Chiron asks.
“You shall go west, and face the god who has turned, You shall find what was stolen, and see it safely returned, You shall be betrayed by the one who calls you a friend, And you shall fail to save what matters most in the end.” Eric says.
“That doesn’t sound very cheerful.” Clarisse says after Eric finishes the prophecy.
“Be quiet Clarisse. So who will you take on this quest?” Chiron asks.
“I will take Annabeth for strategy and Percy.” Eric says. Before Chiron can dismiss the meeting I intervened.
“Sorry Eric but I can’t come with you; I have been summoned to Olympus for various meetings and other things that require my attention. I just came here to deliver a message and see who will go on the quest.” I tell him.
“In that case I take Luke as the third person.” Eric says.
“Then it’s decided. Eric, Annabeth and Luke shall leave tomorrow morning to go on the quest. They shall leave at 7 am sharp.” Chiron says with that the gang nods and the meeting is dismissed.
“Percy wait a minute.” Chiron tells me before I can leave.
“What’s up Chiron?” I asked.
“I thought you were going to help save Zeus master bolt.” Chiron says to me.
“I was planning on but in the last second I got a message from Zeus that there will be a few meetings that I will have to attend and I will try and help the quest form the shadows but in all I have meetings to attend.” I tell him. He nods his head and I walk out. Apollo's lying lessons work like a charm, not like I’m proud of it but it has to be done. I go into my cabin and to the training room to blow off some steam. I set the level to medium and pull out my two swords. It is so nice and exhilarating that I can fight again without getting in trouble for hurting people. When I am done with my training I am sweating and breathing heavy but it was fun. As I am leaning into the fridge to get me some cool water someone knocks on the door. I grab the water, then go to the door to answer it. When I open the door it is Annabeth on the other side.
“I thought that you would have loved to be on the quest.” Annabeth tells me.
“Well sometimes other things just get in the way.” I tell her.
“Your hiding something and I am going to find out what that is. You say Eric is the child of the prophecy but since Thalia is dead it should fall to you.” She tells me, I flinch when she mentions my sister but don’t let it show.
“I wish you good luck on your quest now if you’ll excuse me I have to hit the shower then be on my way to Olympus.” I tell her and with that I close the door. As the day comes to an end my plan comes to mind. Since they are going to have to travel to Uncle Hades I have to beat them there and the only way that is going to happen if I am going to use the Labyrinth to do that. It’s going to be dangerous and reckless but it will be the only way. If I find Hephaestus Smith shop I can ask him for one of his spiders to lead me to Hades. Right now all I want to do is sleep, so I go into my room and fall asleep on my bed as soon as I hit the pillow, not even bothering to change or shower.

Chapter Text

As the prophecy group heads out Chiron wishes them good luck and they enter the camp van and drive off to New York. I watch all this happen from my cabin door. When Chiron sees me he lifts his eyebrow and waves at me. I just give him a short nod and go back into my cabin. I pack some supplies than walk out of the cabin and towards Zeus fist. It is a rock formation that looks like a fist and to honor Zeus the campers named it after him. If you look really close you can see the delta sign and when you press it you fall into the Labyrinth. Once you are in you can explore the world if you know where you are going and since Thalia and I found the entrance on Olympus we have been exploring the labyrinth for a long time of course with a little help from Hephaestus. Once I am in the labyrinth I make my way towards his forge so that he can help me get to Hades realm faster plus I also have a favor to ask him. On the way to the forge I find something that will help me out, in the corner I see a small metallic spider and I instantly know that it is from him. I pick up the small metallic object and press the reset button that will lead it back to his forge. I place it to the floor and it swarms into the darkness. I follow the spider through endless hallways and turns until we finally arrive at two huge metallic doors. Pushing them open the spider scuttles inside and I follow. I instantly know that I am in his forge with all the hammers, metallic items and other things lying around the room. The spider goes to a huge guy swinging a hammer at something, as soon as the spider is on his shoulder he stops.
“I thought you were lost you little thing.” He tells the spider. At that moment I clear my throat and Hephaestus turns around. When he sees me a smile appears on his face.
“Percy what brings you here?” He asks.
“I need two favors, one a way to Uncle Hades and the other one to make my swords better.” I tell him. He nods his head.
“Let’s do the one with the swords first. What do you want to change?” He asks. I pull out my two swords and lay them down on the workbench. Fluctus is a sword made from Imperial Gold and Celestic Bronze and Riptide is made from Celestial Bronze and a form of silver that I can’t identify.
“I want to put human steel in Fluctus and Stygian Iron in Riptide. I also want a new sword make out of all four metals and the silver that is in Riptide. Maybe you can also find out what kind of silver it is.” I tell Hephaestus. I choose Stygian Iron because being blessed by Hades gives you that awesome thing. He nods his head and gets to work. In less than 30 minutes my two the swords were ready and look awesome. Hephaestus then tells me that my special order will be ready when I have completed the quest at hand and that he will have the answer ready for me then too. I thank Hephaestus and then he also gives me a spider and that will lead me to the entrance of the underworld and will land me in front of Hades palace. I thank him then take the spider press the button and follow.

~

I arrive at a staircase and instantly know that it goes down to the Underworld. I will surely need the spider again so I pick it up and deactivate it, then place it into my bag. I descend down the staircase and can hear the whales of the dead and the moaning. Once I reach the bottom I step outside and am right in front of Hades palace. Hephaestus wasn’t kidding I am really close. I knock on the door and hear a faint come in. Once I open the door I see Persephone sitting in her throne looking very board.
“Percy what brings you here?” She asks perking up instantly.
“I came to cash in the favor that Hades owes me.” I tell her.
“Wait a second. I will get him.” She says and with that she walks off. I stand there for a while and wait. About 5 minutes later I hear two people bickering and instantly know that Demeter and Hades are fighting over having cereal for every meal again. I can’t help but smile when I hear that. They enter the room but are still fighting. Demeter looks away and in that moment she sees me.
“Percy how are you. Have you been eating your cereal?” Demeter asks me.
“I’m good and yes I have been eating my cereal.” I tell her slightly lying. At that moment Hades turns around and instantly knows why I am here.
“Came to cash in the favor that you have?” Hades asks.
“Yes I am here to cash in the favor. There are 3 members on a quest on their journey here a son of Poseidon, daughter of Athena, and a son of Hermes. They are sent on the quest because Zeus master bolt was stolen and by the looks of the empty spot on your throne I say that your Helmet of Darkness was stolen too.” I say. Hades nods his head, confirming my suspicion.
“I want you to let the members of the quest pass and not keep them here, they need to fight Ares to get the items back because he stole them from you so he could get a war out of it since it has been so boring lately.” I say him.
“Why would you say that Ares stole the items?” Hades asks.
“Because at the last meeting he seemed to smile more and got a grin on his face when Zeus said that his bolt was missing.” I tell him.
“That makes sense, but why would the quest members come here?” He asks.
“They think that you stole the bolt to get revenge on your brother from denying you access from Olympus.” I tell him.
“I may hate my brother but I would never steel his weapon of power. Even though I find that he is an arrogant jerk, I love it here in the underworld and wouldn’t want to take his spot on the Olympian council.” Hades says.
“So will you mysteriously lead the quest members in the right direction?” I ask him.
“Yes I will.” He says and with that I take my leave.
“One more thing Percy, the quest members are right now on their way to the St. Louis Gateway Arch.” Demeter says. I nod my head in thanks then get teleported to the train station of St. Louis, where I see Annabeth leading the boys towards the Arch.

Annabeth's P.O.V

We meet on half-blood hill at 7 am. Everyone is there on time and we say goodbye to Chiron while he wishes us good luck on our quest. Before we leave though, I see Percy leaning against his door frame looking at us. I wonder why he doesn't come with us and I know that it’s a lie with the whole needing to be on Olympus for a meeting. I am trying to wrap my head around the problem and figure it out but just can’t. I follow Luke and Eric towards the camp van where Argus our 100 eye security guy will drive us to the bus station. Being a demigod and having ADHD the drive felt like it took forever even though it only took 10 minutes. It states in the prophecy that we need to head west, also since Chiron suspects the Hades stole the bolt we are on our way to Los Angeles since the entrance to the Underworld is there. When we arrive at the bus station Argus kicks us out of the bus and drives off.
“So we need to find a bus that is heading out of town and from there take a train the rest of the way.” Eric tells us.
“Why don’t we just take a train directly to Los Angeles?” Luke asks.
“So we don’t attract so many monsters.” I tell him. He only nods his head. We decide to take a bus to Philadelphia and from there a train to Los Angeles even though it will be risky. We enter the bus and a few minutes later it departs, just as we reach the outskirts of New York I notice three old ladies sitting in the back that don’t look friendly. I instantly know that they are monsters.
“How did they track us here this easy?” I mutter but Luke hears me.
“Who followed us Annabeth?” He asks.
“There are 3 monsters sitting in the very back of the bus and it's only a matter of time before they decide to do something.” I tell them. Luke looks towards them and in that moment they stand up.
“You better do something quick since they are coming towards us.” Luke says.
“Eric can you control the puddles on the ground so that the bus comes to a halt?” I ask him. I’m thankful that it had rained the night before so that Eric can use his powers and control that water so that the tiers instantly stop, the next minute there is a jerk and the bus begins to swerve before it hits the side planks of the road. Everyone is up in an instance and wants to get out of the bus as soon as possible. They all rush to the exits and we lose the monsters in the crowd then run into the forest not looking back.

Since we don’t have a map, I am clueless about which way to head and soon we are lost. Stopping for a break Luke and Eric stomachs begin to growl signalling that they are hungry and all I have in my backpack are some protein bars which they don’t want to eat. I tell them to not be fussy but they still refuse to eat them so with no other choice we continue on our journey of finding some form of transportation. All of the sudden Luke stops and smells the air.
“Do you smell that?” He asks us. I smell the air but shake my head so does Eric.
“We smell nothing Luke.” I tell him. But he doesn’t give in so easily he walks into the direction and tells us he is following the smell of food. We have no other choice but to follow him even if he is delusional from the lack of proper food intake.

A few minutes later we arrive at a street and on the other side stands a building that says “Aunty Ems Garden Emporium”. I now too smell the food that is coming from that place and we walk towards it mesmerized. Once inside it is like heaven, there are all kinds of food lying around, from corndogs, burgers, fries, too ice cream and more.
“Hello children, what are the three of you doing out here in the middle of nowhere?” A voice asks us. We all turn around to find a middle aged woman, with a turban on her head standing at one of the food stands. She seems very suspicious and weird. Before the boys can answer I intertwine.
“We are orphans who ran away from our terrible Orphanage trying to find a new home.” I tell her.
“That is very sad. You must be starving, get yourself some food.” She tells us. The boys immediately run to the nearest food stand and dig in.
“You have very beautiful hair.” She tells me.
“I used to have that kind of hair too, once upon a time ago but then an unfortunate accident happened and it all changed.” She tells me. I just nod my head trying to figure her out. While the boys are too busy to notice anything I walk around the place looking at things. There are a lot of stone figures standing everywhere.
“These look so real.” I say to myself.
“In fact they are.” The woman says and in that moment I realize where we are. We are in the layer of Medusa. I turn to find her taking of her turban. In that moment I run back to the boys to see them still eating.
“Stop eating we have to get out of here, we are in the layer of Medusa.” I yell at them and they instantly drop their food and we dash towards the door.
“Not so fast.” Medusa says and appears from the side door. We quickly close our eyes and try to hone our senses to find that she is walking towards us.
“I hate your mother for what she did to me daughter of Athena.” She tells me and turns me head to face her. Luke and Eric take the moment of distraction and run somewhere. Medusa doesn’t seem to care since she is focused on me.
“You daughter of Athena are here to pay for what your mother has done.” She tells me. In the distance I hear a truck engine turn on and someone driving through the building. I quickly get out of Medusa's grab and throw myself to the side just as there is a loud bam from the truck hitting Medusa. I open one eye to see Medusa lying unconscious under a truck and Eric and Luke climbing out of the truck and giving each other a high five. Then Eric pulls out his sword and cuts of Medusa's head. We leave the place in a hurry hoping that we don’t attract that much attention. Without my knowledge the boys took Medusa’s head with them thinking that it would be of use to us later. Soon we stumble upon a train station and find a train that is heading to Los Angeles but have a few stops and rest periods. Luke pulls out a lot of money.
“Where did you get that?” I ask him.
“From the Medusa's layer.” He replies and goes over to the ticket both and buys us 3 tickets. We board the train and as soon as we find a seat the train leaves. The ride is very long and goes without trouble and we finally arrive in St. Louis. We have a 3 hour stop and I convince the boys to join me to go look at the Architecture of the arch. As we walk towards the arch I could have sworn that I see Percy following us. It can’t be though since he is somewhere else.

Percy's P.O.V

I follow them till the Arch and figure out a while ago that Annabeth has seen me and just wrote it off as an illusion. They walk slowly so I can follow them in the heavy populated touristy area of St. Louis. When they reach the arch they wait in line for the elevator and I see another person boarding with them. It is the chimera in form of a dog and a fat woman probably its owner. I follow them but go up with the second elevator. When I reach the platform Annabeth is explaining to them how the Arch was build and all that boring stuff and I can tell that the boys aren’t really paying attention to her. There is one other couple with a boy on the platform besides the fat lady and the 3 demigods. The mist is useful in this situation because I see a Chimera while they just see a small dog with its owner. Even Annabeth, Luke and Eric don’t realize what that thing is. I keep in the shadows so the fat lady doesn’t realize that there are 4 demigods on the platform not just 3. Finally the elevator comes back up, the family, Annabeth, and Luke get on but Eric can’t since it’s full.
“You will have to take the next one kid.” The security guy tells him. Eric nods his head and waits for the new one with the chimera and the old hag.
“Where is the lightning bolt son of Poseidon?” The woman asks Eric. He spins around quickly and has his sword in hand. Before he can answer I step out of the shadow.
“What’s it to you Echidna?” I ask her she turns on me and sneers.
“Well if it isn’t his highness the prince of Olympus.” Echidna says. At that Eric's mouth falls to the floor. Apparently no one had told him that I am the prince of Olympus.
“To answer your question, I want to bring it to my master.” She answers.
“We can’t let you do that now can we.” I say as I pull out my two swords that are now even more powerful. She just smiles and lets the Chimera lose. When Eric sees the beast he turns a pale white and I thought that he is going to pass out at any minute.
“Remember your short training at camp.” I tell him. Eric nods his head and takes a deep breath then the Chimera attacks. The growl of the monster blows out the windows and sends glass flying everywhere. I don’t bother to check the damage but just continue to defend myself and try not to get roasted by its fire breath. Eric did pretty well for a newbie holding his own against such a monster. Since it isn’t easy to defeat the Chimera I have to think of a way to escape. Then it hits me, since we are over the Mississippi river we can jump into that.
“Eric jump out the window.” I yell at him as I dodge one of the Chimera’s claws.
“Are you crazy.” He yells back
“It’s our only way of escaping and getting out of the fight alive. It’s not easy to defeat the Chimera.” I yell at him. He sees my reasoning and walks over to the ledge. He looks down and sees the drop to the small river.
“No way man it’s too high.” He tells me since he won’t jump on his own, I slice the paw of the Chimera to make it move back then jumped over its body and push Eric out the window. Then I turn back to the Chimera. I know that if you cut of its heads you can kill the thing which is easier said than done. I dodge one of its paws and go in close having to use my other sword to stop its right paw so it doesn’t crush me. I lift up my left sword and slice of its three heads off at the same time and it explodes into a shower of golden dust. Just as I am getting up I feel movement to my right and pull up my swords efficiently cutting the Echidna in half. Since I don’t want to be found by the police in this mess I jump after Eric and into the Mississippi river. It is polluted beyond fix which is really sad. One of these days I will fix that, once I got out I was greeted by Annabeth looking at me and by the look on her face I will say she is mad.
“What were you thinking pushing Eric out of the Arch.” She yells at me.
“Saving his ass from getting eaten by the Chimera. Plus he is a son of Poseidon the water acts like a cushion and won’t hurt him.” I tell her. At that she calms down.
“You okay?” I ask Eric who just nods his head in shock.
“The Chimera and Echidna are dead and won’t harm us anymore so let’s get back to the train and head towards wherever you’re going.” I say.
“Fine, then let’s get going, the train will leave in a bit. So let’s hurry on back.” Annabeth tells me. With that we go back to the train station and board the train. Then the journey continues and I can feel that it is going to be a hard one.

Chapter Text

The train ride to Los Angeles goes by without any trouble which is very surprising. Eric, Luke and Annabeth are mad at me for some reason but I am fine with that. There is one more stop that we have to make and that is in Denver where we only have a 2 hour stop and since we are hungry we decide to go to a diner and grab a bite to eat. Halfway through our meal a guy riding a motorcycle shows up and parks in front of the Diner. The guy on it is no one other than Ares. Ares and I have a love hate relationship ever since I beat his ass in battle. When he enters everyone is rushing towards him asking if he wants anything. His eyes scan the crowds and land on us.
“Cousin what bring you here?” Ares asks me.
“You know exactly why I’m here.” I reply.
“True that.” Ares says pushing Luke against the window and taking a seat in our booth.
“So why are you here?” I ask him leaning forward with one hand on my sword.
“I need a favor from you to retrieve my shield from a water park after I left it there when I was on a date with Aphrodite.” He says.
“I don’t ever want to be involved in your little play with Hephaestus.” I tell him.
“Please little cousin in return I will give you some things that will help you ease your journey.” Ares says.
“We would be honored Lord Ares.” Annabeth says giving me a glare.
“Great. My shield is at Waterland Park and I expect you back in an hour.” Ares says and with that he leaves.
“Why did you agree?” I ask Annabeth.
“Because it’s not wise to anger a war god let alone an Olympian god.” She says.
“He is an arrogant prick and I don’t like him. Yes we’re cousins but we have many fights so I’m used to it. We better get that shield since someone said yes.” I say giving a glare to Annabeth and stand up going towards the doors with the rest following me. Once outside we head in the direction where Waterland is. When we arrive it of course is a closed down park. Since breaking the chains isn’t an option we climb over the fence and go over to the ride of love where Ares most likely lost the shield. Not only do we find the shield but also find Aphrodite's scarf. I’m about to go down but Eric says that he will do it. I let him do it and Annabeth joins him. Once they get down there they lift up the shield and scarf but also make some mechanical trap come to live. I should have known that Hephaestus was behind this and that Ares just doesn’t want to be caught. There are spiders crawling out of the sides and running towards the love ride boat, then a camera appears and I know that it is broadcasting live to Olympus. I knew this is a water ride so there must still be a control switch somewhere to make the spiders stop coming since Annabeth is already having a panic attack. I run towards the main control booth and find the switch to turn the water on but when I try to push it up it won’t move. I call for Luke to come and help me but it still doesn't budge and inch. I get an idea that should have been used in the beginning that you can just pull the water out but I want Eric to do it so that he will get some experience in controlling the water. I run out of the booth and back towards Eric and Annabeth who is trying to get away from the spiders.
“Eric use your water powers to summon the water that lies in the pipes the switch won’t move.” I yell at him.
“Why don’t you do it?” He asks.
“We can only do it together.” I answer. With that I see the look of concentration in his eyes and soon I hear the sound of rumbling then water comes flying out. It floods the area and flushes away the spiders but also the boat and it goes onto a bumpy ride all thru the tunnel, Luke and I can both hear Annabeth screaming at the top of her lungs. We both look at each other and smirk knowing we’ll tease her about it later but right now we both sprint to the exit of the tunnel. Only then do we see that the metal gate is closed and we won’t get it open soon enough so we just have to hope that they come up with a plan and they did. Annabeth uses the perfect method to make her and Eric fly over the gate and land in the pool on the bottom. When they exit she throws the shield and scarf too me and tells us that she will never do that again and with that she stomps of back to the Diner. When we got back Ares is already waiting outside and a backpack is standing beside him. I throw him his shield which he easily catches and put the scarf on his bike.
“Thanks cuz. If you ever need anything call on me.” He says and with that he hands us the backpack.
“Yah, like that will ever happen.” I say and glare at him.
“There are some supplies in here for your travel.” He says putting on his helmet and drives off. Annabeth looks at the clock and sees the time and sprints back to the train station and realization dawns on us that we might miss the train. Without checking what is in the backpack I sling it over my shoulder and follow her back to the station. We make it just in time and as we board the train it takes off.

The next stop we’ll be the Underworld. The ride there goes smoothly which is weird but I’m thankful for whatever force holds them away. When we arrive we know that we have to find the entrance to the underworld and the only way I knew from the surface is some kind of record company building and since there are a lot of them in Los Angeles we have our work cut out. I of course know where the entrance to it but choose to withhold that information. We walk around a bit then come to a place called DOA Recording Studios. Annabeth stops and tells us that this must be the place. We enter it to see that it’s full of ghosts and a Charon looking way overworked. When he sees me though he smiles and it is one of those I never want to see again smiles.
“Ah Percy what brings you hear?” He asks.
“I want to visit Uncle H with a few friends.” I say and pointing to my group.
“If you got the right payment.” He says.
“Always one to barging but here you go.” I tell him tossing him 10 Drachmas. He smiles even more when he saw all the money.
“Right this way sir.” He says and with that we follow him into an elevator that will bring us down into the Underworld. It is an awkward ride down and we all just stand there in silence, finally happy when the doors open to reveal the terrifying land known as the realm of Hades. Charon leads us to his gondola that will take us across the River Styx, a river you don’t want to fall into. When we exit on the other side we thank Charon and walk away.
“Percy, will you ask Hades to give me a pay raise or at least a new suit?” Charon asks me.
“Will do.” I tell him and with that we walk on.

It is easy from then on since everyone in the Underworld knows me and even Cerberus isn’t bothering us which is strange since he always loves to give me a big sloppy kiss and wants me to play with him. When we reach the door to Hades palace from the inside we hear bickering and I know that it is Hades and Demeter fighting again. I open the door and walk in. Persephone is the only one to notice us since the other two godly deities are busy fighting. I clear my throat but that isn't enough so I stomp my foot down making the floor tremble and getting their attention. Hades is about to snap at the person who interrupts him but relax when he sees that it is only me. I step aside and motion for Eric and Annabeth to come forward.
“Hello Lord Hades.” They say bowing.
“What do you want?” He asks in a board tone
“We have come to ask you if you have Zeus Thunderbolt.” Annabeth asks. She expects him to lose his temper for asking him that but he stays calm much to her surprise.
“No I haven’t taken it and my helm of darkness has been stolen too.” He says. Then looks at me and I don’t know why then I follow his glance and it leads to the backpack on my back and then it clicks. I shrug it off my shoulders and set it down.
“I do sense my helm though as if it’s close by.” Hades says not taking his eyes of me.
“How can that be?” Eric asks him.
“I don’t know the answer to that question.” Hades says and with that I open the backpack to see both Zeus master bolt and Hades helm of darkness inside.
“I knew he was an idiot for a reason.” I say.
“Who is an idiot Perseus?” Hades ask.
“Why Uncle the person who stole both your and Uncle Zeus weapon is no one other than Ares since he is the one who gave us the backpack.” I say to Uncle taking out the helmet and tossing it to him.
“Why would he do that?” Annabeth asks.
“It’s quite easy daughter of Athena, to cause war between the gods of course since that is what he lives for.” I say.
“It can’t all be him though someone has to be controlling him or at least persuade him to do that.” Eric says. I nod my head and it falls to Luke who is slowly backing out of the room.
“You shall be betrayed but the one who calls you a friend.” I say and at that moment Annabeth gets a look of enlightenment when she looks at Luke.
“Why would you do it?” She asks almost in tears.
“The gods are wrong and should be replaced. Kronos has promised the new era and I am willing to do it.” He says.
“So did you help in stealing the items?” Eric asks.
“No. Kronos infiltrated Ares mind and he did it on his own just by a little mind control.” Luke says and with that he disappears before the skeletons can catch him.
“See you at the Winter Solstice Uncle.” I say and we leave to bring the bolt back to Zeus. On our way out of the Underworld Annabeth is in tears and can’t believe that Luke her best friend since she was 7 years old betrayed her even Eric is disappointed. When we arrive back in front of the DOA Recording studio we head for the train station. Since Ares is following us I tell the gang to head to the train station and that I will meet them there soon. I give the backpack to Annabeth and go into another street to get his attention onto me and it works since he is following me all the way to the beach.
“What do you want Ares?” I ask him.
“I want recognition, I want to be noticed.” He says.
“Your just a little baby boy whining like that.” I say while pulling out Riptide and Fluctus. When I turn around Ares is attacking with pure anger and that is a weakness in sword fighting since you don’t think straight. I just play with him by blocking his attacks and taunting him that only angers him more, then I go on the offence it quickly turns bad for Ares. Using both my swords I twirl around his body, using my fight in a hack and slash attack leaving him with many scars that leak gold. Soon I have enough of him and not much time left so I jump into the air and do a front flip and hit him with both my sword hilts making him faint. I shake my head and turn around and run back to the train station and just in time because the train is about to leave. The ride back to New York is long and boring and Hades has kept his promise on diverting the monsters. We reach New York and take a cab to the Empire State building and walk in. It is almost empty inside and only a few people are inside. We go to the service desk to get the key.
“Key to the 600th floor please.” I say and he only laughs. I see a glass of water by his side and make the water fly out of it. When he sees that he quickly gives us the card and I give him a smile we then go to the elevator, insert the key card and go up to the 600th floor. I don’t know why anyone lets Apollo pick the music it’s terrible like always and I am happy when the ride is finally over. As we walk thru the streets of Olympus everyone bows to me and at first I try to make them stop doing it but soon give up and now only greet them. When we reach the throne room I push the heavy doors open and am met with Zeus and Hera being the only ones who are in there and when they see us coming Zeus stands up and I being the boy I am run to him and give him a hug. Annabeth then comes walking up and giving the backpack to me. I open it and take out Zeus master blot and give it back it him.
“Where did you find it?” He asks.
“Ares gave us the backpack so I assume that he took the weapons. Luke a son of Hermes was also involved and Luke works for Kronos.” I tell him. Zeus just shakes his head and he thanks us for returning his bolt to him.
“Where is Ares right now anyways?” Zeus asks with a mad look on his face.
“I may or may not have left him passed out on a beach in Los Angeles.” I say with a sly smile on my face. Hera laughs at that but with the wave of her hand he lies in the middle of the throne room still unconscious. Zeus throws his master bolt up at the sky and opens the meeting with everyone flashing in. They give thanks to Annabeth and Eric for returning the master bolt and Hera kindly sends them back to camp, while I stay for the meeting. I quickly go to my room and got dressed in a blue shirt, jeans my cape, crown and swords then go to the throne room. When I arrive every Olympian is just getting settled in there thrones. Ares doesn't know what is to come so I just keep my face neutral and walk to my throne and sit down. As soon as everyone is settled Zeus happily reports that he has his bolt back and that he is sorry for freaking out about it. Then he calls Ares to the middle, he is startled at first but then he stands up and walks to the middle.
“Why did you take Hades and my weapon?” Zeus asks Ares.
“I didn’t.” He tried to lie.
“I know from a reliable source that you did indeed steal those weapons.” Zeus says and with that Ares looks at me and gives me a mad look.
“I stole them so that I could see war again and have something to do.” Ares says.
“For your punishment you shall spent 2 weeks with Hera and helping her with things
she needs.” He says.
“So I’m going to be a service person?” Ares asks and the only thing Zeus does is nod his head. With that done we talk about other things but mostly it was just the usual gods bickering and wanting other favors done. Most of which were of course denied on the aspect of being absolutely ridiculous. I of course fell asleep again and am woken up by my throne being warmed before the end is near. I look at Hestia and give her a small curt nod which she returns. Zeus says a few more words then dismisses the meeting and everyone heads out. Dad is proud of me that I helped get Uncle's weapon back. Hephaestus then comes up to me and hands me my new sword in its sheath. I pull out the sword and am amazed at all the different metals that are on the blade. He even managed to somehow add the silver into the sword that makes it look even better, deadlier and astonishing at the same time brutally beautiful. I try a few experimental swings and am satisfied with the balance and heaviness of the blade.
“The silver metal turned out to be Chaos Silver which is even rarer then Stygian Iron and Imperial Gold.” He says and I thank him for finding out the metal.
“I will name the sword Aurorae.” I say and thank him for the amazing sword. He then leaves to go back to his forge. Since I don’t want to go back to camp yet I go to bed in my room and as soon as I hit the pillow I am out.

I sleep like a rock and in the morning get woken up by Hestia. It is weird since usually Poseidon wakes me up. Hestia tells me that he has an emergency meeting in Atlantis and I understand that. I tell her that I will go back to camp and eat there with the campers which she understands. She gives me one more hug and a kiss on the forehead then heads back to the hearth. I get dressed in a sea green shirt with black shorts and press the switch to return to the cabin. When I step outside the breakfast horn goes off and I walk to the dining pavilion and join the campers. When I enter I notice the Annabeth and Eric are missing. So I go over to Chiron and ask them where they are. He tells me that yesterday a scorpion had gotten into camp and had stabbed Eric in the shoulder so he received some of its poison and is now in the infirmary. I quickly eat my food and go to the infirmary and see that Eric is just waking up.
“Hey what happened?” I ask walking up to them.
“Luke he came into camp with a scorpion and since you weren’t here he unleashed the scorpion on me.” Eric says.
“Did he say anything else?” I ask.
“Not that I can remember.” He says. I nod my head and walk out and towards the beach. It is a good day to sit at the beach to think. I wonder what will happen next and what move Kronos will make to say that he is back. With that I watch out onto the ocean and just enjoy the view.

Chapter Text

Percy’s P.O.V (2 months later)

It has been two months since we have returned Zeus master bolt and in that time we are gearing up for the fight to come. Mostly patrolling the camp boarders and other things. I have been trying to find the golden fleece like the voice told me to resurrect Thalia and revieve her from the tree to a human. I have done a lot of research on it and found the location of the fleece but I have been busy on Olympus with many meetings to get the war defence going. Also dad and Zeus have been doing mostly everything in their power to keep my mind of the subject of going after the fleece since it’s with a dangerous cyclops and they don’t want me to risk my life only to be disappointed when nothing happens, since they both doubt the claim it can heal anything.

Right now I am sitting in the dining hall eating a snack and talking to a satyr named Grover that I met while on a walk through the camp forests. He is clumsy and ran into a tree. I helped him out and we have been best friends ever since. The conch horn blares into action signalling an attack on camp and the barrier of the camp begins to shutter, shortly after a big bang is heard coming from it. Everyone drops what they are doing and runs towards the camp boarder armed and trying to see what is making all that noise. Then after the 3rd shutter the barrier shatters and in come two mechanical bulls. Clarisse takes on one bull while I take the other. It is hard to defeat the bulls but we finally do it by throwing Greek bombs into their open mouths and the bulls explode in an instance. I run to the barrier to find that Thalia’s tree and the other tree have been poisoned by some sort of green poison that was smeared all over the trees. Just then Zeus and Poseidon flash in and everyone bows except for me.
“Dad, Uncle what are you doing here?” I ask them.
“We heard the commotion at camp and wanted to find out what it was.” Zeus says.
“Someone poisoned both trees keeping this camp save and 2 mechanical bulls got into camp and attacked.” I tell them. When Zeus hears that he runs up to the tree to see for himself. He touches both trees knowing the lives that are kept in them. After a while he returns with a lowered head and mumbling something to himself.
“Chiron how did this happen?” He asks him.
“I don’t know Lord Zeus.” He says and I know that he won’t like that answer and that something is going to go bad.
“That answer isn’t good enough and until further notice you are band from your position as camp director.” Zeus says. I am startled by his decision but I have no power in changing his mind.
“Lord Zeus. Who will then run the camp and organize everything?” He asks Uncle.
“Dionysus who is here as a punishment for a crime he committed last night and Tantalus.” He says.
“Uncle you can’t put a prisoner from the field of punishment in charge.” I say trying to reason with him.
“With Dionysus I’m sure everything will be fine.” Zeus says and with that flashes out.
“Dad can’t you talk to him?” I ask Poseidon turning to him.
“Sorry son but I can’t change his mind this time. He is hurt about Thalia slowly dying and also his other child." Dad tells me.
“I will find something that will save her dad.” I tell him.
“I hope your right.” He says and with that he also flashes out. I walk over to Chiron who looks sad and give him a smile.
“Thanks for trying to save me but there is no changing Zeus mind Percy.” Chiron says and with that walks off. I head off to try and find Grover but after looking for him in the whole camp and even asking a few people I can’t find him anywhere. I then go to the Athena cabin to get Annabeth who has been helping me with some research. When I knock on the door Malcolm one of Annabeth’s siblings opens the door.
“Annabeth is in her room.” He tells me. I nod my head and walk to her room. When I enter she has her head in a book. I clear my throat and she looks up and when she sees me she smiles. Eric and Annabeth have gotten quite close over the months and we are best friends ever since she got over the hate for me.
“What are you looking at?” I ask.
“I have been researching the legend of the golden fleece which states that it can heal pretty much anything and maybe it can fix Thalia’s tree and get her back. Maybe we can get a quest form Chiron to go get it.” She says.
“Have fun with that since Chiron just got suspended and replaced by Tantalus for not being a protector and other things.” I tell her.
“Why would he get fired and replaced?” She asks.
“Who knows why but getting a quest now is going to be hard.” I tell her. She still wants to try so we go to the big house and to our disbelieve Chiron is already gone and Tantalus is already there. I nod at Dionysus and he nods back looking board.
“We want a quest to retrieve the Golden Fleece so we can save the boarder.” Annabeth tells Tantalus.
“No quests are allowed, but since your here already you can announce to the campers that I am reinstating the chariot race also that the first race is in 1 week.” Tantalus says and turns his attention back to Dionysus. With that we take it as our que to leave and at that moment Eric joins us.
“So what’s up?” Eric asks us.
“Our new camp director is an idiot and he is reinstating chariot racing which ended bad the last time camp had it.” Annabeth says.
“It will be fun. Who are you going to be in a team with?” Eric asks Annabeth.
“Count me out. I need to have a talk with Uncle.” I say and with that Eric and Annabeth go off to strategies what they are going to make for their chariot which is fine by me.

Before I go to Olympus I go visit dad in Atlantis since he has been busy. Knowing I am going down there I smile at seeing Triton again. At first we didn’t like each other but after a little sparring contest we became best friends. So I walk to the beach and dive into the sea. The swim to Atlantis is short and quick as usual. When the guards see me they smile and let me pass. Once inside I go to the throne room the fast way by going up a water shoot that is powered by geysers that are pushing out air it’s like an underwater elevator. When I arrive Dad is just finished talking to a Cyclops probably one that works in his forges. When dad sees me he smiles then dismissed the Cyclops.
“Percy what brings you here?” Dad asks.
“Before I go talk to Zeus and talk some sense into him can you tell me why he would fire Chiron?” I ask him.
“That a long story, the only thing that you need to know is the Chiron is also a son of Kronos and Zeus might suspect him of being in league with him. You can’t change Zeus’s mind Percy not unless you have some proof.” Dad tells me.
“I can at least try.” I tell him. He smiles at me and as always I know that it is the smile of proudness.
“Hey Percy what are you doing here?” Triton asks coming into the room.
“I came to talk with dad.” I tell him. He nods his head and we bro-fist.
“We should hang out some time again.” Triton says.
“That sound awesome, right now though I am busy so how about some other time.” I say and with that make my way back out.
“Sure thing.” Triton yells after me. I decide that it is too late to visit Olympus so I just go back to camp. When I arrive at the Camp I hear cheering from the race track and go over to see what is going on. When I get there, I see two chariots on the race track testing out there items. It is the Ares and Hephaestus cabin. Clarisse is racing for the Ares cabin, it will be tough to beat her but someone can do it. For the Hephaestus cabin Beckendorf is driving, he is a muscular guy and really cool, but like all campers when it comes to a competition it’s every camper for themselves. I don’t see Annabeth or Eric around so I go looking for them, it only take a little while since I see a chariot standing beside the Athena cabin and two people working on it. I go over to them and see that they are pretty busy so I decide to look for Grover again. This time I have no luck as well and it is beginning to worry me. I even asked a few forest Nymphs if they saw something but all I got was a no.

I head off to my cabin to think about a few things. I hear the conch horn signaling supper but I’m not hungry and skip it. I go inside and lie down on the couch thinking about things. During that time I must have fallen asleep. I have a strange dream; Grover is dressed in a wedding gown and talking to an overgrown cyclops. The place around him looks like a grave that is full of junk, outside I can hear the ocean and sheep's. Then the cyclops speaks.
“When is the feast going to be ready honey?” He asks Grover.
“Soon Polyphemus my dear.” He replies in a really high pitched voice.
“Good then we can get married.” He says then the cyclops turns around and has a fleece in his hand but it wasn’t just any fleece it was the Golden Fleece. Sadly without a location and a quest it is impossible to get it and with that I wake up. I look at the clock and see that it is 3 in the morning. Knowing that I won’t be able to sleep I go out for a walk. I need to tell someone about the dream, since Chiron isn’t here anymore and you can’t talk to Tantalus so the only other option is Annabeth. I walk to the Athena cabin and knock on Annabeth's window. It takes a few tries till she opens the window about to yell something but stops when she sees me.
“What are you doing here at this time of night?” She asks me.
“Grover is with Polyphemus and he has the Golden Fleece.” I say.
“We can’t do anything about that right now Percy.” She says
“We have to do something.” I tell her.
“Wait until the chariot race, maybe we can make a deal with Tantalus.” Annabeth says and with that sticks her head back inside her room and closes the window. With that I walk back to my cabin and try to get some sleep. I sleep past breakfast so I open the fridge that is in the cabin and see that it is stocked with plenty of food. I take out an apple and bite into it. With wanting nothing else I close the fridge and walk out of the cabin. I noticed that the hunters are here so I go over to my favorite one.
“Hey Zoe.” I say, she turns around with her bow raised but once she sees me she lowers the bow and gives me a hug.
“What are you doing here, as far as I know there are no meetings on Olympus.” I say.
“We heard that you are doing a chariot race and we want to participate.” She says.
“Sweet, just watch out for the new camp director Tantalus.” I tell her.
“Why would they let him run the camp?” She asks.
“It’s not just him but also Dionysus.” I say and when I mentioned that name the girls all give out a grown.
“So where is Artemis?” I ask Zoe
“At the archery range where we are just going.” She tells me and with that I join them until the Chariot race will commence totally forgetting about me going to knock some sense into Zeus. Artemis is also happy to see me again even though we see each other at meetings. She respects my decision on not participate in archery practice ever since it was discovered that I partially sucked at archery without using a little help from water. So I just stand beside Artemis watching and talking about meetings, a few new hunters in the hunt that have joined, the monsters that she has been hunting and other things. Soon I move on to talk to the older hunters, catching up and talking about stuff till the horn blows signaling all campers to come to the chariot arena. We walk towards the arena and I go to the stands to watch. Every cabin has their own tricked out chariot all different styles and weapons, the scariest was of course the Ares cabin with a lot of weapons, blood and other things on it. Tantalus makes this big boring speech but when he is about to start the race Annabeth speaks.
“How about the winner of this race gets to retrieve the Golden Fleece and save Thalia's tree.” She says.
“Why would I want to acknowledge a quest that is very dangerous and leads to a cyclops layer?” He asks her.
“It would be the only way to save the tree, and if you don’t then Thalia will die and Zeus will take revenge on the person whoever is responsible for it. “I say standing up.
“Why would I listen to a mere son of Poseidon?” He asks and at that a few people laugh, it was mostly the hunters.
“I am not just a mere son of Poseidon but also prince of Olympus and Zeus second son.” I say and at that Tantalus face turns white and Dionysus smiles.
“Fine but the only people that will go are the teams of the Chariot.” Tantalus says and with that the race just got a lot more interesting.
“The first team that finishes 7 laps is the winner and gets to go on a quest to get the Golden Fleece and the losers are on kitchen duty for a week.” Dionysus announces, with that he blows a horn and everyone takes off. In the lead are Ares with Clarisse and Mark who doesn’t look happy to be in the race, then come Athena and Poseidon with Annabeth and Eric, then the Hephaestus cabin with Beckendorf and Jake the rest are far behind but the funniest is when the Hermes and Apollo crashed in the first 20 feet.

The race goes around and around everyone trying to pass each other with the Ares chariot pulling up front of the others. Until the final lap most campers use various things to throw each other out of the game. Until there are only a few chariots left. But of course Clarisse had to use some trick and win, with Hephaestus coming in second, Athena third, the Artemis fourth and the last chariot ironically is the Dionysus cabin so they are stuck with kitchen duty. Everyone giggled at the irony but the most disappointment is clearly written on Annabeth's face. Since Clarisse came in first she will get the quest to retrieve the Golden Fleece.
“Congratulation Ares cabin, Clarisse you can now go to the Oracle to get the quest. The rest of you can go to your remaining activities. I won’t let Clarisse hear the prophecy on her own so I sneak after her to the big house and to the attic. I wait on the bottom of the stairs and use my hearing to listen in.
“Approach seeker and ask?” The oracle asks
“How do I retrieve the Golden Fleece and save Thalia’s tree?” Clarisse asks the Oracle. There is the green light and the Oracle spoke.
“You shall sail the iron ship with warriors of bone,
You shall find what you seek and make it your own,
But despair for your life entombed within stone,
And fail without friends, to fly home alone!”
It is a confusing prophecy but before Clarisse can find me I bolt back outside and land right in front of Annabeth. She has that knowing look on her face but I can’t tell her the prophecy and the only thing that I tell her is that we are going to go and do it on our own to save Grover and Thalia and with that we go packing for the next morning.

Chapter Text

Annabeth's P.O.V

Even though we will be breaking the camps rules Percy and I will still go on this quest. Not only to save Grover a friend who helped me out a long time ago but also to make Percy’s sister come back to live and to make Percy be his normal self again. Losing your only siblings is hard and knowing that you can save them but have no idea how must be unbearable for him. I had decided a long time ago to help out Percy in completing the task of freeing Thalia.

So here we are at 7 am hiding behind a bush waiting for Clarisse and Mark to embark on the journey. We are the only ones that know where Grover is held but we guess that Clarisse will also soon find out where she needs to go. The only person that is seeing them of is Dionysus and Percy told me that he doesn’t care what we do. I know that Percy had spied on Clarisse when she went to visit the Oracle and that he heard the prophecy but he won’t tell me about that and I won’t bug him about it either. Percy taps me on the shoulder snapping me out of my thoughts and I notice that they are leaving. We follow them but since they are in the camp van it is hard. The only thing I know is that they are heading for the city.

Percy's P.O.V

I know that they are heading towards the harbour since the first line of the quest mentions something about a metal ship. Annabeth is still clueless and just follows my lead. The quickest way to get to the harbour is to cut through fields and forests and that is what we do. When we arrive at the harbour the quest member don't seem to find a boat so Clarisse bends her neck back and that meant she is praying to her father. A few moments later out of nowhere appears this World War 2 ship that is called the CSS Birmingham. Clarisse and Mark board the ship that sets out right away leaving a trail of smoke in its wake. It is out of sight and we are wondering how we can catch up. I have an idea and walk off towards the beach that isn’t far away from here. Annabeth follows me being confused as to why I am walking towards the beach. I stick my hand in the water and ask dad for a ride. Seconds later two Hippocampi appear they are overgrown seahorses that glitter in all kinds of different colours. Annabeth and I get on our Hippocampi and ride after the ship. When it is getting late when we come across this huge cruise ship called the Princess Andromeda. Since it is already late and we need some rest we climb aboard to find a cabin and sleep. The Hippocampi wave with their tails and soon vanish diving back into the sea and heading back to dads palace. Annabeth and I walk through the cruise ship until we find two empty rooms and go inside to get some sleep. I say goodnight to Annabeth then go into my room. As soon as I hit the pillow I fall asleep.

I dream of Grover again and how he is entertaining the Cyclops and delaying his death.
“We are coming for you Grover; just hold on a little longer.” I tell him. He smiles when I say that and am happy about it. Polyphemus is in the background complaining that he is hungry. I let out a laugh at his choice of outfit but then feel myself waking up. I sense someone outside my room and wake up realizing that it isn’t Annabeth. The door flies open to reveal monsters. I’m not fast enough to pull out my swords before they grab me and drag me out of the room and towards the front of the ship. Annabeth is there too, she looks off into the distance which means that she is calculating as to whom this ship belongs too. The door to the captain’s quarters is thrown open and we are thrown inside. They don’t enter and close the door but I know that they are standing right in front so any means of escape that way are useless.
“Well now if it isn’t Annabeth and Percy.” Says a voice that we know all too well.
“Luke, what are you doing here?” I ask.
“I run this ship and helping Kronos overthrow Olympus by being his host.” He says.
“How could you Luke, leaving your family and friends like that you promised that we would be together always.” Annabeth yells at him, tears falling down her face.
“I wanted you to join me Annie; I hated how little attention we got from our parents and how they ignored us for all these years.” He says. Then you should have told them that.” Annabeth says.
“The gods don’t listen to reason and only do what's best for them.” He says.
“That’s was true a long time ago but now they have changed.” I say.
“An Olympus brat like you would have no idea how it is growing up and not knowing why your dad hates you. You were loved.” He says.
“I’m not an Olympus brat.” I say remembering the voice in my head telling me that I am not a child born from an Olympian.
“Too me you are.” He says and with that I sense that the conversation has come to a close as Luke calls for his lackeys to take us to the brick.
“Why would you work for Kronos, Luke what do you get out of this?” Annabeth asks before the monsters pull her away.
“He promised a better land and a better world then the once the Olympians are running.” He says and with that he turns around and we are pulled away. I grab for my dagger that is hidden in my belt when the monster isn’t looking and slice of the monsters hand, it let’s go and before it can make a sound I cut of his head. Annabeth's captor is in the front so I sneak up behind him slicing his head off. She doesn't even scream but looks sad. I don’t have time to comfort her now so I pull her along to the back of the ship where I know the life boats are hidden and make one seaworthy. Once it is in the water I step on and pull Annabeth on board. With the use of my powers I push the boat away and towards the island of Polyphemus which lays in the middle of the Sea of Monsters also known as the Bermuda Triangle. We are close to the coast of Florida when our stomachs make notice of how hungry we are, so I steer us towards a river that leads into a jungle. Docking at an abandoned Cabin we make our way towards the street. When we reach the road we see that not far away is a Doughnut Shop called Monster Doughnut. Out of hunger we don’t even think about the name and just enter the shop to get something to eat.

After we finish eating we are full, as we leave the shop Annabeth looks up her face going serious. I look up with my swords drawn expecting to find Luke there but instead on top of the shop is a huge Hydra. Then it clicks in Annabeth’s face and she gives herself a face palm mumbling something about being so stupid. It doesn’t matter right now since we have a huge Hydra standing over us. The only way to kill one was either to cut of its heads and burn the stumps before a new one grew back and since fire isn’t close by we need to stab the heart. I choose option B and before I can think I am running towards the Hydra trying to get in close. It doesn’t work though and I am blasted backwards into the middle of the field that we have come from. The Hydra following, I see Annabeth from the corner of my eye trying to get to the heart. Annabeth must have known about my plan to kill it by stabbing its heart. I run towards the Hydra slashing and hacking all while avoiding to cut of the 7 heads while they attack me. Then we hear a loud explosion behind us and seconds later a big whole is in the body of the Hydra. Then a second explosion is heard with whatever is being fired the second thing meets its mark and the Hydra bursts into golden dust. We look to where the sound has come from and find Clarisse’s ship in the river its cannons still smocking. I have never been happier to see Clarisse before.
“How did you know that we were here?” Annabeth asks Clarisse.
“We got an Iris Message from Tantalus telling us that you ran away from camp. He isn't very happy about that and said that you are kicked out.” She says.
“Don’t care about that the only thing that matters, is that we know where the Golden Fleece is and get it to Thalia as fast as possible.” I say.
“How do you know that? The golden fleece hasn’t been seen in over a 100 years?” Clarisse ask.
“I will only tell you when you swear that you will take us along. Because it’s not just about the Golden Fleece, but is also about saving Grover from someone.” I say.
“Fine. I swear on the River Styx to let Annabeth and Percy accompany me on this quest.” Clarisse says and thunder rumbles in the back sealing the oath. We board Clarisse’s boat that as she tells us she got form her dad and we sail towards the sea of monsters and towards Polyphemus Island. The way into the Sea of monsters or otherwise known as the Bermuda triangle is through a water way between Scylla and Charybdis which are two monsters. Scylla will want to devour anything that comes within reach while Charybdis will create whirlpools to sink a ship. On board everyone is discussing which path to take that won’t damage the ship badly. What they don’t realize though is that we are driving right towards Charybdis and there are already whirlpools starting. I run to the wheel and spin it the other way. It is too late though and we are caught in the whirlpool. Clarisse screams at the men on the ship to push the engine to its limit so we can go full steam ahead. I can feel the engine giving in and soon enough one machine operator comes out and says that the engine is about to blow. We know that it is pointless to try and get the engine under control and to get it fixed so the only option is to push the ship to its maximum and that’s exactly what happened. I push the leaver forward and the ship shots forward vibrating furiously under my feet. You can hear the groaning that is coming from the engine and Clarisse yelling at everyone to get in a life raft and get out. I make sure the wheel won’t move then run to the life raft that Annabeth is on. But no sooner do I reach the railing and am about to enter the life raft when the ship explodes and I go flying. I feel the water surround me as I enter the cold water and in that moment I black out.

When I wake up I’m not in the ocean or a life raft but rather in a white room. I am curious as to where I am. I sit up and got a major head rush, after holding my head for a few minutes the dizziness goes away and I look around the room. Everything is white and as far as I can tell there is no door. In that moment though a panel slides open to reveal a man with black hair, black eyes, tan skin and a black suit. When I look at him he looks just like Thalia and I when I meets his eyes I see proudness shining bright.
“Who are you and where am I?” I ask him.
“I am Chaos the creator of everything and you are on my planet.” He says. I want to bow in front of the power fullest person in the entire world but something told me not to, so I followed that feeling.
“Why am I here.” I ask.
“There is something that you and your sister don’t know. But you were the one to figure it out. The two of you are different from everyone, you are more powerful and have a harder road in front of you that is filled with danger and won’t be easy.” He says and I know what he meant.
“You mean the thing where Zeus and Poseidon aren’t our real parents but someone else is?” I ask. He nods his head.
“Thalia and I always knew that we were powerful and different but we just ignored it and blamed it on being children of the big three. It felt natural to do all the things that we did, it didn’t feel wrong.” I say. Chaos is in thought for a minute before he answers.
“What would you do if you met your actual parents?” He asks.
“I would ask why they gave us up and would be happy to finally meet them.” I answer. He nods his head.
“Both of you were born on the 18th of August 1996, the proudest moment of my life. I was happy to have children that will take over once I fade one with a strong heart and loyalty above all else able to sense the good and bad in people and ready to fight for his family, the other a kind hearted strong minded person who goes to any lengths to protect the ones she loves even if it means bringing hurt to the ones she wants to protect and a princess. Both of you are my pride and joy but there are people on my planet that want to hurt you and use you against me, so your mother and I had to hide you from them and the only place the we could think of was with the Olympians.” He tells me and in that moment I realize that we are the kids that he is talking about and now I understand why he had to give us away. The only thing I can do and feels right is to go and hug him. There are so many things to talk about but the only thing he does is hold his hand over my shoulder. There is this burning sensation and when he lifts his hand I look and see that it is a tattoo with four long spikes sticking out in a cross formation the top and bottom tips a different symbol then the sides, four medium sized spikes each with different mark on them that go in a diagonal cross overlapping then eight smaller spikes in between them. From the center out there are 4 circles connection to each spike.
“What is this?” I ask.
“It gives you back some of your powers and a few more surprises that you are going to find out and as soon as your sister is back to being alive I will give her the same thing. So go and save your sister and make your father proud.” Chaos says and with that I feel myself slipping back to reality.

When I wake up I am on a boat and Annabeth is there steering. When she sees me awake she comes over and seems to happy that I am alive.
“How long was I out?” I ask her.
“You were out for a day. You sank to the bottom of the sea and one of the Hippocampi pulled you to the surface where I pulled you out. We got separated from the rest of the group.” She tells me. I only nod and look around out on the ocean. As far as I can see we were in the middle of nowhere.
“Do you know where we are at the moment?” I ask.
“Hopefully heading towards Polyphemus island.” she says. After a long while of sailing we see an island on the horizon so Annabeth steers the life raft towards the island. When we come into view I can instantly tell that it isn’t Polyphemus island but a spa and that can only mean the it is the Island of Circe's it’s a prison for men. Before I can tell Annabeth to turn around she has docked the life raft beside a huge pirate ship which can only be Blackbeard’s. As soon as we pull onto the beach two girls come running towards us being all welcoming.
“Welcome to C.C’s Spa and Resort. I am Hylla and this is my sister Reyna. We are here to show you around.” She says and extends her hand towards the building. I make no move to move forward and hold Annabeth back, but Hylla sees our hesitation and motions to her sister. She walks behind us and with that we get pushed towards the building and various things that have to do with spa stuff. I want to leave but Annabeth is intrigued and wants to relax a bit before moving on. Hylla leads us to the person who runs this whole thing and the moment I see her I scowl. Circe is almost as bad as the Amazon and Artemis with her hunters. When Circe sees us she smiles and welcomes us though I can tell she is especially interested in getting Annabeth away from me and to turn me into some kind of animal which won’t be happening.
“Why don’t you take a little brake from your journey and enjoy yourselves.” Circe says.
“That would be a great idea.” Annabeth says.
“I will have Reyna escort you to our best places.” Circe says. With that Reyna moves towards Annabeth and leads her away.
“Hello Circe so nice to see you again.” I finally say.
“How do you know our boss and survived?” Hylla asks.
“It’s because he is the prince of Olympus, son to Poseidon and a pain in the butt.” Circe says. At that Hylla looks at me in disbelieve.
“So will you turn me into a guinea pig now or do I have to fight you?” I ask. She doesn’t answer but shots magic at me. I dodge the blow and pull out Fluctus. Hylla pulls out a dagger and came at me. I block the strikes and push her away. Circe is about to leave but I take the dagger from my boot and throw it in her way.
“Not so fast, you still have to answer to your crimes.” I say. I grab Circe by the arm and pull her outside. Everyone looks at us weirdly but I don’t care about that, I look up at the sky and close my eyes asking Zeus to come pick someone up. A few seconds later I feel a presence arrive and I open my eyes to see Zeus standing there with a surprised look on his face. I just push Circe towards Zeus who also grabs her by the arm and flashes away. Just then Annabeth comes out with a crew of angry pirates following her. She sees me and motions for me to run towards the dock, since the pirates are still looting the island they don’t see us taking their ship and sailing away. I know that I can get the ship ready thanks to the powers that Poseidon has and command the cables to make the sails ready the pull the ship out of the harbor and set sail at full speed. I can also sense that we are close to Polyphemus Island but also the island of the Sirens. I turn the ship SE and sail far out to sea determined to stay as far away from the island of the Sirens as possible. Even though Annabeth begs and begs to hear the Sirens I remain stubborn and sail past the island then set course NE towards the island of Polyphemus. We reach it at sunset; it is a small and tall island full of mountains and rocks with lots of greens. We see that there is a life raft docked on the beach and can only guess that Clarisse and Mark made it to the island.
“Where will you dock?” Annabeth asks.
“Somewhere that he doesn’t suspect someone coming to take the fleece away from him. Behind a cliff on the other side of the island.” I say pointing left. Annabeth nods her head and I steer the ship to the spot. Now the only thing that we have to do is climb a small section of the cliff and we are right on top of Polyphemus cave. When we reach the top it is night outside and hard to see where we are going. We have to wait till morning to see what will happen.

Morning comes and we hear a stone being rolled aside and out steps an ugly looking Cyclops. The moment he is distracted with his sheep Annabeth and I sneak into his cave. When we enter all we see is scrap lying around everywhere and to the side are 3 tied up people. When Clarisse sees us her eyes go wide. I put my finger on my lips to motion for her to stay quiet. She nods her head and we quickly go over to them. Since Polyphemus is still busy with his flock of sheep we untie the 2 demigods and Satyr.
“Where is the golden fleece?” I ask Grover.
“He keeps it over there.” He says pointing to a hill full of scrap metal and on top of that pile lies the fleece.
“How are we going to get up there?” I ask no one in particular.
“If you can make a distraction so Polyphemus is kept busy one of us might have enough time to climb up that hill and get the fleece.” Annabeth says.
“Percy and I will distract the Cyclops, Annabeth you get the fleece.” Clarisse says and we all go to do our plan. Distracting Polyphemus is easy since he is feeding his sheep. We give Annabeth the all clear sign and she begins to climb the hill of scrap metal trying to be quite. Time is running out and finally Annabeth makes it to the top without having disturbed any of the metal junk. She makes it just in time since Polyphemus comes back towards the cave and sees us. Clarisse and I nod at each other and run towards the Cyclops telling Annabeth to hurry. Since he is half blind it is easy to taunt him with things and make a few cuts on his legs. Finally Annabeth, Grover and Mark run out of the cave and head up the path to the pirate ship docked behind the cliff. Clarisse sees that too so both of us with one last taunt distract the cyclops and run up to the cliff. Polyphemus is still trying to swat us away but hitting his sheep in the progress. He gets so frustrated that he starts throwing rocks in all directions and in the progress destroys the ship. We change our plan and run to the beach, when I reach the shore I try to use some new powers that Chaos has given me. I concentrate and focus on the power of creation and out of the sea emerge 6 Hippocampi. We then race back to the Miami shore and send Clarisse and Mark to the airport so that they can get the fleece back to camp and finish the quest that they started.

As soon as they are gone an unannounced visitor shows up.
“Well if it isn’t Percy, Annabeth and Grover.” A voice says that sounds familiar. We all turn around and see that it is Luke and some thugs behind him.
“What are you doing here?” I ask him while pulling out a drachma from my pocket and creating mist behind Luke. Then when he is talking to Annabeth I throw the drachma into the mist and made a connection appear to Camp and Olympus.
“To collect the fleece, and make sure that tree never gets healed.” Luke says.
“You’re too late, the fleece is already on its way to camp, with Clarisse.” I tell him and his face turns furious.
“Get a squad to the airport and stop them.” Luke commands his goonies.
“So why do you want the fleece?” I ask.
“Isn’t it obvious, I poisoned the boarder so that monster could come marching in and destroy the campers.” Luke says.
“So it wasn’t Chiron that did it but you.” I say.
“That old fool was just part of my plan to conquer the camp. You could say he was an obstacle and a nice person to take the blame.” he says.
“Yah and you just confessed to your crimes in front of the whole Olympian Council and Camp.” I tell him smirking.
“How?” He asks looking like a startled buffoon.
“Simple by creating an iris message right behind you.” I tell him and point. He turns around and comes face to face with the Olympian council and Camp Half Blood. Everyone is in shock but before they can say anything Luke swipes through the messages ending the connection. He is furious that he just admitted his crimes to all of Olympus. Furious Luke pulls out his sword and cuts my leg. Now normally red blood would flow out of an open wound but out came golden blood instead. Everyone’s eyes widen at the fact that I have gold blood.
“How is that possible?” Luke asks but before he can answer a heard of Centaurs comes running and charges Luke quickly escaping with his gang. It is the party ponies and in the lead is Chiron. I am sitting on the ground inspecting the cut that I have received which was pretty bad when Chiron comes over and helps bandage it up and also hides the golden blood flowing out.
“Not a word to anyone. Swear it.” I tell them.
“We swear on the Styx to not reveal Percy's secret to anyone unless told.” They say and thunder booms in the background. With Chiron's help I got on his back and Annabeth goes on someone else’s and we ride off. Soon enough we arrive in New York and I tell Chiron to go to the Empire state building so I can go to my room of Olympus and get something. I tell Annabeth that she can go on ahead and I will come later. I get off Chiron’s back and help manipulate the mist so that no one can see him as a centaur. I start walking towards the door and feel the bandage getting soaked with all the blood that I am loosing.

We enter the building, thankfully no one pays us attention and I am happy about that. I had gotten my own key card so we don’t have to go to the reception desk and ask for one. We enter an empty elevator and I insert the key card then press the golden button. The ride up is long and terrible and the music doesn’t help and it seems to make my leg hurt more. When we arrive I get back on to Chiron and tell him to drop me of at Poseidon's palace. He does and tells me he will wait for me. I limp to my room leaving a small trail of blood behind by the now soaked bandage but it will be cleaned up by the time I return. When I reach my room the first thing I do is take a shower, and I see the tattoo again and smile at how amazing it looks now that the color has sunken in. Thanks to the water healing me the wound on my leg has healed up really well. I change outfits and throw the ones that I had on in the trash. I take out black jeans, navy blue muscle shirt and a back hoodie that has a silver pentagram on the back out and put it on. With me all freshened up I go back out to meet Chiron and I was right the blood is already gone. Chiron still waiting outside for me smiled when he saw me all fixed with we both walk towards the throne room, where Zeus apologizes and reinstates Chiron as camp director sending Tantalus back to the fields of punishment though Dionysus will still stay at camp much to the disappointment and complaint of myself and soon to be the rest of the camp. We return to camp and see that the tree is healthy again and I hope that Thalia will also wake up soon, so that I can have my sister back again. Everyone is happy to see Chiron back and a huge party was started in celebration of that though with the news that Dionysus is staying the mood darkens a bit. Though that is all soon forgotten and the campers celebrate Clarisse as the hero of camp, Annabeth and Eric are happy to be back together, Grover is eating everything from the buffet table and I just watch happy that things were okay again. At 3 am everyone goes to bed dead tired from the party.

Chapter Text

I am dreaming nicely when I am woken up by loud banging and yelling coming from my door. Not even bothering to put on a shirt and just walking down in my shorts I walk downstairs to see who it is. I opened the door and find Katie who is banging on the other side.
“What do you want at this ungodly hour?” I ask her.
“Come to the pine tree, there is something you have to see.” She says and quickly runs towards the Thalia’s tree. Around there are already a few campers looking at something. I quickly grab my black sweater that hung beside the door put it on while running up the hill. I push my way through the crowd and see that Thalia is slowly starting to wake up. I push some campers away and kneel beside her. She opens her eyes and smiles at me.
“How long was I out for?” She asks.
“For about a solid 2 months.” I reply and when she hears that all the colour drains form her face. I help her up; at first she is a little wobbly on her legs but then regains her balance. Chiron comes and is happy to see that Thalia is good as new. We follow him to the Big house and there we catch her up on what happened. After the meeting Thalia and I decide to visit Olympus and make certain people very happy again. We walk to our cabin and towards my room where we switch the switch and enter the palace of Poseidon. Since I am still in boxer shorts I put on a pair of short black jeans and black sneakers. Before we go to the throne room we stop by Zeus palace so that Thalia can freshen herself up. The good thing is that no one is inside so we can go about unseen. We enter Thalia's room and while she went into the bathroom I sit on the couch watching some TV. After she is done Thalia changes into ripped black jeans, a white tank top that a skull on the front and flip flops. We also get some stuff out of the kitchen and walk towards the throne room with doughnuts in our hands. When we enter the only person that is inside is Hestia and she smiles when she see that Thalia is back again. She kindly summons the Olympians for us and one by one they appeared. We had planned it so that Thalia is hidden and will only come out when I announce something.
“What is it Percy, do you have any news for us?” Zeus asks.
“The boarder is back to full health again and the tree is alive once more.” I say.
“That is good to hear. Do you have anything else to report?” Poseidon asks.
“For a matter of fact yes I have. One lost person came back to us.” I say and in that moment Thalia comes in view from behind Hestia's place at the hearth. The first person to do anything is Zeus since he jumps out of his throne and tackles Thalia into a hug. Tears sliding down his face and I can tell that they are tears of joy. Next come Poseidon and Hades they also have tears of happiness in their eyes. Even though Hades isn’t our dad we still treat him as one and we also visit him in the underworld when he is lonely. Once everyone has hugged and had a small family reunion Thalia and I go walking through Olympus catching up on things. I keep thinking about what Chaos had told me and finally decide to tell Thalia about it. When we reach the Olympus Park we walk to the railing that overlooks New York.
“So Thalia there is something that I have found out.” I tell her.
“What is that?” She asks.
“Both you and I know that we are different and have always felt more powerful then everybody and also a little distant.” I tell her.
“Yah but what does that have to do with anything?” She asks.
“I found out that our actual father is Chaos, the creator of everything. He gave me a visit in a dream once and explained why he gave us up. He explained that we have more powers that are hidden away. He already unlocked some of mine and gave me this tattoo.” I tell her showing her my shoulder taking the mist of the place where the tattoo sits, so that it is exposed. Thalia looks shocked.
“He will come to visit you and tell you the same thing and go into further detail about the questions that you have.” I tell her and with that she only nods her head. We walk back to the street where everyone lives and go to Poseidon’s palace since we smell BBQ coming form that place and we are right. When we enter the backyard we find that all the Olympians are gathered and a big pile of meat lay beside the BBQ ready to be grilled. When they see us everyone smiles and the cook off commences. By the end everyone is stuffed and full that we all can’t move anymore. As the day comes to a close we say our goodnight’s and go to our rooms. I know that Thalia will get a visit from Chaos tonight and I have asked Zeus if she can sleep over at my place and he said yes. So we go to my room and just relax. Soon enough we are falling asleep on the couch and since we are to board and tiered to change, we fall asleep in our clothes.

Thalia's P.O.V

When Percy told me that our father is really Chaos I can’t believe my ears. Then when I fell asleep and he came to visit me in my dream I knew that it isn’t a joke but a reality. He tells me the things that Percy had said in the long explanation and in the end I also ended up with a tattoo. Mine is different form Percy’s it is a little more simpler and elegant then his, it has 3 small arrows pointing up, 2 middle arrows pointing sideways and 3 longer arrows pointing down all connected by 2 circles and small spikes in between the arrows. I smile at that when I woke up Percy is still asleep on the couch and when I look at the time it tells me that it’s 6 am. Even though Percy hates the morning and waking up so early I still wake him up. It takes 10 minutes but I finally got it. He glares at me and gives me the evil eye but it doesn’t matter.
“So Chaos visited me and gave me this tattoo.” I tell him showing him my right shoulder.
“Cool, since the mist won’t cover them forever what excuse are we going to make do that no one can figure this out?” Percy asks.
“How about we say that we got them done by Apollo so that he doesn’t rat us out we use one of the embarrassing moments as bribe.” I tell him.
“That is a good idea.” Percy says and with that we get ready and go back to camp. This time we don’t put mist on our tattoos but rather leave them out. Since it is time for breakfast we join the campers in the mess hall. When we enter I am surrounded by numerous campers asking me various questions. Percy is standing on the side smirking at me and not doing anything to get the crowd away from me. I push through and glare but he just continues his smirk. We sit down at Hera’s table and eat our food. In the middle of breakfast an iris message appears in the middle of the mess hall and it shows Grover looking excited.
“Chiron I have some news.” Grover tells him.
“What kind of news?” Chiron asks.
“I found two demigods. They are in a military boarding school in Maine.” Grover says.
“That can’t be a coincidence.” I say.
“That’s why I’m sending Eric, Annabeth, and Thalia on this quest.” Chiron says.
“Why not Percy?” I ask.
“I have some other things to take care off.” Percy says.
“You will head out immediately. We don’t know how many monsters they attract.” Chiron says and with that the mentioned quest members stand up and left. I look back to Percy who is deep in thought so I let him be. I get a few things packed and go to half-blood hill where we got into the car that Chiron has rented and we drive to Maine. It saddens me that Percy won’t join us but I have a suspicion that we will see him soon enough. The drive to Maine is long, boring and nothing interesting really happens, I just look out the window the whole time seeing the landscape pass by and the grey sky opening up and letting rain fall. We drive to a deserted part of Maine and close to the edge of the cliff lies a boarding school. A nymph who drove the car, parks it briefly in front of the door and lets us out, I thank her and she drives off. Above the door hangs the sign “Westover Hall” so we know that we are in the right place. When we enter we walk around for a bit not really knowing where we were going and hoping that Grover will find us.
“What are you doing out of the dance.” Says someone behind us. We turn around and come face to face with a man that is wearing a military outfit. I can tell that he is a monster but can’t pinpoint which one.
“Sorry sir, we are going to the bathroom and heard a noise coming from this hall.” I say.
“I will take care of that. You can head to the gym where everyone else is.” He says and with that we walk past him hoping that he won’t realize that we aren’t students that attend this school. He doesn’t say anything and at that moment Grover rounds a corner and is happy to see us.
“Where are the two demigods?” I ask Grover.
“They are in the gym, come I’ll show you.” He says and walks to the gym.
“So how did you find them?” Asks Eric.
“I was hunting some tree nymph’s when I picked up the scent of a demigod. At first I thought that it is only one but then I realize that there are two of them.” He says.
“Are they related?” Annabeth asks.
“Yah they are brother and sister.” He says.
“That can’t be a coincidence.” I say.
“I thought that too but there is something different about them. I have never felt a demigod’s aura like theirs before.” Grover says and with that we enter the gym where a party is in full swing. Grover points his finger towards the bleachers where two young people sit and are avoiding everyone. Now I get why Grover says there auras are different. They radiate an aura of stay away from me and leave me alone. We know that we had to approach them carefully and cautiously. In that moment the teacher that we ran into outside the hall comes into the gym.
“Who is that?” I ask Grover pointing to the other side of the gym.
“That is Dr. Thorn, the vice principle of the school.” He says and in that moment Dr. Thorn makes his way towards the two kids. We quickly walk towards the two kids but quickly lose sight of them in the overly crowded gym. Annabeth and Eric get separated from us. We see that Dr. Thorn has reached them first and is now leading them away. We follow them outside and towards the edge of a cliff. The two kids look scared and tried to get away but can’t. We sneak up on them but when I am about to strike Dr. Thorn transforms into the Manticore (a half scorpion, lion and human monster) he looks about ready to kill them but in that moment also senses us and swings around. I summon my bow and arrow and start firing arrows since I don’t want to get to close to the Manticore since his scorpion tail has poison on it. In that moment Annabeth and Eric also arrive and help out by getting the two young demigods to safety. While I fight the monster, a horn is sounds and 2 dozen silver arrows fly out of the tree some hitting the monster and some bouncing off or not even hitting. I know instantly who has arrived and I am happy about the reinforcements. There are also some black arrows in the mix. Out comes a girl with brown almost black hair a silver tiara in her hair, wearing a silver outfit and a bow drawn towards the monster. I smile realizing that it is Zoe and beside her come out not only Artemis but also Percy.

Percy's P.O.V

(8 hours earlier)
When the quest members leave I set out on the quest that I got from Zeus. I am to find Artemis and help her hunt a monster that has become a threat to every demigod out there. I pack a duffle bag with stuff that I will need, sling my bow over my shoulder and leave. Chiron has apparently got a message from Zeus because he doesn’t ask me where I am going. Tracking the hunt will be a hard task to do but it won’t be that hard accomplish. I go to Central Park first and ask a few nymphs and satyrs if they knew where the hunt was and they told me that they were in a national park in Maine. I thank them, then head out and make my way towards Maine. I soon find the national park in which the Hunters are staying, I walk into camp and am soon surrounded by silver wearing girls all having there bows aimed at various ouch parts. Since I am wearing a hood no one recognizes me.
“Are you really going to shoot me?” I ask them.
“If you don’t reveal who you are then yes.” A voice says from behind me. I smile as I recognize the voice. I turn around and throw my hood of in the process.
“So good to see you again Zoe.” I say smiling. When the hunters see that it’s only me they instantly lower their weapons and give me a massive hug. After I have successfully pushed them off and kept them from killing me I look around for Artemis.
“So why are you here Percy?” Zoe asks.
“I was sent here by Zeus to help you out with a hunt and bring news to Artemis about a terrible monster that it roaming about.” I tell her.
“So you need to see Artemis then?” Phoebe asks. I nod my head and follow Phoebe and Zoe towards a tent. They motion for me to wait outside while they announce my arrival. While I am waiting I get a few strange and terrifying looks from hunters that must have just joined. A few minutes later Zoe stuck her head out and tells me that I can come in. When I enter the room is decorated with furs from different animals and in the middle is a miniature throne mostly made out of pelts sits Artemis.
“Hey cousin, long time no see.” I say and smile. She just shakes her head.
“You have been hanging around Apollo too much.” She says.
“Hey that’s not true.” I say.
“So Percy what do you want to tell me?” She asks. I sit down on one of the pelts and look straight at her.
“It’s about the Manticore and the General.” I say. At that her expression instantly changes and even Zoe tightens up at the word General.
“How can this be?” She asks.
“I don’t know how or why but only that Zeus sent me so that we can find this out.” I tell her.
“How is Thalia then, we heard from Lady Artemis that she is alive again.” Phoebe asks.
“I wanted her to rest for a little longer, but we all know how she is. She is also right now on a mission to retrieve two demigods from a military academy, but don’t worry you will see her soon enough.” I say and both of the girls smile at that.
“Well then let’s talk about what we are going to do.” Artemis says and with that we go into a meeting.

~2 hours later~
When the meeting is finally over, we have made up a plan to seek out the Manticore and make him lead us to the General. We pack up the camp and go our way in tracking the monster. Artemis keeps in the lead tracking the beast while we stay behind and keep a look out for monsters. Even though my swords are at my sides I still have my bow out that I got in a dream from Chaos last night where he promised it will always hit the target that I aim at, and I don’t even need arrows I just draw back the string and an arrow appears. Zoe keeps looking at it and every time something will move in the bushes and I ready my bow she will look amazed that I don’t need any arrows. It is a funny sight and sometimes I laugh a little and even Phoebe begins to laugh after a while. Zoe just glares at us making us laugh even more and earning a shush from Artemis. Soon enough though we hear a commotion coming from the edge of the cliff and we race towards the sound only to find a group of demigods that look really familiar and the Manticore in front of them. Every hunter raises their bows and so do I. Artemis makes the motion of firing and we all let our arrows fly. Some arrows hit and some don’t. Then Zoe steps out of the trees and I follow. I give a quick smile to Thalia who returns it and aim my bow at the Manticore only waiting for it to do something. Zoe does the same as I do and in that moment Artemis also comes out of the trees.
“Permission to kill, Mi Lady?” Zoe asks but before Artemis can reply Annabeth does something stupid even for a daughter of Athena, since the Manticore’s attention is on us she sneaks up behind him with her dagger, jumps on his back and tries to kill him but only manages to shove her dagger into his shoulder. The Manticore roars and in that moment Artemis gives the order to shoot. Eric yells no but it is too late, Zoe and I let the arrows fly. We hit the Manticore in the belly but making him also fall of the cliff with Annabeth on his back. Before any of us can make a move she falls with the Manticore. Eric rushes forward and wants to jump into the sea below but it is too late and thankfully Artemis stops him from doing that. Just as he moves away from the cliffs edge, a helicopter comes over with guns blazing and Artemis yells for cover. We all instantly jump out of the way. The Manticore bellows a thanks for the lovely little demigod that was so willing to come with them. I aim my bow at him but let the arrow fly to late and the helicopter is already out of range. There is nothing we can do about for now so I turn my attention towards the two new demigods who are hiding behind a tree still frightened by the events that just happened. I can feel the aura of death around them and instantly know that they are Uncle Hades kids.
“There is nothing to be afraid of, the monster is gone now.” I tell them and with that they come out of hiding. I get a closer look at the two, they both have black hair and black eyes, pale skin and you could clearly tell that the girl was the older one.
“I’m Percy, what are your names?” I ask them.
“I am Bianca Di’Angelo and this is my brother Nico Di’Angelo, and what just happened here?” Bianca asks.
“The Greek Gods are real and you two are children of the gods also known as demigods and that was a monster that wanted to harm you.” I tell them.
“That is so cool, so my Mythomagic game is real.” Nico says.
“Mytho what?” I ask confused.
“It’s a game that my brother is into, you have to excuse him.” Bianca says and in that moment Artemis came over and I stood up.
“Would you like to join me in my tent?” Artemis asks Bianca and she nods her head but then looks at her brother who has his attention turned into some cards. Seeing him busy she decides that he will be fine and with what he is doing and we walk towards the camp that the Hunters have set up but before I can also enter the tent my cell rings. Now it is dangerous for demigods to have a phone but Hephaestus made a special phone card that blocks out the demigod ‘I'm here come and eat me signal’ when I answer the phone it is Zeus on the other line. He already knows that we have hunted down the Manticore and wants to know what we will do next. I tell him that I will go back to camp with the new demigods and get things sorted out so that we can get Annabeth back. With that I hang up the phone, but am stopped again by an angry looking Eric.
“What’s up?” I ask him.
“Those pesky hunters are responsible for Annabeth probably being in the hands of the enemy right now.” He says sounding very angry.
“They had nothing to do with the fact that she decided to play stupid and jump on the Manticore’s back just as we got permission to kill and that he falls of the cliff in the aftermath of it.” I growl out and his face turns white.
“Well they should still do something to bring her back.” He says and before I can say anything else he stomps over to where Nico is sitting on a log still engrossed in his game. I shake my head turning my attention back on the three girls that are walking out of Artemis tent. I can already tell that Bianca has become a hunter and that she is happy about that. As the sun is beginning to rise Artemis looks out on the horizon as if waiting for someone and I know who, though as usual he will be late. When the sun is already up he comes and we all shielded our eyes. When the bright light goes away a smiling Apollo is standing in a now dry grass area.

Chapter Text

Apollo stands there smiling at us then looking at his sister.
“What do you need?” Apollo asks.
“My Hunters and a few campers need a ride back to camp half blood.” Artemis says.
“If that’s all you want me to do then no prob sis.” Apollo response.
“And don’t even think about flirting with my hunters.” Artemis says.
“Don’t worry about it, Artemis. I will make sure he won’t do anything inappropriate or stupid that might get him killed.” I tell her.
“Come on Percy you are no fun.” Apollo says. I only gave him a smug smile before indicating to him that it is still no school bus but his red Lamborghini. With that Apollo presses his car keys and the car changes into an old school bus. With that the hunters all board the bus and give Apollo a mad look. Nico enters first, then a down looking Eric, Thalia and I take the rear. The hunters take the back of the bus while I sit in the front and the rest in the middle. Since Apollo is debating who will drive, I close my eyes to get some rest that I badly need.

I am back at Chaos palace looking around. I find that I am in a training room and Chaos is standing by the window overlooking his planet. He turns around and smiles at me.
“You are here to learn about your powers and to learn more about sword fighting with different techniques than just the Greek and Roman style.” Chaos tells me and without warning he takes out a sword that looks wicked and begins to attack me. I pull my new sword Aurorae and Riptide from their holders and block that attack just in time. Chaos attacks are hard and consistent and I have to push hard to go on offence. I can instantly tell that he is using sword techniques that I have never seen before and start to copy them incorporating them into my fighting style. After who knows how long of blocking, hacking, dodging, weaving, and slashing we finally get evenly matched and that is when Chaos starts using his powers incorporating them with his sword strikes. I already know that I can control all the Elements, stop time but only for a short amount of time and the rest I haven’t figured out yet. During the fight Chaos has summoned a beam of black energy and fires it at me. I pull out some water but I know it isn’t going to stop the black beam so I try to freeze the water and turn it into ice. The black beam freezes instantly and shatters. After that we practice a bit more and I find out that I can control mist and shadow travel, melt into shadows so I can hide myself, summon flames and light my swords up with shadow fire which are blue flames, and get more in touch with my water powers and even get some control of the sky like flying and lightning. The best though is that I can shape shift and change my appearance. At the end Chaos is very proud of me. At the end of the practice when I am lying on the floor feeling very dead, Chaos has one more surprise for me. He pulls out a box and gives it to me, I take it from him and open it and inside lie 2 black phones with a case that has swirling stars like the galaxy.
“This phone can transport you here whenever you want to come, has unlimited amount of space, demigod prove, any apps that you want are free and one more feature which is locked now but when the times come I will tell you.” Chaos says. I don’t say anything and just stare at the phones. Before I can thank Chaos I am jerked awake and find myself on the bus about to crash into a building. I look to who is driving and find out that it is Eric. I quickly push the phones into my back pocket run up to the front pull Eric from the wheel and get the bus under control. We just barely avoid the building and are now rushing towards camp half-blood where we will be coming in hot. I push on the brakes so hard that things came flying forward. With leaving a burned grass trail we finally land and everyone rushes out of the bus happy to be back on solid ground some even empty the contents of their stomachs on the grass. I glare at Apollo who gives me an innocent smile, then also steps outside. In that moment Apollo gets a mind link from his sister and he falls down crying out in pain. I rush towards him but as soon as it had begun it was over.
“Apollo what happened?” I ask.
“Artemis is in trouble and she needs help.” Apollo says.
“Then we have to go save her.” Zoe says coming up behind us.
“That might be a problem, my Oracle has a little trouble.” Apollo says and with that we all leave him to do our own stuff. I look around and see that Zoe is now talking to Thalia so I go over to them.
“Guess what dad gave us.” I tell her.
“What did he give us?” She asks. With that I give her the phone and her face lights up. Even Zoe was impressed at how awesome the phone looks.
“You guys are lucky to have such wonderful dad’s.” Zoe says.
“Thanks for the compliment Zoe.” I say and with that I leave the girls to talk about the new phone and instead go over to Chiron who is talking with the new demigods. I arrive the moment Chiron says to Nico that he can stay in the Hermes cabin until his parent claims him but I intervene.
“I know their parents.” I tell Chiron.
“Who is their parent?” Chiron asks.
“Their father is Uncle Hades, and they were born before the oath was created and have been stuck in the Lotus Casino.” I say.
“That explains the aura's but not the fact about being stuck in that Casino.” Chiron says.
“The game Nico is playing, Mythomagic was a game in the 80’s and has long been out of style.” I tell him and Chiron nods his head before he leads Nico to the Hades cabin while he is complaining that his game is really cool and not old. I smile at that. I go on a walk to think about stuff but I am ripped out of my thoughts by the dinner horn sounding. I make my way to the dining hall and get my food and sit down at the Hera table with Thalia who looks beat and I know all she wants to do is take a nap. Chiron makes the announcement that there will be the traditional capture the flag game against the hunters and there is groaning from the campers while the hunters make taunts and boast about the winning streak.

During the wait Thalia and I take a quick nap on our couch before we are woken up by Zoe who tells us that its time for everyone to gather in front of the forest. We quickly get dressed and head to where Chiron explains the rules about maiming but minimal if at all and no killing. I hear a few Ares campers groan but with a glare from Chiron they shut up. We grab our flag and the hunters grab theirs and we go to hide it. Thalia and I are on border patrol and when the horn sounds the attack commences. Eric is also on border duty and he doesn’t seem happy at all. He stands a few inches from the creek and the water is already moving uncontrollably. We know that as soon as someone steps in the creek they will get a wall of cold water in their face, so Thalia goes over to calm him down though it doesn’t work out so well. Thalia is sent back by a wall of water and when she recovers she shoots a lightning bolt at him. So Eric is also sent flying back, I try to stop them but with no result. Eric summons a Tidal wave to throw at Thalia but before it can hit her I stop it with a wave of my hand making the water disperse, I turn around to yell at Eric but at that moment the oracle steps into view green fog surrounding her. Everyone is staring at her and doesn’t believe their eyes.
“She never comes out of the attic.” Chiron says. The Oracle lifts her finger and points it at Zoe.
“Approach seeker and ask.” The Oracle says.
“How do I save Artemis and bring her back?” Zoe asks.
“The Oracle opens her mouth and green smoke curls out.
“Five shall go west to the goddess in chains,
One shall be lost in the land without rain,
The bane of Olympus shows the trail,
Campers and Hunters combined prevail,
The Titan's curse must one withstand,
And one shall perish by a parent's hand.”
“With that the Oracle goes still and Chiron assigns Eric and Grover to carry her back to the attic, Chiron suspends the game announcing that it is a tie and that the rest of us will meet in the war room for an emergency meeting to discuss the Prophecy and who will go. Once we reach the war room there is fighting going on which of course consists of the Hunters not wanting to be part of a quest claiming that it is their responsibility.
“How about Thalia and I go with you to rescue Artemis.” I finally say having had enough of the fighting.
“Why do you suggest that?” Chiron asks.
“Thalia and I were at one point in the hunt for a few months and we became great friends and they can tolerate me.” I say. Chiron looks at Zoe who nods her head in agreement.
“I would say that 2 hunters go and 1 camper since it is a huntress’s quest.” Thalia says.
“Then you need to choose who gets to go.” Chiron says. I look at Thalia and we both have a silent agreement.
“I will go.” Thalia says.
“Phoebe will be the second hunter.” Zoe says.
“Then it’s decided the quest members will be Zoe, Phoebe and Thalia." Chiron says and in that moment Grover and Eric walk back inside and by the expression on Eric’s face he isn’t happy with that.
“What about me, I want to save Annabeth and I have a feeling that she is there where you are going.” Eric says.
“I should go too; I can smell her out and point you in the right direction. Plus maybe I can find Pan on the way there.” Grover says. Zoe is thinking a bit before she answers.
“Fine Grover you can come but you Eric, aren’t allowed to come.” Zoe says and with that she leaves, but before she can get out the door, Conner Stroll steps in front of her holding out some kind of t-shirt.
“This is for Phoebe as a sort of peace offering, we saw her looking at it and thought that she would want it.” He says, Zoe only grabs the shirt and heads out the door and I instantly know that it isn’t going to end well. It has been decided that the quest members will head out tomorrow morning, so with nothing else to do I head for the arena to practice some sword fighting since something told me I will be needed sooner than expected. While practicing I notice Zoe storming into the arena with a mad expression. I stop what I am doing since she is marching right towards me and I only wonder what I did wrong now.
“What’s up Zoe anything on your mind?” I ask her.
“The Stroll brothers put something in Phoebe's t-shirt and now she can’t go and I am one quest member short.” Zoe says clearly frustrated.
“Why don’t you take Bianca with you, even though she is new she will love going on a quest and gaining the experience she is going to get from it.” I tell her.
“That is a great idea Percy, thanks for that.” Zoe says and walks away.
“Any time Zoe, that’s what I do best.” I say and go back to hacking at the dummy. Soon it is time to go to bed and I walk back to our cabin, straight up the stairs and without even changing I fall into bed and am instantly asleep. I am woken up in the morning by Thalia coming into my room and saying that she is off. Since I’m not a morning person I just grumble something and go back to bed. Thalia knows how I am in the mornings, so she just leaves without kicking me out of bed which I am thankful for.

A few hours later I am woken up again by loud banging on the front door. I hope that it will stop but even after 10 minutes it continues. I look at the clock and it reads 9 am. So I get my ass out of bed and walk down the stairs grumbling about not getting a moment of peace to sleep. I rip open the door and outside stands a frustrated and feared looking Eric. I glare at him, but he doesn’t seem to notice.
“I saw Annabeth in my dream and she is trapped under the sky. Then Artemis shows up and took her place and they are only keeping her alive until she is of no more use for them.” Eric says real fast.
“That’s why they sent a quest to save her.” I say.
“We have to do something too, we can’t just sit here and wait for them to come back. I can’t let her get rescued by the people that caused this.” He says.
“Eric there is no we, no you and I, there is only you.” I say getting annoyed.
“You’re my brother we need to stick together.” Eric says.
“No we’re not.” I say and with that close the door and let out a frustrated groan. Eric thankfully leaves to do who knows what and I go to freshen myself up since I won’t be able to sleep anymore. After I have showered and get dressed in a pair of black jeans and a white t-shirt I go to the dining hall since it is already lunch. Looking around I don’t see Eric anywhere and that is one thing you should never see. I go over to Chiron and ask him if he has seen Eric anywhere but he just shook his head but Mr. D pipes up at that moment.
“That fellow took off with a Pegasus to chase after the quest members. I did something about it but he escaped me.” He tells me.
“Let me guess, you want me to go and get him?” I ask Chiron who nods his head and I let out another groan. You can’t leave that guy alone without him getting himself into some major trouble. I quickly eat something then take off towards my cabin. In record time I have packed a few things and am dressed in black shirt, black jeans and boots before I leave, I switch Fluctus for my new sword Aurorae then I strap both my swords to my side and am off. Chiron tells me that the last known spot was that they are heading for the Smithsonian Museum. So I go to a secluded part in the forest and mist travel to the museum mall. I seem to arrive just in time since there is a big commotion coming from the Air and Space Museum and I figure that they are inside. I run there, pushing tourists out of my way who are running away from the danger. When I enter the museum I see that the gang is fighting the Nemean Lion. I know that nothing can pierce it’s skin and that it will be pointless to go and attack, so the only way is through its mouth.
“Zoe aim at its mouth and try to get it to open.” I yell at her. She isn’t even faced that I am here but instead puts her aim to the Lions mouth. I look around the Museum to see if I can find something that we can use when I see this disgusting astronaut food that Apollo had bought for Thalia and I when we were little and instantly got an idea. I run to the store and get some that I can throw into the lions mouth.
“Try to get the beast to open its moth.” I scream and in that moment Zoe shots an arrow and the Lion snaps the arrow out of the air and chomps down on it so that it can’t close its mouth and throw the paste into the air where Zoe fires another arrow that makes the paste explode in the mouth and the Nemean Lion explodes into gold dust. The only thing that is left is the pelt which I pick up and throw at Zoe when she comes down. To say she is surprised is an understatement.
“Why would you give it to Zoe and not keep it?” Eric asks. That earned him a glare from Zoe and an eye roll from me.
“I don’t need it and Zoe delivered the killing blow.” I tell him. At that moment some security guards enter the museum and seem to look for someone. They aren’t just any security guards but rather skeleton warriors.
“Guys we have to leave now.” I tell them, they look in the direction that I am pointing and they see the security guards. Before they see us we quickly hurry away, though when I look back they seem to follow us. We keep going and make it to the train station where we enter the train before it leaves. We take multiple trains to throw the skeleton warriors of our trail until we reach a line called Sun West and take that train only to end up at the very edge of town where there are only cargo trains. We step of and find a homeless person sitting by a fire. I instantly know that it is Apollo in one of his many disguises, so I walk over to him.
“Does Zeus know your here?” I ask him quietly. The only responds I got was a shaking head which I was perfectly fine with .
“May we share your fire for the night?” I ask him this time so that everyone can here.
“You are welcomed too.” He says and with that we sit at the fire thinking about what is going to happen next. When the sun touches the horizon one of the trains let out a whistle and we know that we have to get on that train to head west. Saying our farewell to the homeless man we open one of the cargo doors only to find multiple cars. So leaving us no other option we all chose a car and sit in it. I am together with Thalia. We talk about Chaos, about what he has taught us in our dreams, about that we want to meet him in person and other things until there is a flash in the back seat and I instantly knew who it is.
“What have you got for us Apollo?” I ask
“I want to give you some help. Find Nereus, the old sea man if you want answers as to where Artemis is. I got to go I’m already on thin ice with Zeus, for previous stunts that I have pulled recently.” Apollo says, with that he is gone as quickly as he came.
“He really misses his sister even if he doesn’t want to admit it.” Thalia says.
“I know what it feels like.” I say and Thalia gives me a smile then a very uncomfortable hug considering we are sitting in a car. With that I start the car with a trick that Hermes had taught me and turn on the radio to kill the silence. Somehow I fall asleep and am woken up by Thalia telling me that we have stopped which meant that we have to get out. We wake up the others and open the doors only to find ourselves in the middle of a small town in New Mexico.

Since we have nothing else to travel with we walk around town trying to find some sort of transportation. It is useless though, Zoe gets the idea to split up, one group to get some food and the other was tasked with finding another way out of here. So Grover, Thalia and I head into a Grocery store and get stuff like, water bottles, beef jerky, granola bars and several bags of gummy bears, a backpack, a map, some matches and 2 flash lights then we go to the cash register. I pull out my wallet and the Olympus Gold credit card which has no limit, we pay and Thalia asks him if he knows any transportation that we can use to get out of here. He only tells us that there is a bus station 5 miles up the road. We thank him put all the stuff in the backpack and walk out of the store. We enter a coffee shop and get some coffee to wake up our sore and stiff bodies. Walking along the road Grover all of the sudden drops his coffee and gets this dazed look in his eyes. I stop and wave my hand in front of his eyes it takes a while but he snaps out of it.
“Dude what happened?” I ask him.
“I felt the presence of Pan near bye.” He says, for a long time now a lot of Satyrs have had the feeling that Pan is still alive and set out to search for him. The only thing was that all of them never returned. It has been every Satyrs mission to find Pan and bring back some of the wild.
“How can that be, he hasn’t been seen in a long time.” I tell him.
“I can feel him though. It’s like a feeling in my belly.” He says. In that moment we hear someone scream and see that the skeleton warriors have returned. They won’t be easy to kill since only children if Hades can kill them but since I have a blessing from him and his metal in my sword I hope that is enough. I pull out my swords and get ready to attack. I stab one of them with Aurorae and the warrior instantly disintegrates. It works for both me and Bianca the rest can only block their attacks and not kill them. We kill a few of them before Grover starts to chant and a giant reet fills the air. The next second there is this giant boar and Grover telling us that we should get on. I covered the rear while everyone tries to climb on. With final success Grover gives the giant boar a kick and it runs off trampling multiple skeleton warriors. The boar keeps going for a long time until it finally comes to a stop.
“This is as far as it will go.” Grover says. So we got of the boar and it takes off back where we came from. We follow the road a bit until we get to a huge junkyard. Both Thalia and I instantly recognize the place. It is Hephaestus junkyard where he throws in broken or defected items.
“Once we enter that place don’t take anything.” I warn everyone giving then all a glare and they all quickly nod their heads and walk forwards. Once in the junkyard there are piles and piles of literal junk that no one will ever use in a million years. Once in a while someone will stop to admire things but walk on when either Thalia or I glare at them. When we see the exit in sight we sigh in relief but before we can reach the exit there is a big surge that awoke Talos the protector of the junkyard. Both Thalia and I know that he is defective and it won’t be a fair fight.
“Who took something.” I demanded and it is Bianca that raised her hand and pulls out a Mythomagic Hades figure.
“This was the only one missing from Nico’s collection.” She says. I groan and look up at the sky.
“Hephaestus get your ass down here now!” I yell us at the sky. A few seconds later there is a bright light and he stands right in front of me.
“You wrang little cousin.” He says.
“Stop that thing, will you its time for you to put this junkyard out of commission for good before anything bad really happens and the mortals stumble upon it.” I tell him and point to Talos. He protests slightly but sees my point. He lifts up his hammer and in one giant swing, Talos is nothing more than a can of minced meet. Hephaestus then closes his eyes and starts to chant and little by little the pieces all start to float up and disappear as if they never were invented or made in the first place. After he is done that the only thing left is the Hades Mythomagic statue in Bianca’s hand. I thank him and he flashes out. When he leaves we are left with standing in the middle of the dessert as if there never was a junkyard before. But I know that he simply transferred the stuff to another junkyard of his that is in the African dessert.
“That cost me a big favor Bianca, you better make it up to me later.” I say and all Bianca does is launch herself at me and thanks me for that. Knowing that the rest of the quest will get more difficult and Bianca has had the scare of a lifetime I pray to dad to send Bianca back to camp. One minute she is there the next a green light envelops her and she is gone back to camp. The rest all yelp but I assure them that I only asked dad to send her back to camp since she has had enough of this quest.
“I guess the line ‘one shall be lost in the land without rain’ has been fulfilled in a matter of speaking.” Thalia says and with that we walk on, though Thalia does see a truck that someone must have left us. We all get in with Zoe and Thalia sitting in the front while Grover, Eric and I sit in the truck bed. We have enough gas to make it to a river at the edge of the forest where we find a canoe shack. We have to go upstream to get back on the path so I convince some Naiads with the promise that I will talk to the river god to better their lives to help us out and they take us all the way to the Hoover Dam. Having just read about it in books that Athena gave us, it’s really cool to see it in person. We walk to the platform and towards the souvenir shop to get some tacos. On the way we make some jokes starting every word with dam. Once we enter we get us some tacos and sit down in the cafeteria. Halfway through our meal the skeleton warriors show up and we split up. I go to an elevator and quickly enter with a tour group. Only noticing that we are going to the basement when the doors open I know that I am pretty much screwed. When we are walking along with the tour guide there is this girl who keeps looking at my belt where my swords are hanging. I don’t have time to ask her about it though since the skeleton warriors arrive in the basement. I know I have to get back to that elevator and upstairs to the rest of the gang so I quickly run into the bathroom to hide. A knock on the door from someone made it clear that they are gone. When I open the door I find the girl from before standing there.
“How come you have two swords and who were you running from?” She asks me.
“You can see through the mist, who are you?” I ask her totally ignoring her question.
“I’m Rachael Dare and you are?” She asks.
“I’m Percy and the last name doesn’t matter.” I tell her. With that I bid her farewell and go up the elevator to the gang. I sneak to the cafeteria to where the gang is sitting. When they see me they give me this weird look.
“What are you doing?” Zoe asks.
“The skeleton warriors are here. How do they keep finding us?” I ask them.
“I don’t know, but they do need something from a person to track them.” Thalia says.
“We can find that out later. Right now we need to go.” I say and we leave. We run outside but are soon surrounded by more skeleton warriors. I see two metal status that are from Zeus.
“Thalia tell dad that we need a ride.” I tell her.
“Do you think he will listen?” She asks.
“He owes me a favor so mention that.” I say so Thalia does and the next second we are lifted in the air by two metal giants. We fly up higher and higher.
“We need to get to San Francisco fast.” I tell them.
“We’re on it Prince Perseus.” They say and fly fast.
Zoe and I have a competition about who can shoot more arrows at Target signs then the other and it is really fun ever since I got the bow from dad my archery has improved significantly. In a minimum of 3 hours we arrive in San Francisco after thanking the statues who fly away, we go straight to the pier where Nereus is.

Zoe has this crazy idea to dress me up as a hobo but I have a better one. I switch into my prince outfit and march down the pier. Every hobo that sees me gives me a weird look but when Nereus sees me he instantly stands up and bows low. Usually I don’t play the prince card but this time it is necessary.
“What can I do for you Prince Perseus?” He asks.
“Where is the location of Artemis and what is the beast that she is hunting?” I ask him.
“She is on Mount Orthys and the beast that she is hunting is the Ophiotaurus because when it is killed by a child of the big three it can help the enemy overthrow the Olympians.” He answers and with that Nereus disappears. I walk back to the gang while changing back my clothes. Zoe looks at me looking impressed.
“That was much easier then catching him.” I tell her at with that we turn to the Ophiotaurus that is swimming in the water.
“What are we going to do with this beast?” Zoe asks me.
“We kill it then hide its remains deep within the ocean so that Kronos can’t use it against one of the big three.” I say while taking out my bow, pulling on the string which forms an arrow. I then release it and the Ophiotaurus instantly dies using the ocean currents to take it off shore and bury it 3 feet under. With that done we know that we need some sort of transportation to make it to Mount Orthys before sunset.
“Annabeth’s dad should live around here somewhere.” Thalia says.
“You have that information, why?” I ask.
“We talked a little about her family and she told me that her dad lives in San Francisco.” She answers and with that we head out to find the house. It is a little hard to find so Zoe goes into a store and looks in the phone book under the name Chase. Thankfully there aren’t too many Chase’s and with the help of Thalia who can recall the first name we are soon standing in front of the house. We know that we have to make it fast so we knock on the door and after a few minutes a middle aged man is at the door.
“Are you Annabeth’s father?” I ask. He nods his head.
“We are friends of Annabeth and are wondering if we could borrow your car to go somewhere.” Thalia says
“Is Annabeth alright?” He asks.
“That why we need your car, she was taken and we are trying to get her back, but we need to borrow your car for that.” I say and with that said he gives us the car keys and we are off. Zoe decides to drive, though she drives at a speed that should have been illegal but she did it anyway. We arrive just in time before the sun dips too low on the horizon and the island disappears. We move further onto the island and soon you can’t see anything because of all the fog that is in the area. So we walk the rest of the way and are soon standing in front of Landon who is protecting the tree of immortality and the golden apples on it. As we are sneaking around him we are stopped by Zoe’s sisters who don’t look happy at all to see us.
“What are you doing here, you are no longer welcomed.” One of them says to Zoe.
“We are here on some business so either get out of the way or become a casualty of war.” I tell them pulling out one of my swords, they all look at each other than flash out.
“That’s what I thought.” I say and we run up the hill to where Atlas is holding up the sky but instead we find Artemis holding it.
“Mi Lady, what have they done to you?” Zoe asks in an outrage.
“No, don't come any closer, it's a trap.” Artemis says but it is too late as Atlas and Luke enter the room.
“Well, well, well if it isn’t my traitor of a daughter.” Atlas says the only response he got was me pulling out my swords, Eric pulling out his and Zoe and Thalia pulling out their bows. I charge at Atlas while Eric takes Luke and the girls are helping us out. I know that I can’t beat Atlas but it is the only thing that I think of to come up with a short notice plan. I am soon tiring and know the only way to defeat Atlas and get him back under the sky is to get Artemis to put him there so while Atlas is busy with Thalia and Zoe. I run to Artemis, go under the sky and tell her to give it to me. She looks at me like I am mad. Which I probably am and with a little discussion she finally gives me the sky and goes to help the girls. I watch well as best as I can, Atlas about to deliver a deadly blow to Artemis when Zoe jumps in front of Artemis taking the hit. I scream out for her and in that moment Artemis takes the distraction that Atlas has given her to make him slide back under the sky. I loosen my grip and let Atlas push me out. Without a second thought of pain or weakness I run over to Zoe who is struggling to stay alive. The only thing that I see is her smiling and in that moment something happens between the two of us a sort of understanding like she knew the truth.
“CHAOS!” I scream at the top of my lungs startling multiple people that are close bye because I made a sound so loud that it rang out through my connection with him and in the next second he stands there wondering why I have called him. He then sees the tears in my eyes and Zoe in my lap, slowly dying and understands why. I don’t want Zoe to die, she is like a sister to me, no she is more than that it is love that snapped into place a while ago just that I have been to stubborn to admit it. Chaos goes over to Zoe and kneels beside her.
“Zoe would you like to join my army and protect the universe from all that is evil?” He asks her and she nods her head too weak to speak. With that Chaos passes his hand over her and her wounds heal and she is as good as new. I help her stand up and she comes towards me embracing me in a hug.
“Thank you Percy for everything.” She says into my ear as she gives me a hug and a kiss on the cheek. She also says goodbye to Thalia and Artemis. With that done she steps towards Chaos who creates a portal to his realm and she walks through. In that moment I go over to hug Chaos and whisper a thank you. He kisses the top of my head and also steps into the portal and once that happens the portal closed behind him. Artemis steps beside me and gives me a once in a lifetime hug as a thank you for giving Zoe another life. In that moment Eric joins us with a bruised and battered Annabeth who is limping slightly. Artemis then summons her chariot and we got out of that retched place and ride back to Olympus. No one said a thing the whole way back and we are happy that we are all back together and that Zoe isn’t dead but in good hands.

Chapter Text

Percy’s P.O.V

When we arrive on Olympus everyone is happy that we saved Artemis and the only thing that is going through my mind is food and sleep but not particularly in that order. Holding up the sky had taken the energy out of me and the only thing that I now want to do is rest, though before I can do that Artemis comes up to me and I can tell she wants to know about Chaos.
“Another time Artemis, right now all I want to do is sleep for a week.” I tell her and that is the last thing I say before I stalk into Poseidon's palace, go to my room and crash onto the bed not even bothering to change. The next time I wake up, Thalia is lying in bed with me and I am in my PJ. Dad had probably put my PJ on when he came and checked on me. He does that most of the time since I used to have nightmares and he came into the room when I was screaming my head off. I still have the nightmares on occasion but not as often as I used to have them. I look at the clock and see that it is 1 pm. I shake awake Thalia, it takes a while but I finally got her awake.
“You’re up.” She tells me letting out a sigh.
“Why are you so relieved?” I ask.
“You were out for 2 days.” She tells me.
“Wow, I must have been drained.” I say, Thalia shrugs her shoulders and gets up. I do too and walk to the bathroom to take a shower, since I smell like sweat. It takes a while but I am finally freshened up and dressed, when I open the door, the sweet smell of lunch greets my nose. I follow the scent until I find where it is coming from.

As I enter the kitchen I find Zeus and Poseidon behind the stove making food and only then do I notice how hungry I really am. When dad sees me awake he comes around the counter with an apron on and gives me a big hug. I hug him back, then grab a plate and pack it full with food. Thalia just shakes her head when she sees my plate but does the same with hers. We sit down at the kitchen table and begin to eat. When we are finished dad tells us that we have to return to camp, which we aren’t too happy with but find it fair. So we pack our stuff and take the long way to camp by walking out of the Empire State building and taking a cab to the strawberry farm. The taxi driver gives us a weird look but doesn’t ask any questions. We pay him then walk to the hill, as soon as we step through the border we are greeted by the sight of campers running around. Taking a few steps, Thalia is tackled by Annabeth who is happy to see us again. Nico and Bianca are standing a few paces behind her. Nico has a smile on his face and I see he wants something from me.
“Thank you for saving my sister by sacrificing one of your favors.” He tells me.
“Well someone had to keep watch over her. Even though we don’t admit it most of the time but sisters, want their little brothers to step in and protect them once in a while.” Thalia says, kneeling down in front of Nico and putting her hands on his shoulder. I smile at what she has said and at the statement. When she stands up again I give her a back hug. She of course tries to get out of it but I don’t let her. Nico and Bianca laugh at that. They then tell us that Hades has offered them a place beside him to develop their powers and so Hades can be a father for a little while. The only warning I give them is to stay away from Persephone’s garden. Nico nods his head then a shadow envelops the two of them and they vanish.

Shortly after that moment Annabeth thanks us for rescuing her then she leads us to Chiron, who congratulates us on finishing the quest. After that we split up while Annabeth and Thalia stay and talk to Clarisse for some reason, I go to the arena to get some practice and sharpen my skills. When I enter the only thing I see is a huge hellhound in the arena. I pull out my two swords and attack but someone steps in front of me.
“Don’t kill her.” He says.
“Who are you?” I ask him.
“I am Quintus, the new swords master. Who are you?” He asks.
“I am Percy.” I tell him and he doesn’t ask for a last name which is fine by me.
“Why is there a hellhound in our arena?” I ask him
“That is Mrs. O’Leary and she is my pet.” He tells me. In that moment Chiron walks in and sees me having a conversation with Quintus.
“Percy, I see that you have met that new sword instructor.” He says.
“Yah and I can’t wait till his class.” I tell him.
“That is good to hear but at the moment I need you to come with me.” Chiron tells me.
“What is it?” I ask
“Grover got in trouble in the days where you were gone.” He tells me.
“What did he get himself into now?” I ask.
“That is something we can discuss later.” He says and walks out of the arena and I follow him, he leads me deep into the forest and we keep walking until we reach a clearing where a hearing is being held and Grover looks nervous.
“What is this about.” I ask Chiron.
“Grover wants to find Pan ever since your experience in Mexico and now they are holding a meeting to decide what to do.” He says and walks to stand beside Leneus. They discuss things but then ask Dionysus who sits in a chair made of vine. I still don’t get why they worship him like they owe him their lives. Which they certainly don’t but then again if you don’t do as Dionysus says he’ll turn you mad until you do. So the satyrs fear him because of that little ability of his. He doesn’t answer at first, but scans the crowd till his eyes land on me.
“Why don’t we ask Prince Perseus on what he thinks?” Dionysus says and the eyes of the council turn to me. I hear a few campers murmur and know that they didn’t know that I was a Prince especially the Prince of Olympus.
“I say that Grover should get his opportunity to find Pan and bring back the wild.” I say in a bored, uninterested voice. The council sticks their heads together and murmur to each other for a while until Leneus stands up.
“You Grover Underwood, have 1 week to prove that Pan is still alive and if you don’t then your searchers license shall be removed.” Leneus says. With that the meeting is over and everyone leaves. A girl runs over to Grover and hugs him. I walk over to them until I am right behind him.
“You can do it Grover.” I tell him and with that he wakes out of his stupor and hugs the girl. Thalia comes up behind me and gives me a smile.

Once Grover broke apart from the girl he is hugging I find out her name is Juniper and that she is Grover's girlfriend. Soon Grover runs off packing for his quest to find Pan and we walk back to the Cabin circle talking about unimportant matters. Since it is Cabin inspection Annabeth and I walk form cabin to cabin rating the cabins from 1 to 10, the lowest gets the fun job of cleaning up the dishes and the top gets to go first to the dining hall to get food. The cabin where Thalia and I live doesn't count since it is way too big so we are the exception plus we rarely go to the dining hall and instead make ourselves some food, which some campers find unfair but have to live with it. The Hermes cabin is the lowest on the scale so they have to clean up after everyone. Everyone in the cabin complains of course but there is nothing we can do about it. As dinner finishes everyone does their own things and Quintus makes an announcement that he has made a game and that people can sign up to compete for something special. So of course a lot of strong and confident campers all go over.

Thalia and I join the bunch with Eric and Annabeth. Once a good chunk of campers have gathered Quintus leads us to the arena where giant grates are gathered. Everyone is murmuring and wondering what is in the crates. Then Quintus starts to explain what we will be doing, so soon enough we find out that in the crates were a batch of 3 giant scorpions that we would be pairing up in groups of three's, then go out in the forest to kill them. Soon enough everyone is paired up in teams so since we were an uneven number Thalia and Annabeth had teamed up and Eric had chosen me. I wasn’t so thrilled about that but it was the only option. So with that done Quintus lets the scorpions lose and they scurry of fast with us running after them. With Thalia and Annabeth also running off Eric and I are the only ones left in the arena and I take off at a casual stroll not really interested in the game that Quintus is playing with us. After a few steps Eric catches up to me and seems confused as to why I’m not chasing after the scorpions. Even after ignoring him for 20 minutes he still follows me around.
“Why don’t you go ahead and I will catch up with you when you find one?” I ask him.
“This is a team exercise so we should work together on this.” He says.
“I’m not interested in the whole team thing. Go and find Annabeth and Thalia.” I tell him and with that Eric finally runs of a on his own.

After he is gone I can finally deal with the thing I was planning on doing in the first place. Walking back to the arena I find Quintus right where we left them.
“So the prince of Olympus has returned.” He says.
“Finding out that Daedalus is still alive is a great opportunity.” I tell him.
“Should have figured that you would find out.” He says.
“No worries I won’t tell anyone, but you should hide that tattoo you have, most people have heard the story about how Athena did that to you and it is only a matter of time before someone will figure that out.” I tell him.
“I guess your right about that.” He says, than Clarisse comes running into the arena.
“Annabeth and Eric disappeared.” Clarisse says out of breath.
“Where were they last?” I ask her.
“Thalia was with them at Zeus fist. She looked around a bit and when she came back they were both gone.” She says and with that I run of into the direction of Zeus fist. When I got there Thalia is freaking out and Micheal is trying to calm her down which isn’t working out for him. I step in front of her mumble some words into her ear. She then points to the spot where they had disappeared. I go over and look at the spot more closely and found a crack in between the rocks just big enough for a person to squeeze through the crack and when I did I found out that it was an entrance to a tunnel that leads to a cave and what I find inside is something that I wish I can un-see. It’s Annabeth and Eric making out. I quickly go back outside.
“They are alright.” I tell Thalia and stop her from going into the crack.
“You don’t want to go inside.” I tell her. She gives me a weird look but at that moment Eric and Annabeth come out and they are trying to fix their shirts and in that moment Thalia gets it. Once they are back to their orderly state Thalia pulls Annabeth into a bone crushing hug, telling her that she should never do something like that again. Since no one wants to hunt down the 2 remaining scorpions everyone goes back to the campfire while I hunt for them and it is fun. After I am finished I go back to the gang covered in scorpion blood with a smile on my face.
“Looks like someone had fun.” Thalia tells me.
“I did have fun.” I tell her and with that I go to our cabin so that I a shower. Getting the blood of the clothes will be impossible so I put them into the trash.

After I clean myself up I put on some black sweatpants and a loose t-shirt and go to the big house. On the way there I come across Thalia and Annabeth talking to each other. When Thalia sees me she can’t believe what I am wearing. She doesn’t say anything though because whenever I am wearing comfy clothing something big is on my mind and she knows I will only tell some people and Annabeth isn’t on the list yet. So excusing herself from Annabeth she joins me and together we walk to the big house.
“So you want to tell me what this is about?” Thalia asks
“I will tell you in a few minutes.” I tell her and with that we enter the big house. Inside Chiron is already waiting with Poseidon and Zeus. When they see us they give us a hug and a kiss on the cheek.
“What it this about Percy.” Dad asks.
“Thalia and I have known for a while now where the entrance to the labyrinth is and with that an entrance point for Luke and his army to get into camp, without being blocked by the camp boarder.” I tell them. At these news everyone is shocked. Well it isn’t every day that you find an entrance to a place where even the best protection has no effect.
“How did both of you find the entrance to it?” Zeus asks.
“When Hades blessed us, the two of us could sense ancient places and soon stumbled upon various delta signs that led us into the labyrinth that both of us have been exploring and training in for a while.” I say and both dads are stunned that uncle Hades blessed us, but they can do nothing about that now. It is now a task of trying to figure out what to do next, to make a plan, and stop Luke from coming into camp and to stop the camp from being destroyed. The only solution that we can come up with is to send a quest into the maze. Now it is only a question of who to send. With that agreed on Chiron told us that he will make an announcement at dinner that there will be a councillor meeting. We say our goodbyes and leave to keep ourselves busy till it is time for dinner. Thalia and I decide to go to the archery range and practice shooting arrows for a bit. I summon my black bow and draw back on the string where an arrow metalized. Thalia stares at it in awe so I turn to her. She still has the bow that Artemis got us a while ago.
“Where did you get that?” She asks.
“I got it from Dad because I was tired of reloading my arrows every time.” I tell her.
“I want one.” She says pouting. In that moment one materializes in her hand and her face lit up like a Christmas tree
“Thanks dad.” She says as she lifts up the bow and draws the string back where a silver and black arrow appears. I draw back mine and it is a black and blue arrow. We shoot arrows until the dinner horn sounds, than I transform my bow back into an arrow earring and Thalia into a bracelet. Together we walk to the dinning pavilion where we get our food and sit down to eat.

Halfway through the meal Chiron makes the announcement that there will be a meeting so every cabin councillors stands up and together we walk to the big house. When we enter Chiron is telling them about the discovery of the Labyrinth entrance and that there will be a quest to seek the destruction of the Labyrinth and the saving of camp. We discuss all the outcomes until it is decided that Annabeth, Eric and I will be going into the Labyrinth while the rest of camp will be preparing for a possible attack. Chiron sent me up to ask the Oracle for the quest. The attic is a creepy and disturbing place so I quickly walk up to the mummy.
“How do we destroy the labyrinth?” I ask the mummy. It takes a moment but then her mouth opens making green smoke come out and then she spoke.
“You shall delve in the darkness of the endless maze,
The dead, the traitor, and the lost one raise.
You shall rise or fall by the ghost king's hand,
The child of Athena's final stand.
Destroy with a hero's final breath,
And lose a love to worse than death.”
Then she went quiet and with that I walked back to the meeting room where everyone was waiting.
“So Percy what did she say?” Chiron asks me.
“Firstly the quest leader is Annabeth since the Oracle mentioned her in it.” I say.
“So what did she say?” Annabeth asks. With that I retell them the prophecy and at the end Chiron is deep in thought and the rest of the group was worried about other things. We all knew that quests never say what they mean and that they could turn out alright.
“Alright, so the quest members will take on their quest at 7 in the morning until then participate in your afternoon activities.” Chiron says and with that we know that we are dismissed so we go and do some activities. Annabeth, Eric, Thalia and I go to talk about what we will be doing. Evening rolls around and everyone gets ready to go to bed. It is a useless quest since Quintus is Daedalus but since the campers don’t know that I am willing to go along with them just to see their surprised expressions at the end. It may be cruel and unnecessary but it will be an adventure full of leaning and fun. There is no campfire today since no one really felt like it so we went to bed early. I pack my stuff and set my alarm clock for 6 in the morning then fall asleep.

Chapter Text

Annabeth's P.O.V

At exactly 7 am we meet up at Zeus fist, as we wait for Chiron to send us off. I see Percy hugging Thalia and telling her something that seems to make her cry. He says a few more things before she walks away and he comes towards us. At that moment Chiron wishes us luck and we set off into the maze. As soon as we step into it something seems wrong. The walls are always shifting and nothing ever seems the same. We walk for some time only with quietness hanging over us.
“So what did you tell Thalia?” I ask Percy trying to break the tension.
“Last night Artemis came to us and had asked her to join the hunt and be the new lieutenant.” He says.
“What is she going to do?” I ask.
“I told her to take the job and be happy.” He tells me. With that said he goes back to thinking. After long turns and strait hallways we reach a big roman style room that has 2 doors and a person standing in front of them. It is Janus the good of passages and a lot more. He smiles when he sees us which is never good whenever a god looks at you especially if he smiles it doesn’t end well.
“Hello quest members. I have been expecting you, especially you Annabeth.” He says looking right at me. Instantly I knew that something is wrong.
“What is it that you want from me?” I ask
“I am here to give you a choice. You can either go the door on my right or the door to my left. One door leads to a prison the other to the path of your journey. Which one will you choose?” He asks me. I stand there stunned for a few minutes until I look around to the rest of my group.

I see the Eric is trying to figure out which door by doing eni-mini-miny-mo while Percy has his head tilted back almost looking uninterested. I turn back to Janus about to tell him my answer when there is a bright flash of light and the Queen of Heavens appears. I instantly bow and so does Eric but Percy remains standing. Even though he is the Prince it’s like he has no respect in front of them.
“Hello Percy, glad to see that you’re okay. Your dad worries about you.” Hera tells her.
“He has nothing to worry about. But we have another issue that needs solving.” Percy tells her pointing towards Janus.
“I see what you mean. What are you doing here Janus. It isn’t her time yet.” Hers tells him and makes me confused. Janus grumbles something that I can’t here but Percy snickers a bit and Hera’s face turns red with anger. At first I thought that she will grab Percy but then turns towards Janus grabs him and disappears. The two doors remain standing where they are. Percy walks to the right door opens it and steps through. Having no other choice we follow him to wherever the door leads.

When we emerge on the other side we find that we are in a prison. I instantly want to walk back but the door has disappeared. Meanwhile Percy seems totally fine with it and casually pulls out one of his swords. He raises his arm and slashes down on the bars that keep us from getting out. In a few swings there is a square shaped whole in the bars. We step through and find that this place is gigantic. It seems that we are the only ones there since every other place looks deserted. That is when we notice the stairs to the top and the figure that was walking down the steps and I instantly know where we are. We were in Kampê’s prison, if she ever finds us here we’ll be stuck.
“Guys we need to get out of here now.” I tell them.
“How come?” Eric asks.
“Kampê is about to catch us here so we need to get back into the maze.” I tell them, without even a second thought we turn back around and quickly going back into the maze finding that the door has reappeared. We step through and this time we go through the other door and actually go deeper into the labyrinth. We soon take up a rest stop and set up camp. Since everyone looks tiered Percy takes first watch while the rest of us go to sleep.

Percy's P.O.V

Ever since we entered the maze I have this weird feeling that something seems off. It isn’t only that we are in a moving labyrinth. Normally it isn’t like this, of all the times I have been in here this is the strangest. It has bugged me at first when we entered, now the urge has become stronger like there is some ancient force sleeping here. As I take watch and everyone goes to sleep I begin walking around but also making sure that I don’t wonder of too far. Soon enough I wake everyone so that we can keep moving. We weave through more hallways and soon the sounds of animals can be heard and we find a grate that leads to a pasture. I slowly push it up and we see that we are on some kind of ranch. Climbing out we came face to face with Apollo’s sacred red cows so I instantly know where we are.
“I know where we are.” I tell them.
“Well out with it.” Eric says.
“We are on the Triple G Ranch. Where they keep a few animals, like Apollo's cows or the scorpions that we used for the training recently.” I tell them.
“That is correct boy.” Someone says behind us. We turn around only to come face to face with Eurytion the slave off Geryon. In the distance we see a ranch house where another person is standing which I instantly know is Geryon. I hate him, the few times I have been here with Apollo I always stayed back, but the vibe that I am getting off him is still the same as a few years ago. Eurytion leads us to the ranch house where Geryon has sat himself down on his rocking chair.
“Who do we have here?” Geryon asks.
“We are on a quest to find Daedalus.” I tell him.
“Now that’s very interesting. I would have guessed that you were just trying to find your friend.” He tells us.
“Which friend do you mean?” Annabeth asks.
“He means me.” Nico says as we turn around and find him. It was no real surprise for me to find him here.
“What are you doing here shouldn’t you be with your dad?” Eric asks.
“Dad wanted me to check on a few things and I stumbled upon Geryon. So we made a deal and I am staying for a little while.” He says.
“So are they now. In fact you will all be staying until one of you comes up with a good deal for me to let you go.” Geryon says.
“That’s not going to happen.” I tell him, he only laughs at that and motions for his lackey to bring out something. Eurytion goes into the house and comes back with a huge dog.
“He won’t let you go until one of you does something for Geryon.” Eurytion tells us.
“What do you want us to do?” Eric asks.
“That is actually quite simple. One of you will go to my man eating horses and clean out their pasture since no one has cleaned that place in a while.” Geryon says. We walk away a few meters then we all consult on who will do it and since Eric and I have the water powers so it’s up to us and we settle it with a game of rock, paper, scissors and I win. We walk back to Geryon and tell him that I’ll do it and he nods his head satisfied with the outcome.
“So I clean the stables as a favor to you, and you let us go.” I say and Greyson nods his head. With that Eurytion leads me to the stables where the horses put their heads up at the hearing of feet. In that moment a few horse voices fill my head and they don’t sound very friendly. Eurytion gives me a shovel, a pat on the back and leaves going back to the house. I stand there for a few minutes until I throw away the shovel since it will be no use for me. I walk down to the stream put my hands in there and pull up a handful of sand. It is a neat trick that I learned from dad a while back, although he was very cryptic about it by giving me a sand dollar and telling me to break it in half. At first I thought he had gone insane but when I did it fresh water emerged. He then told me that it will work with any seashells that are in a fresh water rivers. I pick out the shells and smile at the Nereid that the stream belongs to promising her not to pollute her river. I then walk back to the stables and throw the shells there and seconds later fountains of water erupt washing away all the poop and dirt, the horses of course don’t like the water but once it’s all cleaned, the horses are clean along with it. Once I’m sure that it’s all cleaned I concentrate on the water and use my powers to reduce the water until there is nothing left. Then after I drain it into a nearby field, making sure that the earth absorbs the fertilized water. The stables are now shinning and clean and I begin to walk back towards the house but am stopped by an IM that shows Poseidon. I smile at him and he smiles back.
“I came with a warning.” He tells me.
“What is that dad?” I ask
“Geryon won’t hold his promise and you will have to kill him if you want to continue your quest.” He says and with that he swipes through the message ending it. I make my way back to the house and find that my friends are tied up.
“I cleaned your stables and realized that no dishonorable man would keep his word.” I tell him pulling my two swords out of there holds. Geryon only smiles at me, I give him my signature smirk back. Faster than I would have thought he lunges for me a huge staff appearing in his hand. I bend backwards and feel the blade sweep over my head. I then swing my right arm to meet the blade with the other I’m trying to cut his head off. Knowing that Geryon has 3 hearts the only possible way to kill him is either with a bow and arrow or cutting of his head. I kick out my foot and know that I hit him in the jaw when I hear a snap. I then back flip using him as a step and land upright my left sword already coming up to strike. I sweep low with both swords but then with my right cut him across his chest while the other sweeps down breaking his weapon in half. I put away my swords and summon my black bow. Geryon only laughed.
“No child of Poseidon has ever managed to handle a bow.” Geryon says.
“Good thing that I’m not one of his children then.” I say and Geryon only gives me a confused look but it’s the last one since I pull back the string a black arrow forming and realization striking Geryon. He only smiles and turns as I let the arrow fly and it meets it's mark with going through the sides and piercing all three hearts. I let out a breath and the bow vanishes reforming into my earring. I then go back to the house and untie my friends.
“What did you mean when you told him that you weren’t dad’s son?” Eric asks me.
“Just let it go Eric.” I tell him.
“How can I do that you just declared that dad isn’t your dad.” He says but I ignore him and face Eurytion who only walks out of our way. Nico has already disappeared which is fine by me and we go back into the labyrinth.
“Before you go, why don’t you seek out Hephaestus by using one of his spiders?” Eurytion states throwing me a small round metal object. That I didn’t think to that in the first place bugs me. Annabeth jumps back since she is afraid of spiders but I only nod thanks at Eurytion before activating it and letting it scuttle into the darkness. We follow the metal spider, it taking us through different tunnels, multiple turns until we finally arrive at a set of huge celestic bronze doors where the spider stops. I push them open and am instantly hit by the smell of burning metal and sweat. The spider scuttles inside a few more feet until it reaches a huge man hunching over a set of papers. When he realizes that we are there he turns around and smiles at us.
“Percy, how have you been?” He asks.
“Just fine, we actually came to ask you a question.” I tell him.
“What are you wondering about?” He asks.
“Do you know how to find Daedalus?” Annabeth asks. At that his expression changes and I know that we had hit a nerve.
“What do you need him for?” He asks.
“We need to find him before Luke and his army does.” I tell him.
“Sorry Percy but I can’t help you find him but I can tell you everything I know about him if you can do a small favor for me.” Hephaestus tells us.
“What do you want us to do?” I ask him getting slightly annoyed with all the favors.
“I need you to check on one of my forges that are being occupied by a few uninvited quests and every time I want to go check nothing seems out of the ordinary.” He tells us. Having no other choice we agree on it and he programs the spider to take us there. In just a few minutes with minimal turns and going over rough terrain the spider takes us there and we instantly see the problem Hephaestus has. It is overrun with Telekhines working for Kronos. We creep around the place, and look at what they are doing to find that they are creating Kronos famous scythe. I tell Annabeth to head back to Hephaestus and tell him what we have found. Of course she protests but after a bit of convincing she leaves. Eric and I sneak further into the forge but are soon discovered when Eric steps on a piece of metal. I want to kill him at that moment but it is too late since the Telkhine all move towards our direction, so we pull out our swords and begin to fight. We are both soon outnumbered and the groups of Telkhine just kept coming. Some of them even throwing fire at us. Thankfully having Poseidon’s skin makes Eric immune and I have no problem with it either. But it won’t last forever.
“Summon water Eric.” I yell at him. Not paying him more attention I also try and feel the ocean water then feel the familiar tug in my gut and not a second later the whole volcano is flooded with tons of water. It hits the hot lava of the volcano building up pressure and not a second later a huge boom rattles the forge and both of us go flying into the air quite literately feeling as though we are on fire. Then when the pain gets unbearable we pass out.

When I wake up I instantly know where I am. The smell of flowers, remedies and the hint of coconut. As I move my body, all my muscles instantly scream in pain. I open my eyes and find that a pair of eyes looking down at me and that she is smiling. It seems so weird seeing her again and having her smile down at me. I get up slowly even though Calypso protest. I look around and find that Eric is also there but he was still passed out. I use my new found healing powers to help myself get better and can feel my burns and cuts slowly fading away until I can stand up without too much pain. My muscles still burn but they will ease once I can get close to the water.
“It’s so good to see you again Calypso.” I tell her.
“It’s good to see you too Percy. What were you up to again you looked like hell when you washed up on my island?” Calypso asks.
“I blew up a volcano to stop some Telkhine on the orders of Hephaestus. Now he owes me a huge favour in return.” I tell her. She just shakes her head when she hears that. In that moment Eric comes stumbling out of Calypsos cave. He looks a little dazed so the natural thing I do is summon water and dump it on him. It instantly helps to regenerate him and wake him up.
“So how long have we been out?” Eric asks drying himself.
“For about 3 days now.” I tell him. His expression is one of horror but I only shrug my shoulders since Thalia knows that I disappear for a long time sometimes and the others can make up their own theory. Just as I am about to stand up to get me some food 2 people appear, when they see us they smiled. It is Hermes and Poseidon.
“So this is where you have been hiding.” Hermes states.
“I haven’t been hiding, I was blown up then decided to have a nice vacation at a friend’s place.” I tell them. At that Hermes laughs while Poseidon smiles.
“So are you guys here to take us back home?” Eric asks, Hermes nods his head and I let out a breath.
“Then let’s go.” Eric says happily and walks towards them and turns around as soon as he sees that I’m not following him.
“Percy. Why aren’t you coming?” He asks me.
“I will find my own way home. You can go on ahead.” I tell them. Eric wants to protest but Hermes and Poseidon nod at me then grab Eric and disappear in a flash of light. I turn towards Calypso and already see tears forming in her eyes. Since the curse bounds her to this island she is always happy to have visitors, but the catch is that they always have to leave. I am one of the few people that come to visit her from time to time since Apollo sent me here to learn some healing and to bring him back a flower.
“You know that I am going to come back.” I tell her.
“It always seems so long until you visit again.” She tells me.
“Yah I know. So what do you think of my annoying brother?” I ask her.
“He seems like any other hero. Eager to get away and resume his glory to become a hero.” She tells me. I let out a breath and give her a hug then a kiss on the forehead. She is smiling when I pull back. I give her my smirk then let the mist take me back to camp half blood. I reform in front of my cabin and see everyone cheer. It’s of course for Eric which is totally fine by me.

I lean against the post of the deck to look at everyone celebrate. I hear the door opening behind me and know that Thalia came out. She gives me a knowing smile.
“So you have been at Calypso’s?” She asks me. I smile and she knows the answer. It is something that we have developed over the years.
“I see the everyone is celebrating Eric’s return.” I tell her.
“Yah, he made this big deal and Annabeth gave him a kiss that made his face turn tomato red.” Thalia tells me and I laugh at the image.
“So how have you been?” I ask.
“I joined the hunters, so I can help young girls in trouble and act out vengeance on men who deserve to be punished. I am still planning to be together with you when we return to our rightful home.” She says.
“So you told Artemis that the thing isn’t forever then?” I ask and she nods her head. I pull my sis into a hug and place a kiss atop her head.
“I will miss you when I am at camp.” I tell her.
“You can come visit any time.” She says while I laugh at that and begin to walk towards the crowd.
“What are you doing Percy?” She asks me.
“We still have a quest to finish and I know how to do that.” I tell her. She gives me a knowing look. Together we walk to the celebrating crowd that seem to think we have already completed the quest. I let out a loud whistle that has some campers put their hands up to their ears. Everyone is instantly quiet and turns around to face me.
“We still have a quest to finish and I know how to find Daedalus workshop.” I tell them. They all look at me confused.
“How are we going to do that?” Annabeth asks.
“With the help of a clear sighted mortal.” I say and pull out my cell at the look of it a few campers mumble that they also want one. I smile at that comment while I search for the number and phone her. In just a few rings she picks up.
“Hey Rachel. It’s Percy the guy you met at Hoover Dam. A few friends and I need your help with something.” I tell her, we talk for a little while until she says yes and we agree to meet tomorrow in front of an art museum. Once I hang up everyone had dispersed until only one the quest member plus Chiron and Thalia remain.
“What do you want with a clear sighted mortal Percy?” Chiron asks me.
“She will lead us through the maze.” I tell them at that everyone gets a knowing look in their eyes as if they know what I am planning to do.

The next day I am awake early for once knowing that I want to get this quest over and done with as soon as possible. While everyone is taking forever I go to the arena to see Quintus playing with his pet hell hound. I clear my throat and walk up behind him. He turns around and gives me a small smile.
“I’m here to tell you to return to your place in the labyrinth.” I say.
“So you are getting close to finding it then?” He asks
“You could say that.” I say and he nods his head.
“Then I will head out and tell Chiron that I need to leave because of certain reasons and head back home.” He says and heads out. I give Ms. O’Leary a pat on the head, then go to the camp van and wait for the others. Once they all arrive I tell Argus to drive us to the art museum. Once we arrive Rachel waves us over. She is dressed in some very strange clothes and covered with gold makeup.
“Hey Percy, so what do you need my help with?” Rachel asks.
“Why don’t we go inside and talk?” I ask her and she nods. We walk inside and go into the basement where the dressing room is. Rachel quickly changes into a pair of pants and a shirt then begins to wipe of the makeup.
“What do you know about Greek mythology?” Annabeth asks.
“Everything there is to know, why though?” She asks.
“Because they are all real. Every single myth is real. That is why we need your help, we are on a quest to find Daedalus and destroy the labyrinth to stop an army from marching through and attacking our camp.” I tell her.
“Then let’s go.” She says leaving us a bit surprised and speechless. The entrance of the labyrinth is very close so I begin to search for the delta symbol.
“What are you doing Percy?” Annabeth asks me.
“There is an entrance to the labyrinth here.” I tell them. They all pull away props and other things until Eric stumbles upon the delta sign. I press in the sign and the door to the labyrinth opens. We go inside and instantly Rachel starts walking.
“How do you know it’s that way?” I ask her.
“I can see this faint light running along the floor and it goes this way.” She says so with no other choice we follow her. We take a few turns going left and right going in and out of modern to ancient looking sections. As we being to head to a more ancient part of the labyrinth we then hear voices that belong to demigods. I stop everyone and tell them to be quiet and hide but we aren’t quick enough and are caught by the group.
“We what do we have here.” A guy with an eyepatch says.
“Just someone passing through, wanting not to trouble anyone.” I say but I know they don’t buy that. Instantly two other demigods surround us and take our weapons, then they lead us to an arena where Luke and Antaeus are talking.

There is a demigod fighting a monster in the arena for pure entertainment which I find ridiculous. Knowing that we need to fight Antaeus to get back on track, I being to get a bit annoyed at all the detours that we have had to make on this quest alone.
“Well if it isn’t my favorite demigods.” Luke says as he sees us.
“Hello Luke, Kronos already bored of you.” I tell him in a sarcastic way.
“I am here on his order to do some negotiations.” Luke says.
“Who is this Luke?” Antaeus asks Luke.
“These are Eric a son of Poseidon, Annabeth a daughter of Athena and here comes the interesting part Percy a son of Chaos, the other one I don’t know.” He tells Antaeus. At the mentioning of my actual father Eric looks at me with sad and unbelievable eyes of course I have to make proper introductions since Luke left out the best part.
“Prince Perseus the second child of Chaos, the creator of the universe and the heir to the throne, at your service.” I say giving him a mock bow.
“Haven’t met a child of Chaos in a few years. Not since your brother Tartarus paid me a visit a few years ago.” Antaeus says.
“Really, I am surprised he let you live. But that is in the past, now I am here to gain passage through that gate and I can’t wait to send you back to my brother.” I tell them.
“That’s what you want, you have to fight me to pass through my arena.” Antaeus says.
“Then let’s get on with it.” I tell him and pull out my swords out from the scabbards that hang around my waist. The person who took my swords looks surprised that I have them again. Antaeus grins at me and motions for a guy to fight me. He is the same guy that led us here in the first place.
“Who are you?” I ask him.
“I am Ethan Nakamura a son of Nemesis.” He tells me. We wait a bit then Antaeus motions for us to begin. I already know from the first step that he took that I have the upper hand. Ethan moves sloppy, very sloppy and all the armor he is wearing is only slowing him down. I make a few minor cuts nothing that will only harm him a little. I finally have enough of him so I faint a strike, then with my other sword I cut low and disarm him. I then put one sword in front of his neck and one behind.
“Kill him.” Antaeus boomed from his spot, but I couldn’t do it so I push him away. Seeing my refusal Antaeus jumps into the arena himself and challenges me to fight him and I gladly accept.
“Let’s see how good this son of Chaos is.” Antaeus says. With that done we both attack each other but I know thanks to him being a son of Gaia that he’ll just heal himself using the earth that meant that I have to get him off.

I look up and see that there is a network of chains hanging from the ceiling which means that I have to get him up there somehow. We stand of for a while before I launch myself at him and cut him in the thigh. I jump back and he hollers in pain but the earth quickly patches himself up. He points his spear at me and I wait for the right moment then jump onto the spear and run up it. I them jump onto his shoulder and jab my sword into it. When he then tries to shake me off and use the right momentum to jump up onto the chains. I grab hold of them and pull me up so I am sitting on them. Antaeus doesn’t like that at all and also jumps up. When he grabs a handful of chains that ceiling groans but doesn’t give in. I jump from chain to chain sometimes swiping at him to make sure that my plan is still working but also swiping at the chains making them longer. With a few more swings Antaeus is really stuck I jump down and sheathed my swords. I then summon my black bow and pull back. I suspect that as soon as I kill Antaeus, Luke and his gang will attack so I have to make the shot count. I pull back on my bow and let the arrow fly, it goes right into his heart and sand starts raining down and he has wide eyes.
“Enjoy Tartarus you oversize monkey.” I say just as he turns into sand. That is the moment that I use as the escape. I run over to the gang undo there bindings then run straight for the other side even before the dust had settled we are out of the arena and onto our way towards Daedalus workshop.

Without any more interruptions we make our way closer to his workshop until we finally arrive at a set of mechanical doors. Annabeth and Eric push them open to reveal a huge room full of mechanical stuff, it looks amazing, now I get why Hepaesutus is jealous of Daedalus. At the end of the hallway full of cool toys is another door and walk to that and pull it open. The person on the other side is Quintus which no surprise for me, the others all can’t believe that Quintus is Daedalus.
“We need the string Daedalus.” Eric says coming straight to the point.
“Sorry to disappoint you but I already gave it to that Luke fellow.” He says.
“Why would you do that?” Annabeth asks.
“He came here first, so he gets first pick.” He says and that seems sensible to me.
“Still how can you give our enemy the string?” Eric complains.
“That is enough; there is nothing that we can do about that now. The only thing that we can do is get back to camp, get there before Luke and his gang, and stop them,” I tell them. With that we make our way back to the labyrinth and Daedalus joins us. We walk back to the camp Rachel leading us like a pro. At one intersection I feel a draft coming from somewhere and stop.
“What are you doing Percy?” Annabeth asks.
“You go on ahead I will catch up with you.” I tell them. Without giving them a chance to protest I walk towards the breeze and find that I am on the coast on top of a mountain. What I have discovered is the Titans palace. I hide in the hall and watch what happens. Luke who stands there but once he turns around the eyes aren’t his but they’re gold, which means that Kronos is inside of Luke which must of have happened after we battled in the arena. I hear footsteps coming from the other side of the hall and see Ethan enter, he bows his head and instantly pledges himself to Kronos. I can’t believe him but that doesn’t matter since I see enough and head back to the others but I know that Luke knew I was there.

Once I rejoin the group we walk back to camp. We come across another tunnel that is covered by branches and I can instantly tell that Grover would have been really excited about it if he would have come. I feel the powerful presence radiating from the tunnel that I have been feeling since we are down here. Interested in finding out who this power belongs to I follow the tunnel, the group left with no choice but to follow me complaining about so many side stops but I ignore them. We walk through a few passages until we reach a huge cave filled with animals and plants that are long extinct or really rare. On an alter lies the God of the Wild Pan. We walk over to him and I can tell that he is about to fade away. He opens his eyes when he sees us coming and smiles.
“Finally you have come, I have waited a long time for you.” Pan tells us.
“What can we do for you?” I ask him.
“Make sure that you bring back a little bit of the wild for me. The world has been so consumed that they need some guidance so I bless you Percy Jackson with the power to bring back the wild, to fix broken life and to reconnect humans to nature. To you Annabeth Chase I bestow the wisdom that nature holds and the foundation that it brings and to you Eric King I bestow the communication and the current of nature.” He says and with that Pan the God of nature and king of the wild fades away and the nature around him too. We leave the cave and exit the labyrinth when we emerge we are in the middle of a forest and seem to have come out of an old mine entrance. Since we don’t want to get Rachel involved in our problems we say our goodbyes then summon some Pegasis and fly back to camp where they are preparing for war. Chiron is happy to see us back and unharmed and seems surprised that we have Quintus with us. We get to Zeus fist and see that they are setting up traps and other things to slow the monster army down and not too late. As soon as they are done the army comes marching out. I hold up a fist a sign for the archers that are in the trees to hold their fire. The monsters advance and at that moment I let my fist drop and hundreds of arrows come raining down on the army destroying a lot of them. I pull out my two swords and signal to attack. In an instant hundreds of campers attacked the monsters and everywhere people swing swords and cut monsters to pieces. Even I was my own little Fluctus of destruction cutting down so many monsters and they just kept coming. I could feel the nature around us cry out and soon realize that there was a fire which I instantly put out with a huge title wave that also destroyed a lot of monsters. Just then a huge screech comes from the entrance of the labyrinth and out comes Kampê. Her form is as terrifying as always. I see Eric running towards her and know he has no chance of actually defeating her.

Though I give him a fair chance since I am busy, with a few Cyclopes and Telkhine right now. I hear a scream and look over at Eric to see that he is in trouble. I vapor travel over to him just as Kampê is dealing the finishing blow. I put up my right sword to block her. She flies up high and out of range, since I am done with her doing that I summon my bow and shoot an arrow right between her shoulder blades making her not fly anymore. She shoots as me but I pull up my right sword, then kick her back with my left boot. I then put up my left sword and bring it down in an arc when she gets in close range. I cut her in half from neck to hip and making her disintegrate in golden dust. I get back into fighting but then I am interrupted by Quintus getting my attention. I kill the monsters around them vapor travel to him.
“Percy you need to kill me in order to stop the monsters.” Quintus tells me.
“How would that help?” I ask.
“If you destroy the creator whose life force is connected to the labyrinth. The labyrinth will die and destroy the rest of the monsters that are inside.” Nico says all of the sudden popping out of the shadow.
“What are you doing here Nico?” I ask him killing a few monsters that tried to sneak up on me but failed and soon met their end.
“I came to collect Daedalus. Dad wishes to have his soul in his personal collection as a person who fixes his broken items.” Nico tells me.
“Uncle Hades did always have an interesting sense of having collector’s items.” I tell him, Nico only nods his head. We both turn to Quintus who has gone very white.
“Do you want me to stab you or are you free willingly going?” I ask him.
“I will gladly except my death and leave with the hope to explain to my family what I had to do to survive and to escape.” Daedalus says and with that I can tell that he has died peacefully.

The earth shudders and the next minute no more monsters came out of the labyrinth, with that the campers set out to destroy the rest of the monsters and of course we win. The losses aren’t that great but it still takes its toll on the campers. At the ceremony we burn every ones burial shrouds to honor them. At the end of that I feel the toll on my body from not sleeping for who knows how long. I walk back to the cabin only to find Nico sneaking off.
“Where are you going?” I ask him.
“I could ask you the same thing, I am going back to the underworld Bianca and I have dinner plans with dad and mom. He really does get a bad reputation on Olympus. ” He tells me and I nod my head agreeing with him.
“I am going to go catch up on sleep. I feel like I haven’t slept in a week.” I tell him and that was it.
“With great power comes a great need, to take a nap.” Nico says and I agree with him. We say our goodbyes and I go into my cabin. Since I don’t want to be part of the victory celebration that is going on at the beach I go up to my room, get ready for bed and fall into a coma of sleep even before I hit the pillow.

Chapter Text

Percy's P.O.V

It was finally a little piece and quiet from all the quests that I have been on. Right now I am walking with Rachel and Thalia along the streets of New York and Rachel is showing us the sights. In the past 3 months a lot has happened. Thalia being the lieutenant of the hunters hasn’t been at camp a lot and is always out with them but I’m happy for her, I have turned 15 by now and I’m turning 16 soon. Thalia would have her birthday too but since he is half immortal she stopped ageing for now. The camp has grown in campers with many new ones coming in, Chaos has been teaching me while I am asleep. It has improved my powers and swordsmanship a lot and it makes me happy. Since a few months ago Zoe returned from Etnotopia and has rejoined the hunters to help out a bit, Zoe and I have been getting closer and by now all the hunters know that we are kind of together and surprisingly Artemis is okay with it. We even went on a few dates every now and then. Chiron has become like a third father to me and Poseidon and I hang out every weekend in his palace where I met a cyclops named Tyson and we became best buddies, and Triton and I get along great kind of like brothers but not close enough. Walking along the shore line of New York is great except when a shadow swoops over you and it turns out to be a black Pegasus that answers to the name of Blackjack and has taking a liking to me and on him is Beckendorf. I instantly know what time it is and let out a sigh.,
“Guess it’s that time?” I ask Charles who only nods his head. I turn around and Thalia hugs me whispering in my ear that I should be careful. Rachel gives me a kiss on the cheek in good luck, than I go up to Charles swing myself onto Blackjack and off we are. For weeks we have been practicing for the moment that the Andromeda, Luke’s huge cruise ship will show up and that we will blow it up with Greek fire, we have been practicing on abandoned ships but nothing compares to the real deal. We fly in silence towards the boat and there it is the huge monster carrying vessel. Keeping to the shadows and me helping out with covering us with one of my now powers being that I can suppress a demigods sent to that of a mortal standard we fly to the lowest deck. Getting off from Blackjack we grab the bags which are filled with Greek fire. We slowly and quietly creep to the engine room careful not to run into any monsters that might be lurking around. Making it there without anyone to spot us we get inside where there is only one telekinesis. Before he can even scream my sword Aurorae goes through him like butter and he is dead in minutes. We plant a few bombs till I hear the voices of other monsters coming with my enhanced hearing.
“I will go distract the monsters, you finish up here.” I tell Charles.
“Just be careful Percy.” He says.
“I’m always careful, but you be careful too.” I tell him half laughing and leave the engine room. Already on the second flight of stairs I run into two monsters who seem surprised at first. I pull out my sword and kill one of them leaving the other one alive so he could raise the alarm and lead the monsters away from the engine room. I keep running until I encounter a huge crab that’s in my way in the middle of the shopping portion of the ship. Sitting in a huge fountain until it notices me is a giant crab. I know that there is only one way to kill it though it will take a huge amount of courage. I concentrate on the fountain until it explodes and showers the whole floor in a layer of water. I take a running start and slid baseball stile under the crab until I found the week spot then driving Riptide in the cinch of its armor it disintegrated into golden dust instantly only leaving the shell behind. I knew this trick because even though I don’t listen to what Ares teaches us about monsters I usually listen to some of the interesting parts of it. Not having enough time to retrieve my fallen sword I keep running till a pair of Empousa’s are in my way.

I jump from one story to the next catapulting myself of the banister and having my sword by my side I cut of the head of one and stab the others through the heart. Again I keep running but I wasn’t fast enough and am soon capture by a pair of adult Telkhine. They then lead me outside onto the pool deck where Luke is standing and he doesn’t look friendly well he has never been fond of me to begin with.
“Well, well, well if it isn’t the pain in my ass, Percy Jackson high and mighty prince of the universe, son of Chaos.” Luke says. At the mention of me being a son of Chaos the strongest person in the universe everyone takes a step back. I hate when people call me by my actual title but this time I smiled since everyone seemed scared.
“So what if I am, your nothing more than a third rate leftover who seeks attention and if he doesn’t get it he cries like a little baby.” I tell Kronos, at my statement a few monsters snicker and Kronos looks like he is about to explode.
“That is enough. I am the high and mighty Titan king and you will not insult me.” He says and this time I laugh.
“High and mighty my ass.” I say this time instead of answering, Kronos pulls out his scythe and slowly walks over to me. I turn my arms until the monsters that are holding me needed to let go.

Quickly Fluctus and Aurorae meet his attack, Luke is known as the best swordsman in camp but he hasn’t met me yet. He slashes downward but I meet his strike by putting my right sword to block the attack then with my left I swing sideways, but Kronos is quick enough to get out of the way. I then did a downwards strike with Fluctus and left Aurorae at the ready. Just as I had thought, Kronos sidesteps Fluctus ready to strike but I meet his attack with Aurorae that glows when it hits his scythe. I sideways slash across his abdomen with Fluctus successfully landing a blow. He swore then froze the time around us so that I am moving in slow motion not being able to stop him. Not wanting to get hit by his sword I concentrate on the power of water. My strongest ability that I have, I feel the tug in my stomach the same one from before when I blew up Mount Saint Helens then the water comes at the ship and Kronos spell brakes. Just in time too before he can scratch me and I quickly do a back bend. Kronos is shocked that I broke the spell of time but that doesn’t bother me.
“Doesn’t matter how you did that, we knew that you were coming, and bringing a friend. I have already sent out two monsters to capture your friend.” Kronos tells me and in that moment it hits me that we have a spy in camp. How else will he know that we are coming. In that moment two monsters come up from below. One is holding Beckendorf and the Dracanae is holding the bag full of our decoys.
“We found him just where you said he would be.” The Dracanae says.
“He was just about to walk into the engine room.” An Empousa says but I knew that not to be true.
“Just about to go in or coming from the room?” Kronos asks.
“We think that he was just about to walk in.” The Empousa says.
“You idiots, check his bag.” Kronos yells at them. A Dracanae rips it open looking inside a few seconds later she turns the bag around and the contents spill out. Thinking that it’s Greek fire everyone steps back but instead of fire falling out are cans of beans.

Everyone lets out a breath but Kronos gets really mad at the monster and slices her head off. I look at Beckendorf and see him pointing at his watch and making his fingers into a zero which mean that the time is up and he wants to blow up the ship. Realizing that he wants to sacrifice himself to blow up the ship it just didn't feel right. Beckendorf motions for me to escape but I refuse. He lets out a huff, but in that moment the Dracanae notices the trigger on his arm. With no time left Beckendorf pushes the button and you can hear the rumbling coming from the engine room. Giving me no choice I jump of the side of the ship and land in the ocean. I control the water currents to take me as far away as possible but not before a piece of metal goes into my leg and pieces of shrapnel scratch along my body creating cuts that the water instantly healed but with the metal stuck in my leg it can’t heal that but only numbed the pain. Soon enough I pass out from the pain that consumes me and just drift through the last thing I did was telling the currents to take me to Poseidon's palace.

I am standing on mount Orthys watching Hyperion and Krios talking about the plan to destroy Mount Olympus. It seems that they are eager to destroy the thrones of the Olympians and to claim them for the titans. Atlas only complaining to get out of his prison but the two titans only laugh and begin talking again. Only then do I realize that Nico is there too watching them.
“Percy how is Eric going to defeat a whole entire army?” He asks me.
“I’m still working on that plan.” I tell him.
“My offer still stands, the one that I offered to you to do with him.” Nico tells me.
“I am only going to do that it if worse comes to worse.” I tell him.
“Suit yourself but don’t push it away too far.” Nico says and with that I wake up and find myself in the underwater palace of Atlantis facing an all too familiar cyclops. Groaning I sit up and see that my leg is in a bandage that is weirdly dry and most of the cuts are gone. The pain is still there though and it feels very soar. The cyclops smiles at me and I greet him.
“Hey Tyson, how have you been?” I ask.
“Very well. We found you floating towards the palace with a lot of bruises on you and that nasty piece of metal stuck in your leg. Transported you here to be fixed up though your leg had several muscles teared, the bone was cut in half and it also has some metal poison in it so it will take a little longer to heal, the water can’t heal everything especially a broken bone and we already maxed you out on Nectar and Ambrosia.” He tells me and I frown at.
“That’s great Tyson, I really need to see dad though it's really urgent.” I tell him ignoring the pain shooting up my leg as soon as I stand up I tumble a bit and Tyson gives me a cane to stabilize myself, which I find weird but am also thankful for.
“Then follow me.” He says, we swim through the palace and towards the throne room. As we swim by windows I see the battle that is going on outside and the massive army of Oceanus. When we arrive I thank Tyson for bringing me here, then enter the throne room to see father and Triton talking about positioning soldiers and other battle strategies. Poseidon looks up from the map and sees me and smiles but frowns at my leg and cane that I use to balance on.
“Percy, glad to see your awake sorry about how your mission went?” Father says.
“Yah but that doesn’t matter right now, the titans are planning to attack Olympus and destroy your seats of power. You need to tell Zeus that and he needs to call a meeting.” I tell him.
“That isn’t the only problem us Olympians are facing Percy. When you blew up Mount St. Helens a monster was imprisoned under there and that monster has escaped. It was Typhoon and now the Olympian council is battling him while I have my own fight down here.” Father says.
“You need to help the Olympians though. You can rebuild your palace but when your seats of power is destroyed you will not be here anymore.” I tell him.
“I can’t abandon my kingdom Percy.” He says but I’m already on my way out.
“Tell Chiron that it’s time and know that Beckendorf didn’t die in vain and I will try to help the family.” Dad says before I swim out and a dolphin comes to help me out since kicking with my left leg hurts a lot and back to camp half-blood. When I arrive at camp Conner who is at the horn blows it ones and soon a lot of campers came running to the beach. Once they see that I am using a cane to support the weight on my left side they instantly knew that things didn't go so well but Selena was one of the first but when she didn’t see Beckendorf she screamed a loud “no” and collapses on the ground crying. Soon enough other campers notice the absence of Charles and the mood changes. Sure they are glad that the ship is gone but sad that one of their own sacrificed himself. I limp straight towards Chiron who frowns at my leg and I tell him what dad has told me. He instantly calls a council meeting and Eric to the Oracle. I already knew the prophecy so I limp to my seat and sit down elevating my foot.
“What is the great prophecy?” Chiron asks when Eric returns from the attic.
“A half blood of the eldest gods,
Shall reach sixteen against all odds,
And see the world in endless sleep,
The hero's soul, cursed blade shall reap,
A single choice shall end his days,
Olympus to preserve or raze.” Eric retells and the room is very quiet thinking about what it means. One second it is quiet the next is the council room is yelling at each other and not about the prophecy. The Ares and Apollo cabins are fighting with each other about some stupid flying chariot that they found on a quest and who it now belongs too and Clarisse and Micheal are yelling at each other about that.
“Everyone shut up!” I yell at them standing up and the room instantly goes quite as I sit down again on the chair rubbing my sore leg and again Chiron looks at me and I mouth later and he only nods.
“On a quest that involved both the Ares and Apollo cabin secured a chariot and are now fighting over it.” Micheal answers.
“That chariot belongs to us, the Ares cabin found it.” Clarisse says.
“Why don’t you share the chariot?” I ask them.
“No, I will never surrender it to the Apollo cabin either all or no.” Clarisse says.
“She’s right both of us have a claim on it.” Michael says.
“Then settle it with a competition.” I suggest.
“No, then you can count the Ares cabin out of the war.” Clarisse says and with that she walks out slamming the door behind her. Selina in tears runs after her probably to try and change her mind. With one problem already we face another. Chiron then asks the room about what they think the prophecy means.
“It obviously revolves around Eric since he is a half blood of Poseidon.” I say.
“What about you and Thalia?” Conner asks.
“We don’t really count in that because we are twins and it only states one child. Plus Thalia is immortal.” I say
“You turn sixteen in a week, so that long till the end of the world.” Travis says.
“Hey my birthday is not a sign for the end of the world.” Eric complains, since no one is talking about the subject at hand Chiron dismisses the meeting and everyone heads out.
“What’s up with your leg Percy?” He asks.
“When the ship blew up a piece of Metal got stuck in my leg, turns out there was rust on the piece that has given me a little metal poisoning plus the bone was sliced in half.” I tell him and he motions for me to put my leg up so he can have a look. As he undoes the bandage I can now see the full extent of the injury and see that the hole has closed halfway and that that there were little black pieces that looked like blood clogs.
“The wound looks good and we just have to change the bandage for a few days and you will be good as new just keep using that cane and don’t stress the leg too much.” He says and I nod my head. Chiron then quickly changes the bandage and I head out.
I limp towards the forest to find Eric again just as Annabeth runs after me wanting to come along. Marching for a long time I can feel my leg starting to hurt like hell and was about to mist travel back to the cabin when we finally stumble upon Eric who is talking with Juniper and she has tears running down her face. We wait till they are done and Eric walks towards us.
“What’s up with Juniper?” I ask him.
“Grover has been so busy with gathering all nature spirits that Juniper hasn’t seen him in a while.” He says and I nod my head. Knowing that I can’t stand on this leg any longer and with the conversation seemingly done I mist travel back. I still had something to do so limping inside my cabin and upstairs to my room I switch the switch and go through so I end up in my room on Olympus. Walking out of Poseidon's palace I make my way to the throne room to find Hera, Hestia and Artemis in a heated argument. Seeing that it was getting out of hand I clear my throat loudly and they look at the source. When they see me they smile then frown at my leg and act like nothing has happened. Hera walks over to me and gives me a hug and a kiss on the cheek then leads me over to the hearth so I can sit down and rest my leg which I am thankful for.
“So Percy how are things going at camp?” Hera asks.
“Not so great, how are things going with Typhoon?” I ask.
“Also not so great, if we don’t get Poseidon's help we will lose.” She tells me.
“I am talking with him and Triton is helping me we are trying to convince him that Triton can handle Atlantis, so he can come here and help.” I tell them and they agree that it is a good plan though they also know how stubborn their brother and uncle can be. We talk for a little longer. They thankfully aren’t asking about my leg and Artemis promises not to tell Thalia we then head our separate ways.

When I am back at the cabin there is loud banging on the door. Going to open the door I find Annabeth standing there looking worried.
“What’s wrong?” I ask.
“Nico took Eric and they disappeared.” Annabeth says and I instantly knew where they went. Assuring her that I will find them she walks to her cabin to get some sleep, meanwhile I walk to the fountain and throw in a coin.
“Fleecy do me a solid show me Hades, Underworld.” I say and a few seconds later it shows Hades sitting in his throne being talked to by Persephone about letting her go up and help. I clear my throat again and Hades looks happy to see me.
“Percy what can I do for you?” He asks almost pleading. Persephone then heads to her garden pouting.
“Uncle I need a way into the Underworld. I believe that Nico and Eric are planning to do something really stupid.” I tell him and in the next second a crack appears in the earth, I jump in and find myself in front of uncle. I thank him then limp to the River Styx as fast as I can to stop them. I get there just in time and stop Eric from jumping into the River Styx.
“Why would you agree to jump in there?” I ask them
“This is the only way that I will be able to defeat Luke.” Eric says and I had to agree with him on that. In that moment Achilles arrives to give us his warning but stops when he sees me there.
“What is a son of Chaos doing down here?” He asks.
“I’m here because Chaos enemies want to use my sister and I as tools for their plans.” I snap at him desperately wanting to get of the leg and sleep.
“You know the warning and price that goes with diving in the river?” Achilles asks.
“He sure does and he has the gift of his mother and I.” Chaos says popping up right behind Achilles who turns around and bows in respect.
“Then proceed.” Achilles says and disappears and so does Chaos. With that done both Eric and I turn towards the river.
“Don’t forget to get to have a mortal point.” Nico tells us and with that said we dive into the river. All I feel is a lot of pain but then imagine a line that goes to my arm pit and remember Thalia, Zoe and my parents and the next second I am again on the shore of the river coughing and having bright red skin. Nico comes up to me helps me up.
“That was quick.” Nico says
“Yah I remembered what I had to do.” I tell him.
“Did it work?” He asks. Instead of answering him I pull out a knife and tried to cut myself but the blade just harmlessly bounces off and check on my leg which is completely healed and instantly feels better. In that moment Eric is thrown out of the Styx and before he can even recover I take his arm and tried to cut it and the blade also bounced off. Satisfied by our journey I got up to leave when I hear a roar behind me and see Hades marching up to us in a very angry mood.
“Nico what were you thinking, you are grounded a year for this stunt.” He says.
“Thinking of a way to protect your favorite nephew and child of prophecy.” I tell him.
“That still doesn’t make up for this act. I’m also talking to Poseidon about what you just pulled here.” Hades says.
“We know but there was no other way we could avoid it. It had to be done.” I tell him and that seemed to calm him down a lot.
“I actually came to tell Percy that he is needed on Olympus.” Hades says with that we thank him and Nico shadow travels us to Olympus then back into the underworld to start his year of being grounded. Walking around Eric and I both notice that the streets are deserted and empty. Everything is covered up and boards over windows and doors. I told Eric to call Annabeth and get the campers to the empire state building and I contacted Thalia to get the hunt here. Stepping inside I find Hermes and Hestia by the fire and it seems that Hestia is comforting Hermes. When they hear the door open both of them look up to see me they both smiled well Hermes tried too anyway.
“It’s going to be okay Hermes.” I tell him.
“How do you know that.” He asks sniffling.
“He did it for a reason one that I will find out.” I tell him and he gives me a thankful nod. With that he stands up and gets ready to leave.
“Percy we really need your fathers help with Typhoon. Try and convince him and Athena says activate Plan 23.” Hermes says and I only sigh and am slightly confused by the second part.
“We are already on that.” I say and with that he flashes out back to the battle that is going on. I look up and Hestia gives me a warm smile that instantly brightens my mood. The moment is ruined by Eric coming in saying that the campers are here. I step out and see only the cabin councilors there waiting. I walk over to Annabeth and relay the massage about Plan 23 and her eyes instantly light up so I knew that she know what it means. Conner and Travis are looking over the edge when they came running telling us that something is wrong. All of us run to the edge to see the island of Manhattan being covered in blue-purple smoke and mortals sleeping on the streets. Annabeth recalls the line from the Prophecy and we knew that the battle has begun.

Chapter Text

Thalia's P.O.V

On our way to Manhattan from the Yellowstone we find no monsters that seemed to want to hunt us though when we arrive it all made sense. Every monster is walking towards the battle that is coming to decide the end of all. We slip past them and into the New York area, we stand in front of a wall of power and it’s a force field that will keep all the mortals out of Manhattan. Passing though the wall was easy finding Percy and the gang easier. He is doing a speech right now and sorting the camp houses into section to protect various bridges and tunnels. He is short one and that’s when we decided to come in.
“We will cover the Lincoln Tunnel.” I say and he smiles when he sees me. Everyone then goes off to their designated spots to meet the monster army. I go over to Percy and gave him a hug which he gladly returns. I see him looking at Zoe and smile at her blushing a little. These two are clearly in love with one another but they don’t want to admit it, even Lady Artemis knows and she is fine if those two ever hook up. She has known Percy for a long time and says that he is the only decent man that has ever existed and that he respects woman and girls. I gather up the girls and we make our way to the Lincoln Tunnel while Percy, Eric and Annabeth make their way to the rivers and activating statues on the way there which Percy explained to me in detail when Annabeth ran off to activate a statue and give in orders. I was slightly confused at first.

Percy's P.O.V

I’m so glad to see Thalia and the hunters again and that they are here to help. On our way there we stop by every statue in Manhattan and activated Plan 23 and told them to protect Manhattan. With that we drive on till we reach the Hudson and East river sections. We tell Annabeth to wait for us and with that Eric and I dive into the dirty rivers which give me goose bumps. It doesn’t take long for the spirits of the rivers to show up. They looked curious as to why two sons of Poseidon are in their rivers waiting to talk to them.
“What have you come here for?” Hudson asks us.
“We have come to ask you to stop the boats.” Eric tells them.
“Why should we do that?” East asks.
“I will tell our father that you helped us out and I will give you this.” I tell them and pull out a sand dollar that I had gotten for my 15th Birthday. The spirits eyes light up and they both come at me wanting the sand dollar for their side. I stop them and instead brake it in half and instantly fresh water seeps out cleaning the two rivers and the spirits love it and instantly agree to help. With our task done Eric and I swim back up to the shore where Annabeth is waiting with a not so good look on her face.
“What’s wrong?” Eric asks.
“Michael and the Apollo campers need help.” She says.
“Then you and Eric go and help them I’m going to go around and help other campers.” I tell them and with that we split up. While Eric and Annabeth go to the Williamsburg Bridge I go to the other tunnels and bridges to help out. On my way there I see countless statues fighting monsters and killing them. It looks really ironic and weird at the same time. I am almost to the Brooklyn Bridge when my phone rings and it’s a frantic Annabeth on the other side.
“We need your help Percy, the Williamsburg Bridge has the heaviest amount of monsters and Kronos is here.” She yells and I instantly mist travel to where they are. When I arrive I see the mess that is going on. The Apollo campers are losing badly and Annabeth has called them back to a school bus that is lying on its side. Eric is fighting of the monsters all by himself, when I see a monster sneaking up to him I summon my bow and let an arrow fly straight through the monsters eye, it instantly disintegrates.

In that moment the monsters part and forth comes Kronos riding on a horse. He smiles when he sees me and it’s not a good smile.
“Well if it isn’t the infamous Percy Jackson.” He says but he can get any further Eric interrupts him by saying something everyone already knows.
“You will never win Kronos, we are going to stop your army.” Eric tells him.
“Well isn’t this a confident camper.” Kronos says now turning his attention to him. One demigod from Kronos side sneaks up to him unseen aiming a blade to kill him, before I can do something to stop him Annabeth is there taking the knife for him. The shocked demigod pulls the blade back out and only then do I see the green glint on his dagger and know that poison is on it and in her wound. I quickly kill the demigod, meanwhile Eric is carrying Annabeth to one of the Apollo campers. On the distant horizon you can see the sun about to rise and it seems that Kronos and his army are retreating for the day but before they can get of this bridge, Eric rams his sword into the bridge and creates a huge earthquake. I hurried to get of the bridge before I ended up in the river but Michael Yew isn’t that lucky or fast. As the bridge crumbles and water shuts up he vanishes from sight and I instantly know what happened and so do the rest. Now that the monsters can’t cross the bridge we also walk back and see that we have set up shop in a hotel. Once inside a few Apollo campers take Annabeth away so they can care for here and in that moment Travis and Conner walk by.
“You two get some medicine for the wounded. I don’t care how you get them just do.” I tell them and they get an evil smile on their faces. Grabbing a few more Hermes campers they run off to who knows where. I wouldn’t normally allow it but this situation calls for it. Thalia comes up to me with a plate full of food and I gladly take it and begin to eat. I check her over to see that she only has a few scratches on her for which I am glad about. She then shakes her head at my antics. In that moment Zoe comes up and I swallow the food in my mouth. I quickly scan over Zoe to see that she also only has a few scratches on her.
“How many did you lose?” I ask her.
“We only lost one huntress, other than that no serious fatalities, just some minor injuries.” She tells me.
“That’s good to hear; we lost a good camper today. Michael Yew from the Apollo cabin, he fell in the river as Eric destroyed the bridge. I have 2 Apollo campers searching but I’m not hopeful.” I tell them and Thalia gives me a hug.

I smile at that, we talk for a little while more than separate to get some sleep before the next fight. I grab myself a key to a room then trudge to that room and fall asleep. I can feel myself beginning to dream which isn’t good. The next moment I'm standing in Persephone garden and find Nico and Bianca in front of me.
“How are things going with your father?” Nico asks me.
“Not good, he still refuses to help, how are things going with yours?” I ask him
“Also not good, he says he's busy and also wants more recognition.” Bianca answers.
“So it seems all three of us have father troubles.” I tell them and Bianca laughs while Nico only smiles at that sentence and I continue.
“Just keep trying you two and we will convince our parents.” I say and both of them nod their heads and the scene changes. I am now standing in Atlantis and watch the fighting that is going on. Poseidon is standing beside me and looks sadly at his empire.
“You should help the other fight Typhoon leave Triton to fight for Atlantis if your seat of power gets destroyed it won’t matter what happens to Atlantis and you can always rebuild Atlantis, but you can’t rebuild your power.” I tell him and he lets out a sigh.
“I can’t just let it all fall.” He says.
“I know that, but you also need to help your family?” I say and with that I feel myself leave because someone is waking me up.
“Percy, Percy wake up.” Thalia yells at me and I groan at her.
“What is it sis?” I ask.
“There is a titan here to negotiate a treaty and he wants to talk to Eric.” She tells me and with that I’m instantly awake.
“We are going to go with him to see what the titan wants.” I tell her and with that I stand up and together we walk to the main hall where Eric is already waiting. He is wearing his armor and under that his orange camp shirt. Meanwhile Thalia and I are wearing black clothes and combat boots. Together we walk to Central Park and meet the titan. We can see Prometheus coming from a mile away walking together with Ethan, an Empousa and, a Hyperborean Giant. We meet up at the playground where we sit at a bench and discuss why he has come.
“Olympus is destined to fall so why stand in the way, Kronos promised to show you leniency and let you live.” Prometheus says. Since Eric doesn’t know anything about politics that Chaos has so kindly taught us we answer for him.
“We don’t want to give in to Kronos commands, yes the gods have done things that seem wrong but they can fix them and they already are. Kronos will only do worse and that’s why we are going to stop him with any means possible.” I tell him.
“The army will fall by our hands and there is nothing you can do to stop it.” Eric says.
“Then let me give you something to remember our offer.” Prometheus says and reaches beside him. He pulls up a vase and I recognize it instantly. It’s the only object that is missing from Fathers collection and that is Pandora’s box.
“Where did you get that, it is not your property?” I ask him.
“That is non of your concern. In this box is the essence of hope, if you open the lid and release her we will know that you agreed to our terms of surrender.” Prometheus says and hands the vase to Eric and with that we leave. Once back at the hotel I take Pandora’s Box out of Eric’s hands and lock it up in the safe till I can bring it up to Olympus. Being still exhausted I walk back into my room and sleep.

In my dream I get a visit from Chaos and he doesn’t look happy. When he sees me though he smiles and looks
“What’s the matter dad?” I ask him.
“When the war ends I need you and your sister to come home and train for a bigger threat that is rising in the near future.” Dad says. At the news I am also not happy at the same time happy that we finally get return home.
“We will see what comes of the future and it will be great to spend time with you and mom and I’m sure Thalia will be happy too.” I tell him.
“I will be happy to return home for a year or so.” She says and stands right behind me.
“What about the hunters?” I ask.
“Artemis will have no problem with you coming home for a while and training plus learning all the royal stuff.” Dad says.
“We know most of them though since we have been the prince and princess of Olympus for 14 years now.” I tell him. Chaos just smiles at that and we laugh knowing exactly how much attention we pay whenever someone tries to teach us about royalty.

When I wake up I know that the battle isn’t going to be easy, just then Jake a son of Hephaestus barges in and tells me that there is a hoard of monsters down in Central Park and they are being led by the titan Hyperion. I quickly jump out of bed and get ready to fight a hard battle. With a gang of campers consisting of Satyrs, Hunters, Apollo campers and some others who were willing to come we head to Central Park. I tell the Hunters and Apollo campers to hide in the trees and take out any monsters from above, I tell the Satyrs to get the plants to grab the monsters and the rest to hide in the bushes left and right of the lake and I will take care of Hyperion. The titan sees me and smiles with that he steps in the lake and before I go and meet him head on, I give Thalia a look that says wait for my signal and she nods her head. I step on the lake and where I step the water freezes. I walk till I meet the Titan who is eager to kill me. Reading myself I wait for his attack and as he brings up his huge sword I catapult myself up with a wave and hear the Hunters horn that Thalia has sounded to begin the attack. Taken by surprise Hyperion staggers back but too quickly regains his stands and swings around his sword trying to cut me. I know that he has a nasty habit of lighting himself up with light and I knew that it will suck to look into that light so the only advantage I have is the water that will douse the light. When he is about to light himself up in his fiery aura I summon a mini Fluctus and douse his light every time he tries it. I slash and hack, landing as many blows as I can. The titan is furious with me and keeps swatting me away with his huge sword but I quickly find out that I’m too fast for him and feel myself flickering in and out at different areas of his body.
“What are you doing Percy?” Thalia asks me through our telepathy.
“Don’t know but it seems that I have the power of teleportation.” I tell her.
“I’m so jealous.” She says and I just laugh at that and continue fighting, soon enough though I feel my energy depleting. That’s when I notice Grover waving at me with his read pipes and the Satyrs that are standing in an area. I begin pushing Hyperion towards the shore which he doesn’t notice since he is so busy trying to stop me. As soon as he hits land, he begins to turn into a tree.

The Satyrs are playing nature music that is turning him into an oak tree. Realizing to late what is happening to him he tries to brake free but is soon fully trapped. I disperse the Fluctus, and the hunters and campers take out the rest of the monsters.
“Everyone cheers but the cheers are soon drowned out by a loud squeal and the Clazmonian Sow descends on Manhattan wreaking havoc. I let out a loud sigh realizing that I can’t get a break and let out my famous taxi whistle summoning Blackjack to my side. I jump on him even before he lands and we chase after the sow. It flies over Manhattan destroying every building in its path. Knowing that it’s useless to fight it head on I think of a plan and see some non-activated statues standing around.
“Blackjack land by those statues.” I tell him.
“Kay boss, glad I’m not going to be kicked by the sow.” He says and lands by the statues. I hop of and activate plan 23, telling them to kill the sow and they happily do it. Not staying around to see what happens I quickly jump back to Blackjack and we fly towards the Empire state building where it seems the army has pushed the campers back to the doors. Looking around for Annabeth and Eric I find them quickly and realize that there is a Laistrygonian giant sneaking up behind them. It’s too late for them to dodge so naturally I jump of Blackjack pull out my twin swords and dive towards the giant, slicing him in two as I land in a crouched position and both Annabeth and Eric turn around to see what has happened. They only smile and shake their head at my dramatic entrance. I just give him my famous grin then spin around ready for the next monster to taste my swords. Instantly I meet the claws of an Empousa who thought she can kill me but I just grin at her and cut her in three.

This goes on for hours where it's just slash, hack, duck and avoid getting cut in pieces. There are just too many monsters for us to handle and when we are on our last energy we hear a horn sounding in the distance. I instantly look at Thalia but she just shakes her head at me then turning around I see Chiron and other Centaurs behind him coming to our aid. I let out a battle cry one last boost of energy and we fight till the sun rises and the monsters pull back. Not feeling in the mood to celebrate I take a look around and see many campers hurt or dead. I don’t want to know how many we lost, but no one seems to know where to go to set up a small infirmary, so in my commanding voice that Thalia always says I make an announcement.
“Take the once who have severe injuries inside the empire state buildings meeting rooms and treat them there, the once who have minor ones go in the foyer and get healed up.” I yell over the noise of confusing campers. Happy to do it the Apollo campers lead them into the rooms to heal them quickly.
“Chiron who are your friends?” Annabeth asks Chiron.
“They are my brothers the Party Ponies.” Chiron answers.
“We didn’t know you had brothers.” I tell him.
“I try to keep them away from everyone since they are the rowdy bunch love to drink beer, pull pranks and other unorthodox things.” He answers. We just laugh but my laugh turns into a yawn
“Percy you should get some rest too.” Chiron says coming up behind me.
“I’m fine Chiron.” I say but I do feel pretty tired and energy drained. Giving me one of his looks I know that arguing is pointless so I walk inside the empire state building to see a lot of injured campers. Before I can find some place to fall asleep Dionysus comes into my vision and I find myself in a party somewhere in a bar. Without giving me a chance to speak Dionysus explains that the situation is getting tougher and that the gods are losing the battle with Typhoon saying in the process that he and Hephaestus were injured and can’t continue fighting and that they need Poseidon’s help in defeating Typhoon, he also tells me to make sure that his son Pollux is save and with that I find myself back in the empire state building. Seeing Pollux sitting on a sofa I walk up to him.
“Why don’t you help with the wounded, ask Apollo campers how you can help.” I tell him he smiles grateful as if he is happy he doesn’t have to continue to fight. I find a quiet corner in the room that has a couch and fall asleep in it. In my dream I see Nico trying to convince his father to help out in the fight but Hades remains stubborn. I know that they can convince Hades so I have to convince Poseidon to help fight against Typhoon. The next scene I am in the enemy’s camp and see Luke who has been taken over by Kronos in a make shift throne talking to Ethan and Prometheus.
“You have failed to kill Percy Jackson, he is a great threat to us.” Kronos tells them.
“He is just a demigod, they can be defeated.” Prometheus says.
“Percy Jackson is no demigod and that’s not even his real last name. Percy is the son of Chaos and a dangerous enemy.” Kronos says and that shut up Prometheus.
“Release the Drakon on them, since it can only be killed by a child of Ares they don’t stand a chance.” Kronos says and with that I wake up and hurry to find the others.
“We have a huge problem.” I say and they look at me surprisingly.
“Kronos is sending a Drakon this way, but the problem is that it can only be killed by a child of Ares.” I tell them and their faces deflate.
“Where is Clarisse and her cabin?” Thalia asks coming up from behind.
“Because of an incident that involves a Chariot, Clarisse refuses to fight.” Annabeth explains. With that we get the campers ready and are grateful to the Apollo cabin because in just a few hours they have made everyone as good as new. Apparently someone had sent them extra supplies to treat the injured and a remedy that made everyone heal very quickly. I knew who it came from and so did Thalia so we both thanked Chaos about the help. Telling the campers that there will be a drakon attack that can only be defeated by an Ares child was left out of the conversation. Readying for battle we wait for the lines of monsters to come. At exactly sundown they appeared on the horizon line, marching towards us. Thalia and I along with the Apollo campers and Hunters and a few Party Ponies all had our bows drawn waiting for the monsters to get into range. It will only be a few more meters then they would be in range and as soon as they are we let our arrows fly and reloaded faster than possible just letting arrows fall down on them and it eliminated around half of the monsters army.

As soon as the monsters are upon us we switch to our blades and make our way towards the Drakon, we know that we can’t kill the monsters but we sure as hell can delay it till some sort of help arrives. We get on the Drakon and make slashes in between its armor but it still isn’t enough. We quickly find out that this particular Drakon can turn people to stone with its eyes and spew acid. We can do nothing against the acid but we can blind the monster. Making our way towards its eyes Thalia and I try to blind it, but it must have known our plan because it begins to shake its head trying to get us off. I hold on by plunging one of my swords into his armor but Thalia goes flying. Having enough of this annoying beast I make quick work of slashing its head to get it to turn gits eyes to me then blinding them by grabbing me dagger and making a quick x-mark on one eye. I jump down to protect Thalia before the Drakon can spew acid on her. I put up a force field in just the right moment and the acid goes around us. Thalia let out a sigh of relieve and slumps back to the ground. Looking around there is a lot of carnage and destruction plus the deaths of campers and centaurs. We then hear a horn coming from above looking up we see the whole Ares cabin coming towards us riding the chariots and it strangely gives everyone a little more strength and attacks with re-found force taking out all the monsters except for the Drakon which the head Chariot was heading for.I instantly knew that it isn’t Clarisse charging the Drakon because this person has the wrong aura, this person has the aura of an Aphrodite camper. Before I can yell at her to stop she charges towards the last good eye and when she blinds the monster wholly it let out a spew of acid that hit her right in the chest and her helmet fell of everyone gasped when they see Selina instead of Clarisse. Then we see the actual Clarisse running towards Selina and catching her before she hits the ground. We all run towards her and Clarisse is yelling at her while Selina is crying happy tears.
“I helped out, made the Ares campers realize that they needed to fight.” Selina says.
“You still didn’t need to pretend that you were me.” Clarisse says.
“I just wanted to make things right. Now I get to see Charlie again and know that I made a difference.” Selina says and with that she dies smiling. The rage Clarisse has in her is a lot so she takes her spear and with no armor charges at the Drakon, it having no chance, with Clarisse giving it only a few well-placed blows its dead. Clarisse hocks the Drakon to her Chariot and drags it around the building boasting to Kronos and yelling out challenges. Only then do we see the red aura surrounding Clarisse and know that her father is proud of her. Leaving Clarisse and telling one of her siblings to watch her we make our way into the empire state building only to find Grover leaning over a severely wounded Leneus. They talk for a little while longer before Leneus turns into a laurel. When Grover sees us he picks up the laurel and joins us. Annabeth, Eric, Grover and I ride up the elevator listening to really bad music.

Once we reach Olympus, Grover goes to the garden to plant Leneus while we make our way towards the throne room. Upon entering we find Hestia tending the flames and that is when I realize that she is the last Olympian to guard and the last line of defense. I smile at her and walk over. I summon the vase where hope is in and give it to Hestia who looks at me confused.
“I realize that the only place that hope belongs is in at home in the hearth.” I tell her and she smiles accepting the grateful gift. Then I walk over to my dad’s throne determined to finally convince him he needs to get over his pride and help his brother. Annabeth and Eric call me crazy for doing it but I am determined to I ask him to help. Once I am seated in the throne it feels like I can control the whole ocean and more. Then I hear a booming sound in my mind that almost destroys my eardrums and a few seconds later Poseidon appears ready to blast the person who dares sit on his throne but in the last minute he sees me and relaxes.
“Percy what are you doing I could have killed you.” He says.
“Sorry dad but I had to get your attention. Listen your family needs your help, I know you don’t want Atlantis to get destroyed but you can rebuild. But if you are dead because Kronos ripped apart your source of power it won’t matter.” I tell him and now he seems to see sense it what I tell him.
“Fine Percy I will do that.” He says getting ready to leave.
“One more thing dad let Tyson help he is sick of being stuck in the forges.” I say and with a nod he leaves. I jump of the throne satisfied with the outcome and in that moment Thalia comes running in.
“You might want to get down, Kronos made it to the doors of the State building.” She says and we run to the elevator and down to the main lobby and out the door only to see Kronos standing a few feet away. His army behind him looking ready to kill anyone that comes in the way of their grand plan. Just then the ground begins to shake and a big crack opens up in the earth and out comes Uncle Hades with Persephone, Demeter Bianca, and Nico plus a lot of undead soldiers.
“I knew that one of my sons would see reason. Welcome to my side” Kronos says.
“Sorry to disappoint you father but I’m here to stop you. Even though my brothers sometimes treat me unfairly there is still no reason to turn my back on my actual family.” Hades says. Looking at Kronos he doesn’t seem to like that answer. He is getting impatient since all of a sudden there is this big tremble and the barrier shrinks until it only surrounds the Empire state building. That is also when all of Manhattan seems to wake up which will make our jobs even harder. Nico tries to attack Kronos but can’t get to us since the barrier stops him. That is when the monster army attacks and Hades army jumps into action. The vanguard of Kronos army attacks us while Kronos and Ethan go up to Olympus. Quickly taking care of the guards we then hurry up to Olympus to discover that Kronos is already in the throne room wreaking destruction. The path to Olympus already disappearing so we run towards the throne room but when we are almost there a tremble sends a few statues falling and one almost lands on Annabeth if Thalia hadn’t pushed her out of the way and the statue of Hera lands on her leg. We try to get it off but it’s no use and she urges us to go on. Once we enter the throne room we see Kronos tearing down the room brick by brick. Ethan realizes that we are there and yells out and Kronos turns around with a smile on his face.
“So nice to see you here Percy, have you come to join our side?” Kronos asks.
“Not in your wildest dreams I will never betray my family.” I tell him.
“What do the gods have to offer you? I can give you glory and much more.” He says
“You think that you can offer me what my birthfather hasn’t already given me. Your just a second rate loser. So I’m not interested.” I tell him. With that he gets angry and sends Ethan after me while he continues to take apart the throne room. Ethan is coming at me with an incredible speed that can only be described as rage. I easily block all his attacks and talk to him about coming back and not betray all of his comrades. He isn’t listing and instead talks about how his mom never let him know who she was and how he found out by Luke telling him and that he is sick of all the denial that the gods do. I tell him that they are trying to change their ways and that there are just to many kids to keep track of and that they also have the duty to fulfill to keep order around the world. That seems to make Ethan realize that they aren’t corrupted but that Kronos is. Turning in a blind rage he goes to attack Kronos only to be stopped in time and sent down to earth by Kronos opening a whole in the floor below him. I know that it’s too late to do anything but I still throw one of my swords at Kronos who blocks it easily and freezes us all into place.
“Why don’t we look at how the mighty Olympians are doing against Typhon?” Kronos
says as he makes a huge screen appear and you can see what is going on. By now Typhon has reached the Hudson River but the gods aren’t slowing down one bit by the looks of it they are putting in everything that they got. You can see lightning going every now and then which means Zeus and the moon chariot razing along with Apollo. Kronos can probably smell his factory but I know otherwise. Then out of the ocean comes Poseidon with an army of Cyclopes and all the gods attack with renowned strength. Poseidon wills the ocean and Typhon loses his balance falling into a portal that leads straight to Tartarus. The look on Kronos face is really funny, what a nice take of events so he destroys the vision in anger.
“You don’t have to do this Luke there is another way that this can be done.” Annabeth says. At that she gets slammed by a force that sends her crashing into the wall where she crumbles. With Kronos spell broken I try to run to her but don’t get to far. As Kronos now slams into me and sends me flying reversing the flow of time to undo the Achilles curse and I can feel my left leg braking in half and I scream in pain. Eric instantly runs to me but I only motion for him to get to where Annabeth is and help her.
“Did you forget your promise that you made Luke about us being family, to protect each other and to never hurt each other?” Annabeth yells. At that I see Kronos stagger and know that Luke is trying to regain the control. Just then Eric comes to defend Annabeth and Kronos regains control making Eric loses his sword but Luke was still in there fighting. I tried to get up but to no avail. I leaned against Hera’s throne in no condition to get up, my right leg bent at a wrong angle.
“Eric to defeat me I have to kill myself otherwise Kronos will take over again.” Luke says. Not wanting to believe him he picks up Annabeth's dagger but hesitates.
“Give it to him quick. Before Kronos regains control and we are screwed.” I say in between pants trying to block out the pain. Eric looks to me leaning against Hera’s throne, then back. With a sigh he hands the dagger to Luke who plunges it into the sma of his back. Instantly the essence of Kronos leaves him and Luke falls to the ground screaming out in pain. Annabeth who has regained some of her strength, runs over to him and holds him while he dies.
“I’m sorry Annie, I let my anger to the gods cloud what really matters.” Luke says while he dies. That is when the Olympians burst in to find the scene in front of them. They see that Kronos is dead at the hands of the host himself and Annabeth cradling him while she cries saying sorry over and over again. They put away their weapons and Hermes runs to his dead son’s body, Thalia walks in with a limp and sees me leaning against Hera's throne, she instantly runs over and calls Apollo who looks at me and instantly comes over.
“This is going to hurt Percy.” He says.
“Will you just do it already.” I snap at him. He mutters a few words in ancient Greek and my leg pops back into place and I let out a scream and a few curse words.
“It will still take a while to fully heal even with Ambrosia and Nectar and my healing magic can only do so much.” Apollo says and I smile at him in thanks. Thalia helps me up and I limp towards where Luke is being transported out by the Fates. We watch his body disappear with sad faces. Poseidon then comes over and gives me a hug and so does Zeus. They both fuss over my leg but I just shrug them off and tell them to fix the throne room. With a wave of Zeus hands the throne room is fixed and every god takes a seat shrinking down to human size. The gods summon chairs for us demigods to sit on so that the injured don’t have to stand the whole time. Thalia helps me to our thrones and lets me down and I let out a sigh to be sitting and so is Thalia, then we feel a hand on our shoulders and look behind us to see dad standing there. He leans down and gives us both a kiss on the cheek. We missed Tysons reward but he looks happy and seems to be carrying a new stick around, Grover got a seat in the Gloven Council and the new title as God of the Wild, Annabeth got the title of official architect with the job of redesigning Olympus to which her mother is really proud, and all the people that died will get Elysium guaranteed by Hades who is already doing the paperwork. Then it is Thalia's and my turn of course both of us don’t stand up but stay in our thrones. Before Zeus can even say anything we do.
“I wish for all the minor gods to be recognized and build cabins at camp and also that you claim all your children by the age of 12 years and also that Hades and Hestia get there thrones back.” I tell them. Zeus grants my wish by swearing on the river Styx.
“I wish for freedom of my oath as a hunter.” Thalia says and at this Artemis is shocked.
“Why would you want that.” Artemis screams.
“Percy and I are going home for a year or two." Thalia says and everybody is shocked especially the ones who don’t know that we are the children of Chaos.
“Very well then Thalia you are here by freed from your oath.” Artemis says and Thalia thanks her.
“When will you be leaving?” Zeus asks.
“As soon as the meeting is done.” Chaos answers and everybody looks really confused by now because they think our home is on Olympus.
“I know you are confused by all this but Thalia and I aren’t children of Zeus and Poseidon we are the children of Chaos and we will be going to live with him for the next year or two.” Percy says and at that everyone seems sad and shocked. They all come up and give us a goodbye hug and the occasional kiss on the cheek. When Zoe comes up to me she is really sad since she will be staying to help out get more hunters and not return to Etnotopia so soon and so am I. Without any warning I grab her pull her in for a kiss on the lips not caring if Artemis blasts me any second and instead of pulling away Zoe only deepens the kiss. When we pull apart she smiles and I do too.
“Finally we were taking bets on when you would get together.” Thalia says and both Zoe and I smile a little. With that done we say our goodbyes then come the gods. A few have tears in their eyes and Hermes and Apollo will miss their pranking brother, Artemis threatens to castrate me if I mistreat Zoe in any way once I’m back and I promise to be nice. Hades will miss his favorite visitors and we will miss our Uncle, then come Zeus and Poseidon. Both of them give us kisses and hugs and tell us they will miss us for the 2 years. Once everyone is done we go to dad who opens a portal to our actual home. When we step through, we are on the same hill where Chaos told us that he was our dad. Also on the hill stands mom and when we see her we run towards her and hug her saying how much we missed her. Finally the Chaos family is reunited again and it feels amazing.

Chapter Text

Thalia's P.O.V

Once we go thru the portal we are amazed on what the other side holds. We have been here before in our dreams but didn’t quite pay attention to our surroundings. Right now we are standing in front of a black and white castle that is shining in the sun light. The town before us is of similar finish. It’s mostly white with black roofs and a lot of green forests and mountains all around us. There are even mountains in the distance.
“The first order of business is to reintroduce you to your subjects and fellow court members. You are both 16 years old which means here you are of age and will have to do your royal duties but also be the commanders of my army.” Chaos says.
“Wow Chaos don’t you think that you should let our children get comfortable first, have a little fun and learn a few thinks before you throw them into the fire.” Mom says behind dad and his face turns a really deep shade of red.
“No hunny, I was just telling them what I had planned.” Dad says.
“That didn’t sound like it dad.” Percy says and I laugh at dad’s reaction. With that done we enter the castle and mom shows us to our rooms. They are right across from each other and when you open the door they look just like our rooms on Olympus just more grand with a bigger closet, bathroom and extra add-ons like game room, armory, training room and even a connected swimming pool that both our doors access. We are both amazed and slightly terrified at our royal outfits since we already have the ones that we are on Olympus.

When I walk into my closet I find training outfits and armor that are all silver and red on one side and various royal outfits on the other side that are light blue, silver, white and black, 10 different crowns and different accessories. I know that we aren’t going to wear all of them but with our royal duty’s we have no other choice. I went to check on Percy to see how he is doing and once I enter his room he’s also standing in his closet. All his clothes are all black and blue with battle armor and even assassin outfits on one side and the other side has silver, blue, black and gold royal outfits for suits. There are also different crowns but no jewelry like I have. He doesn’t look happy about the crowns but that is nothing new. There is a knock on the door and we go out to see who it is, a messenger stands outside the door probably with a message.
“Chaos requests your presence in the throne room. You should also dress in the manner of prince and princess.” He tells us, we nod our heads in understanding so with that he leaves and we get dressed. I go to my closet and pick out a simple silver- white dress with silver flats and my Olympus tiara. I walk into the hall only to find Percy already dressed in a silver and black suit with a black cape flowing behind him, black shoes, his two swords on his belt and his crown on top his messy hair. Ready to go we walk to the throne room not ready for who we are about to see.

Percy’s P.O.V
As we enter the throne room we find the Primordial council in front of us. Not just mom and dad but also people like Tartarus, Nyx, Gaia and a whole bunch of other people. It is a little intimidating when you stand in front of a crowd that isn’t exactly more powerful but way more experienced. They scan us up and down trying to see if we are any threat to them but I am scanning them too. It’s one of my new cool powers that show me how ones defense and offence is even when they are not in a fighting stance. Most of them are relaxed and only a few ready to pounce should anything happen. I just let out one of my famous smirks and Chaos only smiles.
“These are my long lost kids and your younger siblings.” Chaos tells the council.
“Hey Tartarus how is it going?” I ask him.
“Just fine, you know living the life and maybe causing a little trouble.” I tell him.
“Percy how do you know Tartarus?” Chaos asks me.
“When I was at Uncle Hades in the Underworld he came to visit and we hit it of greatly. Of course before knowing that, I am his younger brother.” I tell dad and with that the topic is dropped and we turn to a more important issue.
“I called you here so that you can get the rest of your birthright powers. In order to control them properly you will go through months of training with each primordial. It is a long and hard process to control them all and you may find a few surprises along the way.” Chaos tells us.
“So when will we get our powers and begin training?” Thalia asks.
“Right now.” Is all Chaos says before he shots a black beam of light at us and we feel excruciating pain and at the same time we are teleported to the training arena where Tartarus and Nyx are waiting for us. Once the pain finally stops we are eager to find out what powers we can truly wield.

We train daily with Tartarus and Nyx on our powers and weapons and both of us improve greatly, I am now a deadly tornado with both my swords being exceeding at duel wielding. Thalia can shoot someone with her eyes closed and never miss. We have etiquette and manners lessons with mother and Gaia, which I hate so much that I skip most of them to battle in the training room. After our lessons are both over we have to attend various meetings with Chaos and the royal council. Thalia has already made it clear she doesn’t want to be the heir of Chaos even if she is ten minutes older than me, so that position falls to me. It just gives me a bunch more work which I hate. I have to attend meetings, visit town people and of course listen to people complain and meet other royal families from various planets. The only time I have to work off all the frustration is during training where I hack the dummies apart and even scare Tartarus with the look that I give the dummies and quickly vanish before I turn on him.

I know today is going to be another hectic day because we will be going from store to store and check in with all town people, then do a public meeting in the town square where the residents of Etnotopia can meet Thalia and I. Even though we have only been here for 2 months there are still a lot of people who haven’t met us yet. Thalia and I don’t really want to go but mother talked to us and we agreed to do it. She knows that both of us don’t like it so it takes a bit of negotiating and convincing before we agreed. Right now I am in the arena sparring with Aether and Tartarus all of us not gaining the upper hand while Thalia and Nyx are shooting arrows at various targets where the level increases every few minutes when someone teleports in.
“Your majesties it is time to change.” Our butler Simon says, with that announcement we teleport out of the gym and into our rooms. The palace is too big to walk through and after a few turns you get lost so it’s just easier for us to teleport between our room, the training area, stables, throne room, library, and sometimes the kitchen when it’s time for a midnight snack where we even meet dad sometimes.

Anyways we shower, get dressed in our royal outfits and meet dad at the gates where we ride our horses into town since the carriage is far too inconvenient for us.
“How did training go?” Father asks.
“Good, Nyx and Tartarus are very pleased with how we have progressed and that with another week or so we will have mastered our powers.” Thalia says.
“That’s good to here, how about the etiquette training?” He asks.
“For me it has gone well, but Percy here only shows up one day a week instead of three days a week.” Thalia tattle tails.
“Why is that Percy?” Dad asks.
“Those lessons are so boring, I would rather spend that time with Aether and Erebus and do some other stuff.” I say
“All you three do is pull pranks on the others.” Thalia sates.
“That is no not true we also train with each other.” I say and dad just laughs at our antics. Soon enough we reach town and do a little shopping as Thalia states it, she might hate being labeled as a girly girl but she still loves to go shopping. We tease her about it all the time but she just states that shopping isn’t a girly girl thing and can be done by anyone. Dad and I feel sorry for the guards who came with us because they had to carry all of Thalia’s shopping bags. In every shop we go into we introduce ourselves and they are happy to meet their future king. I was a little embarrassed by it but soon got used to them bowing. After the introductions are done Thalia begins her shopping and the shop keepers are always happy to help her find stuff she either doesn’t need or want. After the tenth store we finally pull Thalia away from the shop and we make our way towards the town square, where a meet and great will be held. A stage is already set up with three thrones on it. I have gotten used to the prince thing but still hate wearing my crown. Today I am just wearing a simple gold crown that has waves going around it and some designs to it, Thalia is wearing a gold tiara with red ruby’s placed in the middle of each leave. She got used to wearing them and wears one when asked. With that we wear our normal formal attire for me it’s a black suit with a black cape and my swords. Thalia wears a knee high red dress today with a loose skirt so it will be easy for her to ride. Once we reach the stage we get of our horses and hand the reigns to one of the guards standing nearby. The three of us then proceed to address the crows and it’s a long process to meet every single citizen but after 2½ hours we are finally done.

After the meeting Thalia and I decide to go for a little ride and explore a little. Of course we can’t go anywhere without guards following us. We spur on our horses and make a break for it while dad is busy talking with someone. The guards follow us but with some quick maneuvering and using some back allays we outrun them, we know the consequences of our actions will result in a little punishment but we need some time alone where it’s just the two of us again without the protocol around. Our nature is to be free and not be caged and follow rule that’s not who we are.
“These past 2 months have been quite interesting.” I tell her.
“Yah I know it is a lot of fun but I miss our friends back on earth.” Thalia says.
“They are really fun to hang out with, mostly because earth has a sense of normalcy about it and so do they.” I say.
“Normalcy like monsters hunting us and evil family members killing them sure normalcy fits in that description.” Thalia says laughing.
“Yah I guess you’re right.” I say and with that we arrive at a place that I found when I skipped all those etiquette lessons and wasn’t spending them pranking. It is a lagoon with crystal clear water, a small waterfall leading into a cave filled with light crystals that light up a cave full of flowers, and nature with a few animals inside. I knew that Thalia will love it. We stop our horses, get off, and tie them to a tree.
“What is this place Percy?” She asks.
“I found it while I was skipping all those etiquette classes.” I say while getting undressed till I am only in my swim trunks, that I put on before we left. I put my clothes over my saddle, fastened my swords to the straps and place my crown under my clothes. Thalia also gets undressed and I hand her, her bikini that I packed before we left. She thanks me and quickly changes behind her horse.

I dive into the cool and refreshing water and all the fish around me swim in delight. Thalia soon dives in after me also enjoying the coolness of the water and a break from the hot heat these past few days. We swim around for a little bit then I show her the cave. I dive under the waterfall motioning for Thalia to follow me. Once we surface she is in awe at what is hidden behind the waterfall.
“How much time did you spend here?” She asks.
“A lot of time, probably more than me hanging out with Aether and Erebus. I practice my powers of creation and the elements here and I also come here to escape all the crazy royal stuff that we have to learn. It was so much easier just being on Olympus, minimal responsibilities and other stuff.” I tell her.
“Yah you’re right sometimes it does get a little out of hand and I also sneak out of the house to hunt around the wood.” Thalia says.
“So we both hate all the responsibility that we both have.” I tell her.
“Yah I guess we do.” Thalia says and with that we hang out in the cave for a while more before we decide to head back home. We change into our clothes although I leave of my shirt then we slowly ride back to the palace, to face our punishment. We near the stables where mom and dad are already waiting for us. Both of us don’t say anything and pretty much just lead our horses into the stables, get off and give them to a stable boy so he can unsaddle them.

Normally we will do that but our parents are waiting for us outside. Mom looks at us with a worried expression but I can’t deceiver dads.
“You two are in so much trouble, first you ride off too who knows where, secondly you lose your guards and thirdly you return at sunset. Do you have any idea what trouble you could have been in?” Dad yells.
“Sorry but sometimes we just need a little time to ourselves away from the castle without spying eyes and away from the duty that is required of us.” Thalia says. With that statement mom and dad were taken aback but we use that time to teleport to our rooms so we can get cleaned up and have a nice shower. After we clean up both us of teleport to the kitchen since we miss supper and we are both very hungry. Sneaking into the kitchen is always so easy because after 8pm no one is in their anymore and right now its 9pm so we are in the clear. The only person we don’t expect to be in the kitchen is dad. He also looks at us in surprise.
“Don’t tell your mother about this, she is already pestering me about watching my weight.” He says and all we do is smile.
“Your secret is safe with us.” Thalia says as she is making a sandwich.
“Do you often run away for a few hours just to have a normal day?” Dad asks.
“We once sneaked out of Olympus to go to the cinema and watch a movie. Of course Hermes caught us but ended up joining in so did Apollo. All of us got in trouble with Zeus the next day.” I tell him and laugh at the memory. After a few more conversations we all go to bed with dad promising us to give us some more free time in the future. In the morning I get woken up by someone shacking me. When I open my one eye, I see Simon standing above me.
“Master Perseus you have to get up and dressed quickly, news have arrived that an emergency meeting is being held and all have to attend.” Simon says.
“I will get up and get dressed, then report to the throne room.” I say and Simon leaves me in peace. I look at the clock and see that it’s 6am in the morning an ungodly hour to hold a meeting. None the less I get up and stumble into the bathroom, I have a nice warm shower and feel a little better.

I then get dressed in my royal uniform put on my crown and teleport outside the throne room while also summoning a coffee into my hand. Thalia is already waiting for me and she laughs at the coffee in my hand but I just summon her one as well. The guards instantly open the door for us and we walk in. In front of me is the whole primordial council in there human forms already discussing some royal matter. As the door opens they are all quiet as I walk in.
“It is way too early to have a meeting.” I say and sit in my throne letting out a loud yawn and taking a sip of my extra strong coffee. Thalia sits down beside me not really happy to be here either. I hear a few of them laugh; I look around and see that Gaia is missing which is weird. After a few minutes the talking continues about this and that. I keep looking at her throne waiting for her to show up but she doesn’t, then I hear Chaos asks if anyone has anything else to add.
“Chaos where is Gaia?” I ask and there is instant silence in the room.
“She has threatened to rise and take over the earth along with the giants.” Chaos finally says and it instantly darkens in the room. Everyone looks at Nyx but she just shakes her head then they looks at me and see the dark aura surrounding me which tells them that I am beyond mad. Thalia puts her hand on mine and I calm down a bit.
“How dare she do such a thing to them!” I yell in frustration.
“Don’t worry son, I have already informed the Olympian council of the threat and they are taking the necessary precautions against her.” Chaos tells me. With that the meeting is dismissed and both of us go to the training room. Thalia heads to the shooting area and sets up her level while I walk to the sword area, press a few buttons and moving dummies come out. Chaos had set it up in a level formation with 1 being the easiest and 1000 being the hardest. My level right now is 203 and I keep improving and right now it keeps climbing because I am hacking and slashing at dummies either out of pure frustration or pure anger but I just need to destroy something. Soon someone clears their throat and pauses the level just as I am about to decapitate another dummy. I turn around and find Tartarus standing at the entrance.
“How about you fight me?” He asks and I just shrug my shoulders. He takes out his sword and I raise my two swords and he attacks. For a while I am only on defense but after a while Tartarus makes a huge mistake and I switch to offence and just let all my frustration and anger out of my body and let it loose.

I know that Tartarus just asked me to fight so I could let out my anger since he can take the power I am throwing at him by creating a gigantic force field and I am thankful for him because I soon lost myself in my power letting it all out. I don’t just fight with my swords but infuse my power into my fighting style making one sword cover with water the other with purple fire. My power level keeps developing on and on until I feel a stumble in my step and know my power is running on empty and Tartarus notices it too. So he eases of and I stop letting the rest of my powers move back into my body. As I look around I see the destruction that I have caused. The sword area is all but rubble and once Tartarus lets down the force field I can see that everyone is standing there impressed and scared at what I just demonstrated. I give them my signature smirk before all my energy leaves me entirely and I faint into blackness, only feeling the hit of the ground before I pass out.

Thalia’s P.O.V

As I watch the fight of Percy against Tartarus I am really impressed by Percy’s power. He manages to merge his powers and fighting style together which is really hard to do. I can tell by the look on Tartarus face that he is having a hard time containing the force field while battling an angry Percy. I called dad to help out and when he arrives he is shocked to say the least and instantly puts up a second shield to help Tartarus. This fight has been going on for 5 hours and Percy isn’t showing any signs of a drain out. A drain out is when your power well runs on empty and I think Percy is testing that theory. Chaos looks worried I can’t blame him. The news of Gaea must have really shaken him up and I can’t blame him. He got the fatal flaw of personal loyalty from Poseidon and if anyone threatens his family there is no telling what Percy will and will not do. As the 7th hour struck I saw a stumble in Percy’s attack and instantly know that his energy has run on empty and so does Chaos because he instantly weakens the shield around them until it disappears the same time that Percy stops fighting and just stands there giving us a look then his smirk. Then his eyes roll into the back of his head and he passes out. Tartarus doesn’t look that good either with a lot of scars covering him and also falls to the ground.

He just sits on the ground panting heavily trying to catch his breath. I instantly rush towards Percy and see that he has almost no wounds covering him and only that his energy is drained to the point where he is going to sleep till he recovers. Chaos comes over and we all are teleported to the infirmary where the doctors heal Tartarus’s wounds and check on Percy’s power. They tell us that he is going to sleep for some time now and can’t find anything else wrong with him. So instead of him staying here Chaos teleports him into his room, I can see the worry on his face so I come over and give him a hug to comfort dad. Both of us teleport out and I go to the dining room to eat some lunch, after that I go to visit Percy who is still asleep but his stomach was making protests and that means he is very hungry. I teleport back to the dining room grab some food and show up back in Percy’s room holding the plate of cake under his nose and he wakes up groaning in pain.
“Ow, my whole body hurts.” He complains.
“Your fault for fighting until your energy drained.” I tell him and give him the plate of food so he can eat it. He moves over groaning a bit but now I can sit with him.
“You know I dreamed that we are back on earth enjoying the company of our friends and annoying our dads. Boy is it confusing to have three fathers.” Percy says. I laugh at his statement and know what it means.
“Yah your right brother. Begin here for few months now means that 10 months have passed back at home and now with a new war rising all we want to do it be back home and help out our home, our camp.” I say.
“Yah that has been going through my head for a while now. I was going to ask father if we could go back and help out.” Percy says. The door opens and father walks in and both of us know that he was heard what we said.
“I know you two want to help your friends but right now you have to help out your people on this planet.” He says
“What if earth needs our help too?” I ask.
“I will watch over them and if they really need our help then I will send you.” Father says and with that leaves. Percy and I talk a bit more and soon enough I tell him to get some more sleep to which he protests but after a bit of convincing he goes to bed and I stay with him also falling asleep.

In the next few weeks we continue to train our powers and get older. Both of us are 17 right now and are more ripped than before. Percy may have an 8 pack and a tanned body beyond believe but is still as modest and sometimes as clueless as ever, he has now accepted the role of heir to the throne and goes to every meeting and function without complaining. I also have a tanned body beyond believe and a 6 pack, my body has filled out more and I look more like a woman and the spitting image of mom just younger. My role is just to be a princess and to be nice at different function mom throws like the fall ball that is coming up soon. While dad and Percy handle the political side to it, mom and I are doing the planning part of it. The next day everything was set up and we are both happy about that. The situation on earth is holding steady and apparently Hera had a plan of her own so that made us a bit more relaxed.

Percy had asked Chaos to get Zoe so they can spend some time together. Of course to make Percy a bit more happy Chaos agreed and now Zoe is here and released from her hunters vow and with a little creator magic dad also made Zoe the same age as Percy. She said it was weird not being thousands of years old. The two of us are like sisters now and Percy is at least a bit happier than he was before. I was getting ready for the fall ball and the guests would be arriving very soon. Right now both of us are getting dressed for the ball. My dress is a loose sunset orange with red and yellow leaves going up the side of the dress. For jewelry I’m wearing a golden tiara with leaves and flowers, golden earrings and matching golden bracelet and necklace. Zoe chooses a dress from my closet, it is a long gown dress with red leaves on the top placed in a lace way and the bottom is a light brown skirt that falls to the floor in waves. With it she wears red earrings, a silver necklace and a red and brown flower crown that is made from actual flowers. It suits her in a way that isn’t her usual hunter style and she looks great.

Once we are done we step out of my room to see Percy already in the hallway leaning against his door his eyes closed and looking like he is thinking. When he hears my door close he looks at both Zoe and I. When he scans over Zoe he stands up straight and tells her how great she looks to which she blushes a bit. Both of us look at his outfit to see him wearing brown pants with a red t-shirt his two swords at his side in brown sheaths and brown converse shoes. A royal band with loops sitting on top of his head, he looks like he really doesn’t want to attend.
“Where is your royal suit?” I ask him.
“Today I don’t care about that. It still a little royal but mostly modeled after the royal guards uniform.” He tells me.
“You will do great bro.” I tell him.
“Hope your right, you look royally by the way.” He says
“Why thank you, now let’s get this show on the road.” I say and with that we walk down the hall towards the ball room. Percy puts his one arm around Zoe’s and places the other on his sword and begins to play with it the whole walk there and looking like he is going to be sick. I don’t know why he is being so nervous, Zoe isn’t going to kill him and he knows it will just be another party like any other that we have thrown.
“Father says that after the party he will let us know if we can go back home. The situation has apparently taken a turn for the worst so he wants to send us back but he needs one more slip up of the gods till we can return. The first is apparently Zeus locking down Olympus and ignoring his kids.” He tells me and with that we enter the ball room and see mom doing the final preparation. When she sees us entering she gives me and Zoe a smile and when she sees Percy’s outfits her look turns into a scowl.
“Why are you wearing that?” Mom asks.
“I don’t want to wear the whole get up.” Percy says and walks over the buffet table with Zoe telling him to cheer up and that they should enjoy their time so that she can have a great time at the party
“Zoe is good for him, he needs someone that encourages him.” Mom tells me.
“Your right he has been happier ever since she got here.” I say looking at them.
“What’s wrong with your brother?” Mom asks on another note.
“Dad told him something that got into Percy’s head. He told him that we might go back to earth and I think Percy really wants to go.” I tell mom though she just shakes her head but no second later the first guest start to arrive and mom goes over to greet them while I join her.

The party is a huge success, with Percy and Zoe dancing a lot and he even cracked a smile after the first dance. Even I am enjoying it after a few rounds of punch which made me believe that Aether might have spiked it. Mom and Dad are dancing sometimes even if they aren’t making the rounds and introducing us to the other Nobles. I of course hate this but smile through it anyways and am jealous that Percy has an excuse to go back to his date. A few hours later I see both of them leaving and shake my head at this but I'm distracted by someone introducing themselves to me. Thankfully it’s getting late and with the party coming to a close the guests begin to leave. Dad left a while ago and I would say that he is passed out in his room after the epic party he had with a few other, kings, men, and guards, since they had stolen the punch bowl and a few other bottles. I didn’t believe that dad would ever drink so much but I guess alcohol does that to some people. On my way back to my room, I hear no noise coming from Percy’s room so I crack open the door to see him and Zoe sprawled on his bed intertwined and looking very peaceful. I smile at that and leave quietly, walk into my room, get rid of my dress and pass out on the bed.

The next day we have a family breakfast and Dad doesn’t look so good, I knew that he is suffering from the lovely effects of a hangover. Percy and Zoe are in their own little world with Zoe sitting on Percy’s lap. When I see this I smile at how happy he is with her being here.
“So dad are we getting sent to Earth or what?” I ask in an extra loud voice which makes him groan and Percy looks up instantly wanting to know the answer.
“Yes you are going back home, not only because of Gaia and her Giants but also because of a matter your mother and I have to attend on another planet, that I was made aware of last night.” Father says. Percy and I high five each other and finish our breakfast. After that we spent the whole day packing and organizing what we need. Plus Percy and Zoe get in some extra alone time, since they both know they won’t be getting any, anytime soon. Towards the evening all three of us are packing our things together and grabbing anything that we might need. The next day everything we meet in the throne room with some stuff packed and ready to go to Olympus. Father opens a portal and we step through.

Chapter Text

Percy’s P.O.V

When we step through the portal and into the Olympus throne room there is yelling all around us. The gods are all screaming at one another not really paying attention to what’s going on around them. We decide to just stand around and watch the fight going on. After another few minutes, Zoe pokes me and tells me that I should do something. So since is clear that they aren’t going to shut up on their own I clear my throat and all eyes turn towards me, instantly everyone starts to smile and Poseidon and Zeus come running towards us to give us a hug. After our dads hug us (wow its weird having three dads), Artemis goes over to Zoe and Thalia greets then. They go back to their thrones and are instantly looking anywhere but towards us, both Thalia and I now that something is wrong. Thalia must have also notice the strangeness that the gods are showing and decide to nudge me into saying something. I let out a sigh at her attempted to try and persuade me which actually kind of works.
“What’s up with you guys?” I ask them.
“Nothing at all why would you ask that?” Hermes tries to answer normally.
“Come one we have known you for a long time so spit it out.” Thalia says.
“Well since you are going to find out anyways when you get to camp I’ll just tell you. Since you know the romans already that saves us a long explanation but anyways we have switched the camp leaders, erased their memories and send them to the other camp so that they can act as a bridge.” Hera says and we look at her like she is crazy.
“Who did you switch?” I ask.
“We switched Eric on the Greek and Jason on the Roman side.” Zeus says and I let out a deep breath at which the gods instantly tense and Zoe puts her hand on my back in a comforting way. I know that this was the only choice that the gods can make but it isn’t right for them to take all of their memories.
“Fine, Thalia and I will join in any way we can without interfering too much in the plan.” I tell them and with that both of us walk out of the throne room and to our rooms to get changed into our camp clothes then head to camp and see what’s going on. Thalia had lent Zoe some of her old Hunter’s clothes and the three of us are a few minutes later standing in our old cabin ready to see what’s going on. As we open the door campers are running around outside yelling orders about a few chariots taking of soon. We run to the chariot track and see Annabeth getting on a chariot.
“Where are you going?” I ask her and when she turns around a smile is plastered on her face.
“How was Etnotopia? You guys were gone for only a year?” Annabeth asks.
“Well you know hanging out with dad and learning new powers can’t forget to mention the royal duties do get a little boring. Plus we learnt that a new war is coming and decided to help out. What’s going on here?” Thalia asks her.
“Eric vanished and I have been trying to find him when I got a lead last night and am now following it.” She says.
“We are coming with you then; you need all the help you can get.” I tell her and with that a second chariot is strapped onto two pegasis and we fly off. I kiss Zoe goodbye and tell her to hold down the fort to which she nods her head and tells me to be careful Thalia also comes up to me and says the same thing. I give both of them my signature smirk before I snap the reigns and the pegasis begin their run before finally taking off.

It takes a while until we reach the Grand Canyon and see trouble there. Some storm spirits are causing trouble but the demigods there are already handling the situation. When I see Hedge with them I let out a groan, he is my least favorite satyr of all, always making sure no one breaks the rules which I do constantly. There is one storm spirit left so I summon some lighting and vanquish it. Just then Hedge spots us and he lets out a string of words that I pretend not to hear, apparently something about being late but you can’t blame us we had whether problems. We land on the side of the canyon and Annabeth gets out very quickly and stalks to a guy with blond hair and blue eyes definitely the son of Jupiter. I see that he is only wearing one shoe and hide a laugh with a cough. Then Hedge comes walking over.
“Haven’t seen you around for a while Percy.” Hedge says.
“Yah I have been at home, training and doing other things. So what brings you around these parts?” I ask him.
“Doing my job, helping these three demigods out until they got in trouble.” He says and I only laugh, then I hear Annabeth yell at Jason.
“You know where he is, the Oracle told me ‘the guy with one shoe’ knows where he is.” She yells at him and I let out a sigh and get out of the chariot.
“Why don’t we take these three to camp and get things sorted out there!” I tell Annabeth and she lets out a huff but agrees. With that we load up the three demigods but Coach Hedge stays behind because of the other students.

The ride back goes somewhat smooth except for the storm spirits that come when we are close to camp and make us crash land in the lake. I quickly get everyone out and onto dry land. Immediately a swarm of campers comes running towards the beach and one of the demigods gets claimed. A flaming hammer is over the Latino kid with a very bad case of ADHD, he has black hair brown eyes and is 5’6”.
“All hail Leo Valdez son of Hephaestus.” Annabeth yells at that Will comes over to show Leo his cabin. He is the only kid of Hephaestus since Charles died which is a sore subject here and Cabin 9 will get a big surprise. Now the only two people left are this Jason guy and a girl that has Kaleidoscope eyes and brown hair after some silence and nobody really knowing what to do, I take Jason to the big house to see Chiron while Annabeth shows around Piper at least that what’s Annabeth tells me. On our way there I try to make conversation but he wasn’t having any of it.
“You know that this is a great camp you can do a lot of things.” I tell him, but Jason still doesn’t answer. We thankfully arrive at the big house and I leave him with Chiron. I stay on the porch and listen in to their conversation; it’s one of the cool new powers that I learned from chaos in the art of being an assassin and spying on people. It seems that Chiron is also having no luck with Jason until Chiron switches over to Latin that’s when they actually have a conversation. After a while the presence of a goddess arrives and I instantly know that it’s Hera, though she isn’t here in person and only in her corporeal form which means something has happened to her. She asks Jason for help and I see that Piper must of have experienced the same thing because she looks sick when Annabeth leads her over to get looked at by Chiron. I open the door for them and enter myself. Annabeth then tells Chiron that Piper temporarily possessed the Oracle and spoke some weird words. With that topic done we all head our different way with Annabeth leading Jason to the Hypnos cabin to try and recover his memories which I know is going to be impossible. Piper heads of too who knows where and just as I’m about to leave Chiron gives me a warning not to interfere.
“I don’t know what you mean Chiron.” I tell him and with that I head out to our cabin. On the way there I meet up again with Thalia and she looks like she had fun.
“What did you do?” I ask.
“Zoe and I were hanging out at the Archery range training some campers.” She says and I laugh at that knowing that they humiliated them.
“After that Zoe went to the hunters who are staying at camp right now.” She continues and I nod my head, knowing that she wants to spend time with her sisters.
“I met three new campers one is a son of Hephaestus, the other a daughter of Aphrodite and the other a son of Jupiter.” I say.
“That’s sounds stressful.” Thalia says and I agree. Once we reach our cabin Thalia heads to the kitchen to make herself some food while I head upstairs and to Olympus. When I switch the button and step through I’m instantly in our room on Olympus. Even though Zeus shut it down the normal way you can still get through our way. I change clothes into my formal attire with another ability I have and head to the throne room there loud yelling can be heard and had all the citizen of Olympus are in hiding afraid they might be punished. I increase my step and soon reach the throne room where I push open the door with some extra strength and it made a loud bang that instantly quieted the whole throne room.
“What is going on here!” I yell at them.
“Hera has been kidnapped.” Zeus says.
“So now you are blaming each other. I already know that, it is the reason that I came in the first place.” I say.
“How do you now about that?” Poseidon asks.
“She contacted Jason to come and find her which he is planning on doing.” I tell them.
“Make sure that you are following them and do everything in your power to help them succeed in getting my wife back.” Zeus says.
“Will do Uncle and you can all stop fighting since it is pointless to do so in the first place.” I say and with that take my leave. I slowly walk back and take a proper look around Olympus. There are still many buildings that are damaged from the battle with Kronos and all are getting rebuilt very slowly. Annabeth is doing a great job with it but it takes time to rebuild everything that was destroyed.

When I came back from Olympus, Thalia is waiting for me in our living room sitting on the couch and reading a book, while Zoe is lying on the other couch sharpening her knifes. I let myself fall very ungracefully beside her and let out a sigh.
“How did it go?” She asks me.
“They expect me to play along as an invisible player and make sure the quest members succeed in freeing Hera.” I say and change my clothes into something more comfortable which ends up being black sweatpants and a loose black shirt. Thalia gives me a knowing look but I just shrug it off. I move over to Zoe who scoots over for me and I lie down beside her, before pulling her half onto my chest and taking in her scent and playing with her hair. If I didn’t have Thalia and Zoe calming me down, I don’t know what I would do. For a while we just lie there and enjoy the relaxing moment which is soon canceled by the horn sounding that it’s time for dinner. I groan not wanting to get up but the girls insist so I have no other choice. Not bothering to change at all we make our way to the dining pavilion where the campers take their seats. I notice that Piper is sitting at the Aphrodite table so she must be her kid and Jason is sitting alone at Zeus’s table. Zoe goes over to the hunters table since they are leaving and I might send Zoe and Thalia with them just so I know they are save. After she leaves with a kiss, I nudge Thalia and motion towards Jason sitting all by himself. We smile a little at that and walk over to Chiron.
“So something happen while I was gone?” I ask Chiron.
“Yes Jason was given a quest to save Hera by the queen of the gods herself and later the oracle spoke the prophecy so Jason, Piper and Leo are going on the quest.” He says and I nod my head.
“How does the prophecy go exactly?” Thalia asks him.
“Child of lightning, beware the earth,
The giant’s revenge the seven shall birth.
The forge and dove shall break the cage,
And death unleash through Hera's rage.” Annabeth says walking up behind us.
“Great another mysterious riddle that no one will be able to solve beforehand and just go on a gut lead.” I say and Thalia begins to laugh.
“Don’t worry Percy, I gave Jason the hint of finding the wind god Boreas since he is the friendliest and from there on find Aeolus since he has taken Hera.” Annabeth says and I pinch the bridge of my nose.
“Great another feud of the gods that we have to solve. Well I have to play my part again so I will be gone again for a few weeks and return maybe for a few days.” I tell them.
“Why you gonna be gone Percy?” Chiron asks.
“It’s an order of Zeus himself so I can’t really defy because Chaos has also given me that task.” I say and with that I turn around and walk towards Jason who is looking at his drinking cup in curiosity.
“You just say what you want and it will fill itself.” I say as I sit down opposite of him.
“Are you a child of Zeus too?” He asks.
“No I’m not just wanted to make sure that you understood something call it a little warning. Hera is like a second mother to my sister and I should anything happen to her or you fail your quest to save her. You will find yourself in a world of pain like you can’t even imagine.” I say and with that stand up and walk out of the dining pavilion. I must have scared Jason a lot because when Thalia and Zoe come back she tell me that he told Chiron that I threatened him with a torture or even a death sentence. To which Chiron answered that you were just joking. I just laugh at that, put my arm around Zoe and go to bed since the quest will leave early in the morning for Canada to the wind god of the north Boreas.

In the morning I wake up still in the arms of Zoe who looks so peacefull that I don’t want to wake her up. Though I will have to so I gently shake her awake. Of course I get the famous death glare that you get when waking up a woman. I explain to her that I’ll be gone for a while and that once Thalia wakes up they should head out with the hunters. Have some bonding time again, but also so I know that my two favorite ladies are happy. She agrees and instantly goes back to sleep. I shake my head at that but get ready none the less. Once I exited the cabin I see a metallic dragon being ridden around by the Latino guy called Leo who is yelling at the top of his lungs for Jason and Piper to hurry up so that they can get going, of course with his actions he is waking up the whole camp. I use my powers to make all the mechanics in the dragon stop working and Leo goes flying into the lake and it’s instantly quite again. I smile at the picture in front of me but soon notice that Jason is staring at me. I just ignore him and turn to Thalia who just came out to investigate the noise. Thankfully Zoe didn’t wake because of it otherwise Leo would be dead right now.
“You used your power over mechanics to shut him up?” Thalia asks.
“Yah and it looked hilarious to see him flying into the lake.” I tell her and motion towards the lake where one wet Leo Valdez is just getting out of the water. Thalia smiles at the scene but turns serious again in a second.
“So what did Zeus ask you to do?” She asks
“To do whatever necessary to make sure the quest succeeds and brings back Hera.” I tell her and she just shakes her head.
“When are you going to where they are heading?” She asks.
“Well since they are flying to Quebec to Boreas penthouse I’ll teleport there just before or after lunch.” I tell her. She nods her head before heading back inside to get some more sleep. I head to the dining pavilion to get some food there I notice that Chiron and a few other campers are wishing the quest members good luck and all the other stuff.
“Those three are particular brats, especially Jadon Brace.” Mr. D says from beside me.
“You find all campers annoying, but yah Jason is a little big headed.” I say and with that sit down at the head table and eat some food. After I’m done eating I head of to the arena to do some sword training. I set up some dummies and begin hacking at them left and right just letting some energy go before heading out. I still have enough energy to kill a lot of monsters and that is what I most missed when we were home, no monsters to hack apart and kill. 30 minutes before lunch I clean up my mess and head for the cabin to have a shower before heading out. I dress in black jeans and a dark blue t-shirt with a galaxy design and a black leather jacket. I strap my two swords at my side and head out. Once I step out of the threshold of the cabin I teleported to the penthouse of Boreas where the quest members are just about to arrive. Calais and Zethes are standing guard and not even surprised by my arrival.
“Percy long time no see.” Calais says
“Yah man where have you been, you promised to come visit.” Zethes says
“Yah I know but there is a quest group incoming and I have orders from Zeus to help them succeed and that means I need to talk to your father.” I tell them and they nod in understanding and let me through to meet Boreas. As I step into his open air living room I’m blasted by cold winter air but deflect it with my powers. I smile because I know who sent the blast. Turning towards the couch I see Khione and Boreas sitting opposite each other having an argument with Khione lashing out her powers in frustration. Before I even say something I hear the roar of Festus coming from the entrance followed by shouts of the two brothers and know that I have limited time to talk to Boreas.
“Why don’t you two continue the argument later. Khione I need to talk with your father, why don’t you check out the demigods that just arrived.” I say and the two gods turn their heads to me.
“Ah Perseus what bring you here?” Boreas asks.
“I’m here on the orders of Zeus.” I tell him and with that Khione stands up and leaves knowing that the conversation is nothing for her.
“Aeolus is angry with the gods, you know full well that the quest members will not get past here.” He tells me.
“I’m fully aware of that fact, but there is a son of Zeus with them and you have to hear him out. He is also Roman so your other form might take over and he will realize in an instant that Hera has been kidnapped, so you need to send them in the right direction like say to the city of winds.” I tell him and he gives me a knowing smile and with that I teleport out in an instant sensing that Jason and Piper are about to enter the living room and get in a little trouble before they set of to Chicago.

Chapter Text

I head back to Olympus to report the crucial info that Boreas gave me on Aeolus. As usual the throne room is in an uproar and the gods are all arguing about something non important. Some gods say that they should open Olympus while the other half disagrees. Then there are some who don’t care and just sit in their thrones waiting for the discussion to end. I find it funny how they are fighting again even though I told them to stop doing so.
“Why are you always fighting when I come to here. It’s the same thing every single time.” I tell them and let out an annoyed huff. Zeus chooses to ignore that sentence and jumps right to business.
“So Percy did you complete your mission so far?” He asks.
“Yes, I helped them along on their path and they should now be heading towards Chicago but with Aeolus mad at you and taking it out on the demigods who knows how the wind conditions are with the dragon beast they are flying.” I tell them and Zeus goes into deep thinking at the mention of Aeolus. Meanwhile Hephaestus perks up at the mention of the dragon and I know something is up.

With the meeting seemingly dismissed all the gods exit the throne room except for a few and I follow Hephaestus to the park of remembered demigods and see him stop in front of a grave. I instantly know whose grave it is. It is Charlie’s grave and I stand quietly beside him not wanting to intrude.
“That dragon you talked about, it was Charlie who started making it with my help it was our father and son project but we never got it finished. I wonder though how Leo found bunker 9 when we hid it so well.” He tells me.
“I think Beckendorf would be proud to see it finally fly in the skies.” I tell him and he smiles at me.
“You always know what to say Percy and thank you for cheering me up. Now you should head back to help out the quest members I believe they ran into some troubles and are about to crash land in Detroit.” Hephaestus tells me and I give him a short bow before teleporting to Detroit where I see the dragon falling out of the sky’s with three people holding on and a son for Zeus trying and failing miserably to control the winds.

I try to soften their landing but it’s too late and they crash into a warehouse that is thankfully unused. Since I don’t know the layout of the place I don’t want to risk teleporting inside, then being spotted so the only other option is that it the old fashion way and sneak in through one of the windows on the upper levels. To get there though I do a little parkour and jump roof to roof till I reach a good spot where I can see the inside and outside of the warehouse. I sneak into the window unseen and without a sound. I look around and notice that Leo is outside tinkering on some disk while Jason and Piper are inside talking. I see movement from the corner of my eye and see three Cyclopes entering the building and sneaking up behind the two demigods. Leo is busy with his own problems but before I can do anything he finishes the disk that he has been playing with and rushes back inside to help his friends.

He quickly builds a remote control out of scrap parts and somehow connects it to a crane. Only the weird minds of Hephaestus kids can come up with something like that. I find it funny how much he resembles Charlie just in a tinier version and way more hyper. They crash the Cyclopes with the giant magnet that is attached at the end, but as they celebrate their victory I see the monsters starting to reform and know something is up with the gates of death, Thanatos, and I know the my next visit was going to be to Uncle Hades. For now I use the winds to keep the monsters from reforming and watch the quest members move on with the now unfrozen control disk. As they rise into the sky, I teleport myself to Uncle Hades. Arriving at the front gates I am come face to face with Alecto who instantly goes to inform Hades of my arrival. The only one in the throne room right now is Demeter who is eating a bowl of cereals and without a word she makes one magically form in front of me and I catch it before it hits the ground.

I’m all for eating cereal but sometimes it can just be a little too much so I teleport it to the only place I find funny and that is to Chaos office. In that moment Hades comes in and he smiles when he sees me.
“Percy what brings you here?” He asks.
“I’m wondering if you have seen Thanatos around and if the doors of death have been opened?” I ask him and I could tell that he hesitates but in that moment I get a telepathic message from Chaos that is very rude and he curses anything to do with cereals but I just smile and try to suppress a laugh. I can tell though that Alecto notices it but stays quiet.
“It’s a little hard to explain Percy.” Uncle says.
“Then explain it to me.” I say.
“For a while now monsters have been disappearing and I have looked into it only to find out that Thanatos has disappeared and there is no trace of him anywhere and I’m doing all I can to make sure the monsters stay down here and stay dead when a demigod kills a monster.” He says.
“Is there anything I can do to help?” I ask.
“Actually there is something you can do, here take these two stygian iron daggers and with them you can instantly banish any monster into my terrain where for the time being they can’t escape.” He says and hands me two really cool looking daggers. It’s a double edge blade completely black with a brown-blue leather cord handle and at the ends it has two black diamonds that I recognize from home and knew who made them.
“I will call them Alpha and Omega. These are the coolest daggers that I have ever seen. Thanks for the gift Unlce.” I say and he looks proud that I love his gift. I also mentally thank Chaos for the daggers then teleport myself to Chicago where I land in front of a sewer and hide before the demigods can see me. Their backs are turned to me and they venture deeper into the sewer.

Before I follow them I make two sheathes appear and fasten them to my belt on either side and stick the daggers into them. With all my weapons at the ready I quietly follow them deeper and deeper into the sewer and soon the smell gets unbearable. The quest members luckily stop and find an elevator in front of them that opens and they step inside. I wait until they get to the top then press the button to call the elevator again and wait for it. A few seconds later it opens and I step inside. Looking down at my boots I see that they are covered in sewer mud and curse at that because they were brand new. They change into a pair of balk combat boots and I instantly know who they came from. I thank Artemis and Aphrodite for it then the elevator doors open. When I arrive I instantly know where I am. This is the place where Medea lures unsuspecting demigods and makes them shop till they either drop dead or makes them fight each other till either the one or the other is dead. Medea usually loves to pretend to be the Princess of Colchis so that boys are even more interested in her. I quietly make my way around the place until I stumble upon Jason and Leo in the middle of fighting and Piper screaming at them to stop. They instantly freeze into place and Medea is really angry with her. I find it cool how she has the ability to Charmspeak, but boy am I thankful that I am immune to that.

I look around the plaza in which they are and see that Coach Hedge is trapped inside a cage trying to get out, it looks quite funny to say the least but I turn back when I hear a roar and see Medea release two Sun Dragons that Festus takes on by himself and actually succeeds in destroying. The trio uses the given distraction to free Hedge and once Festus swoops down to them they flee with a cage full of Venti and fly toward the fortress of Aeolus. I of course love the look on Medea’s face and use the moment to pull out one of the daggers that Hades gave me and plunge it into her heart, instantly transporting her to the flied dedicated by Hades for the monsters for the time being until the problem with Thanatos is fixed. I look around to make sure no one else is around then follow the trio.

It soon becomes clear that they have no idea where they are going. It’s pretty easy to find Aeolus you just have to use the Venti, not just because of the stream of air they are following but also if you look at the Venti closely they are leaning towards their master’s hideout. But the quest members aren’t paying any attention to that. Knowing that they will soon take a break I flick up my hood and teleport to camp to get some sleep. When I arrive the whole camp is already at supper but I don’t feel like joining them so I just walk to our cabin not even bothering to change I hit my pillow and instantly fall asleep. I am shaken awake by someone and slap them away trying to get more sleep, not even concerned with who it might be. In the next second I’m soaking wet and instantly shoot out of bed with my sword in hand ready to kill whoever dared to wake me up.

What I find is my sister standing there with a bucket in her hand. I look at her like she is made before I see someone else in the room too and that person is Artemis. I now know why Thalia I here and lower my sword to wait for an explanation.
“Lycaon and his pack have been hunting demigods to make them join Gaea, those who refuse and instantly killed.” Artemis explains.
“Then let’s go kill a werewolf. Just give me a minute to change and get dry.” I tell them and with that both females leave the room and I walk into my closet. I peel the now wet clothes of me and put them into the dryer, then pull out a pair of black camouflage pants, a new pair of black combat boots, and a grey muscle tank that shows my tattoo. I strap my sheath to my belt and put my two swords in them, I also attach my two daggers. With that I grab my leather jacket, and head out of the cabin to meet Thalia and Artemis. As I approach Thalia sees my outfit and shakes her head.
“You look like a drill sergeant Percy.” She states. I just shrug my shoulders not even caring about how I look. Artemis grabs my shoulder and we instantly teleport into the hunters camp. There I am met with weary hunters that look like they have been through a lot. Some are badly hurt and I summon some medical supplies since I see the hunters running out. Those who are attending the wounded give me a thankful nod but I don’t return it since my eyes are scanning for Zoe. Once I found her I see that she is perfectly fine and I let out a sigh. She soon sees us and come over looking at my outfit.
“Nice outfit Percy, you look ready to hunt.” Zoe comments and gives me a quick peck on the cheek that I return.
“Well that is exactly what I am here for.” I say, then Artemis rounds up the hunters that can still fight leaving the rest in her tent that both Artemis and I reinforce with a strong force field.

With that set up we head out to Lycaon’s last known location. It takes us a while but we finally find him at a series of mountain caves threatening a group of demigods and I recognize them as the quest members. Artemis motions for us to draw our weapons and wait for her signal to fire. I summon my bow and draw the string back and a silver arrow appears but I quickly infuse is with some Stygian Iron and wait for Artemis signal. Once she gives it we fire and Lycaon flees with his pack and half the hunt following and the other half staying behind mostly to make sure Piper is ok but she looks to be close to hypothermia. A few hunters set up a tent and lead her inside to get her new clothes and some warm food while the boys are getting glared at and Jason glaring at me. I give him my lazy smile then turn towards Artemis who is giving orders to some of her hunters. Jason then recognizes the god standing in front of him.
“Lady Diana what are you doing here and with a boy no less?” He asks her and Artemis flinches at being called her roman name.
“Can’t you see that she is in her Greek form you idiotic roman.” I yell at him.
“It’s alright Percy, no need to defend me now I am after all just passing through to kill Lycaon and nothing else.” She says and turns away from him and turns to a hunter who has just come with a report for her.
“Lycaon is heading to the Wolf house to where Lupa and her pack are.” Phoebe says and she orders the hunters to pack up and head out. Before they leave again I quickly give Zoe a kiss and tell her to be careful.

Of course she says that she’ll be fine but a boyfriend can still worry. With Piper all better now the hunters pack up their tents and head out towards the Wolf house. Before Artemis can leave Piper comes up to her and asks if she can help rescue her father from the giant Enceladus.
“Sorry dear but you must do that all on your own the best advice I can give you is to go to Mount Diablo to get your father.” Artemis says and Piper nods her head in sadness.
“Thalia, Percy, lead the quest members to Aeolus palace then head to the wolf house to help us secure it before Lycaon and his pack destroy it.” She adds and we nod our heads. With that the hunters leave and we head to Aeolus palace with Jason looking at my tattoo. I don’t know why he is looking at it that way but I don’t think anything of it and just continue to ignore him. Thalia and I lead the quest group to Aeolus floating palace and all that connects it is the ice bridge which as always is really cool. The quest members start to walk across the bridge with Thalia and I stay behind to talk about defeating the giant that is holding Pipers father without a gods help but the mind message from Chaos assured us that we can do it without a god. In the middle of our talking Leo gets excited about the really cool structure of it and wants to replicate it when he sets himself on fire and the bridge begins to melt. Jason yells to Leo to calm down, but he seems to have a little trouble with it. Piper quickly uses her charmspeak to calm him down and thankfully he soon stops to be on fire. With that done they quickly run across and just make it.

Now the quest members have to face Aeolus by themselves which is fine by both Thalia and I. We tell them that we will meet at Mount Diablo, to which they yell back okay and Piper yells to please rescue her dad before it’s too late. On the other side of the bridge we see Mellie waiting for them. She is the assistant of Aeolus and the one person that I have talked a lot to whenever delivering something that Zeus wants to tell her boss so she owes me a favor and I wink at her and she nods her head telling me she understands. I yell after Jason to give Aeolus the caged Venti as a gift to stop him from killing them, then the two of us teleport away. Thalia and I arrive on Etnotopia to get my new sword that has been in construction for a while. I commissioned it when dad and I were sparring and he said that I needed another sword to balance Riptide. When I arrive at the forge, dad is already waiting for me with a smile on his face.

He looks at my belt and I sigh knowing what he wants to see. I pull out on of my new daggers and give it to him which dad begins to examine for whatever reason. I let him be and go to the blacksmith who hands me the coolest sword I have ever seen. It has a pitch black blade that is Chaos Obsidian with silver veins running through it that is Chaos Steel; the handle has a silver leather band wrapped around it that gives a really good grip. At the end of the pommel sits a black stone with a red diamond pentagram. I touch the pentagon and it glows for a few seconds.
“If anyone else but you and Thalia touch that they will burn themselves. The blade with it being made out the combination of both Chaos Silver & Obsidian will also send someone to void, the instant you cut through them.” A voice tells me from behind and I whirl around with my sword raised about to slice that persons head off. He blocks it with the dagger and once I realize that its chaos I lower the sword and apologize for the sudden attack. Chaos gives me back my two daggers claiming that he did nothing to them but I can tell something changed. Dad then turns to Thalia and asks her to take out her bow. She instantly summons it and Chaos takes it from her. He mumbles something and the bow begins to glow. Once it has stopped he gives it back to her and Thalia pulls back the string revealing an obsidian black arrow.
“You just have to think about what arrow you want. You now have access to Chaos Silver & Obsidian, Celestic Bronze, and Stygian Iron.” He tells and Thalia gives him a hug as a thank you. I also thank dad for the new sword, before both of us teleport out I teleport to my room on Olympus where I take out Fluctus and put it on my bed, then put my new sword in Fluctus’s place at my hip.

I decide to name my new sword Reaper since it can send someone to the void. I then strap Riptide to the other hip and move Fluctus to my back, then teleport to Mount Diablo where Thalia teleported too and she is already waiting for me.
“You know, two swords would have been plenty.” Thalia says.
“I debated it, but three swords seem to be more appropriate during this time.” I tell her. “You become more like Tartarus and dad every day.” She says and I laugh at her but sometimes I thing she is right. Just as we are about to head inside to save Piper’s father a Taxi arrives and the quest members step out with Hedge on their heels and I frown when I see him but hedge doesn’t notice.
“Did you save my dad yet?” Piper asks.
“Sorry something came up. Dad required something of the both of us.” I say. Jason growls but Piper hits him over the head and gives me an understanding look.

All of us walk to the cave that sits almost at the top, to see that the Giant has Piper’s dad in chains against the wall. He is passed out right now and Piper begins to worry about his wellbeing. Our first order of buisness is to get her dad out of here before we battle the Giant. So Jason and Leo volunteer to distract Enceladus, the girls get Piper’s father, and Hedge volunteers to guard the entrance while I help out the boys. It’s pretty easy to distract the Giant and as soon as Piper and Thalia have her dad out and the Giant notices we begin to fight, as Hedge jumps into the battle Enceladus swings his fist and hits Hedge square in the chest knocking him out which I smile at and find it extremely funny. He then proceeds to summon Earthborn Giants whom I handle while Jason fights Enceladus and Leo tries to get of a construction crane that he has gotten himself onto in the first place for whatever reason. Sometimes I don’t understand that boy. Since Jason needs some help because he is still fighting Enceladus, I pull out reaper and begin to take care of the Earthborn Giants until all but one are left. I look over at Jason to see that his lance is destroyed and he seems to be praying to his father to give him extra power and at the same time I threaten Zeus that if he doesn’t answer him I will ignore him for a good 2 months which he doesn’t want, so he helps his son who is right now sitting in a crater and Enceladus is destroyed by a huge blast of lightning. We then run outside where Piper is just finished convincing her father who is called Tristan McLean, to call the family chopper to come pick us up.

After a once over to see if anyone is seriously hurt, the chopper comes and picks all of us up. He tells us to drop us of at Oakland Airport which we do. Once there we let Hedge and Mr. McLean off, but before he leaves, he yells at his daughter to explain why he got kidnapped. She promises him that all will be explained soon, but that it mostly has to do with her mother’s side of the family. Piper boards the chopper again and I take it into the air and we and head to the Wolf house. Just before we land a group of rogue Venti, come at us and they cause the air around us to come unsteady. I try to keep the chopper steady and tell Jason and Thalia to try and control the wind but with no luck. Seeing that I tell everyone to brace for impact and I try to land as soft as possible. We still crash land and once everyone gets out of the chopper before it blows up and we quickly join Artemis and her hunters. We fight the monsters that are around while Jason and Leo head inside. I make sure that the hunters can handle themselves which of course they can before I head inside the Wolf house as well.

When I head inside, I find Hera locked in a cage formed of earthen tendrils which is connected to the still unformed giant Porphyrin. I think of a way to get her out, then Leo volunteers to do that when I sense a snowy presence nearby and instantly know that Khione is behind all this. She is also on her way so while Jason heads back outside, Leo strays inside to make something that will get Hera out of her cage. When Khione appears I slip into the shadow so she doesn’t see me and begins to explain to the demigods and hunters that she manipulated Aeolus and Hera by simply changing her voice. When she is still in the middle of her stupid story the wolfs show up. They don’t have a lot of patience, since the snow queen asked them to wait. It didn’t sit well with Lycaon and he soon jumps to kill a Hunter. Then all hell breaks loose and everyone starts to fight. I summon my bow and from the shadow help out Piper with destroying some earthborn giants. Jason then gets a hold of a Venti and rides it around effectively incapacitating the wolves and what’s left of the earthborn giants. We then easily defeat the rest of the monsters and Khione flees from the battle though her punishment will come later I will make sure of that. Leo and Piper run back inside to free Hera and I help them with it. While Leo and I are sawing at the veins Piper charmspeaks to lull the Giant back to sleep but it doesn’t work. Porphyrin wakes up and Jason jumps in to fight him. I know instantly that the fight will be hopeless but we have almost Hera free when I throw away the saw which is getting us nowhere and fast. So I take out Reaper and slice through the vines like they are butter effectively shattering them and Hera rushes to help Jason, the only way she will do that is by assuming her divine from and I yell at everyone to turn around and evert their eyes which everyone but Piper does. It is to late but Jason manages to throw himself on top of her effectively shielding her. She kills the monsters in the area but Porphyrin manages to escape, then Jason has the stupid idea to look at Hera’s divine form and gets knocked unconscious and is close to dying but Piper charmspeak him back to life and to wake up. Hera congratulates us and sends the quest members back to camp while the hunters move out. Zoe comes over to me and we kiss and talk a bit. She tells me that she is going to stay with the hunters since she doesn’t want to hang around at camp while I am away on quests. I tell her that I’ll miss her a lot and with one last kiss, Hera, Thalia and I teleport to mount Olympus to tell Zeus that his wife back.

We land in the throne room to see no one there so Hera sends up a blast summoning the Olympic council. One by one they begin to arrive and all hug Hera and when Zeus finally arrives he hugs and kisses his wife so glad that she is back, then everyone takes their seats and Zeus turns to us. He smiles and congratulates us.
“Thank you Percy and Thalia for bringing back my wife in one piece and thank you Percy for helping the quest members.” Zeus says and we bow.
“It was nothing dad we gladly did it.” Thalia says and with that she leaves to get some sleep. Everyone else follows Thalia out until its only Zeus and I in the throne room.
“You didn’t mean what you threatened to do if I didn’t help Jason did you?” Zeus asks kind of scared.
“Sure I did, all you gods need to help your kids when they ask you for help and since you are the toughest of them all to convince for help so you needed a little push.” I tell him and he just laughs and I teleport to my bedroom on Olympus and fall asleep only wanting to return to camp tomorrow.

In the morning I take a nice long shower and return to camp at breakfast time. Once I walk into the dining pavilion there is a bit of a change in the Aphrodite cabin leadership that Piper has now been crowned the councilor. Thankfully not Drew anymore since she was terrible. After breakfast we have a cabin councilor meeting where we find out from Jason who regained his memory after the quest when Hera was kind enough to return it to him in a dream, that both Roman and Greek demigods exist but that they have been kept away from each other because of the big feud that the gods have with their other selves. After a lot of discussion it is decided to build a better version of the Argo 2 and fly to the roman camp to find Eric. Annabeth asks to come with on the search which Jason is fine with and so the building of the Argo 2 begins where Leo disappears at times and doesn’t show back up. Meanwhile I have the suspiciousness that Eric will need my help at the Roman camp so I meet with Chiron after the meeting and tell him my plan to go ahead and help smooth over the transition if Eric has any problems and Chiron agrees with the plan. I go back to the cabin quickly so no one sees me tell Thalia where I will be and heading to the Roman camp which will be a whole new experience.

Chapter Text

Percy’s P.O.V

On my way to the Roman camp I stumble upon the hunters and am happy to see them all, but I am mostly excited to see Zoe again. Even though it was only two weeks since I saw her last it feels like an eternity. Before I can get close to them though they start shooting arrows at me since I have my face covered by my hood and only after I take it off do the older hunters stop shooting. Of course that doesn’t stop the new recruits but they quickly lower their bows with a command from Zoe. I smile when I see her and walk up to her, giving her a hug, and she gives me a kiss on the cheek but I turn it into a kiss on the lips. Before it turns into a full blown make-out session we are interrupted by someone clearing their throat and as I turn around I find Artemis standing behind me. I give her a smile, but she only shakes her head.
“What brings you to us Percy, and where is Thalia I have been expecting her?” She asks choosing to ignore the kiss which I am thankful for.
“Thalia is on Olympus with dad still debating on why she should teach Jason some of his power. Also would you believe me if I said that I just stumbled upon your camp on my way to the Romans?” I question her.
“It would be a convincing answer if one of my hunters wasn’t your girlfriend and deeply in love with you.” She says and I just sigh giving up in defeat instead I pull Zoe in front of me and give her a back hug. The younger hunters can’t believe their ears at what they are hearing but choose to say quiet. Artemis has to yell at them to get back to doing their chores while Phoebe, Zoe, Artemis and I head into Artemis tent to talk about what’s next.

Artemis already knows that I am here on the orders of Zeus, since he ask me to do it so she was tasked with bringing me to the Roman camp which also means that she has to be her roman counterpart who she hates.
“You don’t have to escort me to camp, I can find it on my own and I’m sure that Zeus or Jupiter has already told Lupa about me coming and filling the position for Jason until his return.” I tell Artemis who goes deep into thought.
“What if my father forgot to tell the romans?” She asks.
“Then I will call Juno to verify my standings and other nonsense that the romans do, and if I have to fight to prove my worth then I will.” I tell her and she nods her head.
“What if someone sees your tattoo and discover that you are Chaos’s son?” Zoe pipes in still attached to my side.
“I will cover both the birthmark and tattoo with a strong mist so they can’t see it.” I tell
her giving her a peck on the nose.
“So you have everything covered in term of protecting the secret of the Greeks.” Zoe says and I nod my head and we begin to discuss further details. Since it was getting late I decide to stay with the hunters for the night then head out in the morning. Zoe of course sneaks me into her tent so that I can get freshened up and changed. At first I wanted to pitch my own tent but refused saying that she missed the person lying next to her when she sleeps. So I relent and tell her that I’ll stay with her. Once I am freshened up we join the hunters around the fire for some stories and other fun things, the whole time I am sitting beside Zoe and we are just enjoying each other’s company. As it got late the both of us head into Zoe’s tent and snuggle up on her cot. I hold her in my arms and with the comfort both of us fall into a deep sleep with no demigod dreams hounding out subconscious.

I had already told Zoe that I’m going to leave before sunrise which she protested against but I had to make it to camp before Eric arrived, which she understood. So in the early morning hours I wake up and quietly get ready. I summon a plate of Zoe’s favorite breakfast, leave her a note and kiss her forehead before sneaking out of camp. Once I was sure that I was a good distance away I speed up my pace and run the rest of the way to Camp Jupiter which surprisingly didn’t take me very long to reach. I found that the entrance is located at a wall where a door is and two demigods are guarding it 24/7 since camp Jupiter doesn’t have a force field like the Greeks have. As I approach the two demigods point there weapons at me and demand that I state my business. I tell that I am on an order from Jupiter to deliver a message to predator Reyna of the roman legionaries. At first they are very skeptical but after a little while they let me through and I went in. I made sure to not touch the little Tiber since it washes away any curse bestowed to a person. On the other side I begin my walk to that senate building where council was being held.

When I walk in I see Reyna discussing with each member of the 12th legion where Jason might be and sending out a small search party to find him and at that moment I step in.
“I wouldn’t advice that.” I say walking out of the shadows. Reyna jumps up in her seats and looks outrages.
“Who are you and how did you get in here?” She yells at me rising to her feet.
“I am Perseus Jackson messenger of the gods, and I got in through the front door.” I tell her and she instantly shuts up at that sentence.
“I thought Lord Mercury was the messenger.” Octavian asked.
“I am a demigod messenger here to watch and observe then report back to the gods about how this camp is run.” I tell them.
“If you are a demigod, then who is your parent?” Reyna asks.
“That is of no important matter right now.” I say and with that walk out of the senate building not ready to tell them about the demigod that is about to come and turn their camp upside down. I walk around camp until I stumble upon a really cool looking garden where Reyna is sitting with two dogs that I instantly recognize to be Aurum and Argentum. The two dogs are gold and silver and can tell when someone is lying to say that you should be careful around these dogs would be very high. Thankfully they don’t growl at me and behaved by staying at Reyna’s side. She seems surprised by it but doesn’t show it at all.

We talk for a little while and soon a camper runs up to Reyna to tell her that a new demigod just arrived in camp by the name of Eric. Both of us stand up and go to meet him by the little Tiber where he is carrying Juno through the river with it losing his Achilles curse. As soon as he puts Juno down on the other side she reveal the she is a goddess which makes all the campers bow down to her except for me. When Juno sees me she runs at me and gives me a big hug and a kiss on the cheek much to the surprise of the other campers and I mumble something about being embarrassed by my mother which no one other the Juno hears and she smiles at that then she turns her attention back to Eric.
“Camp Jupiter I introduce you too, Eric son of Neptune.” She says and as soon as she mentions the camp bursts into forms of whispers since Neptune isn’t such a liked god same with Minerva. With that Juno takes her leave but not before giving me another kiss, when Juno is finally gone I let out a sigh of relive at which Reyna looks at me funny but turns her attention back to Eric.
“We will discuss this matter in the Senate house, meet us there Eric in about an hour and everyone else go back to your activities. Percy come with me.” She tells everyone and they do what she says and I follow her leaving Eric with Hazel, Frank and Octavian. Since the first time that I briefly met Octavian I have a huge dislike for the guy and am just waiting for a chance to kill him. Once we enter the senate room she turns on me and demands that I tell her how Lady Juno likes me so much so I tell her that I am her adopted son which she strangely believes. After an hour is done Eric is being led into the senate room by Hazel and Frank so Reyna and I stop our discussion to let the hearing begin. With Octavian joining us, and Reyna summoning her dogs that begin to walk around the area while she begins to ask him questions, Octavian buts is every now and then asking his own questions. It is a boring meeting and in the end after Octavian consults his auguries they allow Eric to join the legion.
“Which Cohort are you going to take Eric?” I ask him.
“He can join the fifth cohort is he wants.” Franks says.
“Sure I will join your cohort.” Eric says so he joins Frank and Reyna says to everyone that the Roman war Games will commence in two hours to which everyone smiles. As soon as Reyna dismisses the cohort they run out in preparation.
“So Percy what will you do when the war games start, play referee with me or help defend or take down the fort?” Reyna asks me.
“I will play referee and since you might need help with some of the more war grazed campers.” I tell her and she smiles knowing exactly which legionaries I mean. As soon as we step out she summons her Pegasus Skippy while I let out my best taxicab whistle summoning Blackjack to my side and I knew instantly that Skippy and Blackjack will get along well. Reyna marvels at the beauty of Blackjack and I smile at her girlyness. We mount our rides and take off into the air and race towards the fort that is being finished.

Reyna gives me a quick explanation about what is about to go down and that the fifth cohort never wins ever since they lost the golden eagle and that it is a shame to the camp, also that the defending team gets an arsenal of weapons while the attacking team gets Hannibal, the war Elephant which gets my interest. She also tells me to watch out for the Mars, Mercury and Apollo cabins and make sure they don’t do anything that is illegal, which I can already tell will happen by the scheming upon their faces. As she finishes her explanation a horn sounds and with that the start of the war games. The first and second cohort sets up to defend while the rest gather on the field just beyond to get ready to attack. I instantly notice that Eric, Frank and Hazel have a different plan as they disappear into the ground and soon now that Hazel has used her Hades powers. I focus back on the game which has started and I watch the cohorts advance on the fort. Reyna and I blow whistles at campers who aren’t following the rules set in place and soon the real showdown begins as Eric blows up the water cannons making them unusable and making water flow inside the fort. I smile at the tactic to use those against the enemy. Once they are busy fighting the water they attack and I see Frank scale the wall and smoothly drop onto the other side and see him fighting his way to the flag while the rest of the group now advances with the cannons out of commission. Soon the Elephant Hannibal brakes through the doors with the rest of the cohort behind them who battle the other campers. Eric and Frank are almost to the flag when Frank is pinned down and Eric comes to his rescue they exchange a few words and Frank goes for the flag and manages to lift it up signaling the win. Reyna and I blow our whistle three times signaling the win of the game and the all the cohorts except for the first and second cheer for the win and only then do I notice the red aura and the symbol of Mars over Frank but no one else seems to notice it. I fly down and land beside Frank, I use my Zeus powers and make it thunder very loudly to get the campers attention. As they quiet down I yell at them to welcome Frank Zhang son of Mars as the campers turn and see the symbol floating above frank they all cheer and even Frank seems happy. I hadn’t realized that he wasn’t claimed yet and Frank is the happiest person on the planet right now even though his father is Mars.

Everyone is impressed by Eric blowing up the water cannons and Frank is crowned MVP and given the mural crown since he was the first person over the wall. With the War game over everyone goes to the mess hall and they have a party. Later on Mars appears to which everyone quiets down afraid of the war god. Mars gives me a short nod which I return then turns to Frank.
“You Frank must go and free Thanatos the god of death so that monsters stay dead and also retrieve the golden eagle and restore the honor of the Romans. With that Frank choses Eric and Hazel to be his quest companions so Mars gives them a quick version of the quest.
“Go to Alaska. Find Thanatos and free him. Come back by sundown on June 24th or die.” Mars says then disappears and I let out a sigh at Mars being a huge idiot. With that the chosen quest members head of to bed to get an early start for the quest.

In the early morning hours the quest members, Reyna and I meet up at the harbor of camp where the only boat the romans have is called the Pax, it’s not really a boat and more of a modified dingy but it will have to do for them. I of course would track them and help them on their way operating in the shadows like always, while also making sure the Romans are ready for the attack that is coming on the 24th which Mars forgot to mention being the huge idiot that he is and will face y wrath the next time I see him, but I thankfully got told by Apollo and the actual prophecy which is only half complete and the quest members will soon here the other prophecy. It is clear that Eric wants his memory back very fast but it’s also clear that Frank and Hazel have a secret they are hiding from not just each other but from everyone else as well and I will find out what that is. The both of us wish them good fortune on their journey with Reyna telling them to seek her sister Hylla at the Amazons and before they can question her she heads back to the senate office to do some work. I also wish them luck on their journey before pushing them off with a bit of a push in the right direction. I on the other hand travel to the only persons who know what is going on and those are Mars and Pluto themselves. I first travel to the Underworld since it won’t be that hard to talk to Hades. Walking towards the gates I see Nico in Persephone’s gardens where I see him pick some pomegranate seeds and put them in his bag.
“What are you doing Nico?” I ask him and could of have sworn that he jumped when I say that, he turns to me and sighs in relive.
“Don’t scare me like that Percy, I thought you were Persephone out to get me for steeling things from her garden.” He tells me.
“Well I wouldn’t blame her. Anyways is your dad around?” I ask him.
“Yes he is it’s just that he is in a foul mood since Persephone left with Demeter to go to Olympus and stuff.” He tells me.
“That’s just great.” I say letting out a huff of annoyance.
“What did you want from him?” Nico asks putting the seeds into his backpack.
“I wanted to ask him about Hazel.” I say and at that Nico drops his backpack and looks at me with surprise.
“How did you find out about her.” He demands from me.
“I am on a mission that involves the romans.” I say and he nods his head in understanding.
“Let’s just say that Hazel until a few weeks ago was dead and that I brought her back to life, which is a big no-no but I just couldn’t resist myself.” Nico confesses.
“Why did you do that Nico, just because she’s a daughter of Pluto doesn’t give you the right to revive someone from the dead.” I tell him slightly concerned.
“It was just that I was lonely, Bianca is busy with her new job of judging the souls since Minos was an idiot and needed to be replaced and you left to go back home so I just wanted someone to hang out with.” He says getting sad and I now knew why he did it. I was also proud of Bianca for landing such an important job.
“The secret is save with me, Nico don’t worry about it coming out.” I tell him giving him a wink. Once I was sure he wasn’t doing anything stupid I went to visit uncle to talk about another matter. I find him sitting in his throne looking to be in a very foul mood. It doesn’t matter what people claim he is, but uncle loves Persephone a lot and she does him, they only do the fighting to not reveal that he is actually a softy at heart.
“Ah Percy, what can I do for my favorite nephew?” He asks me.
“I just wanted to know why the monsters aren’t staying dead, is Thanatos slacking in his job and does me need help again?” I question.
“It’s not that Percy, Thanatos was kidnapped and I can’t keep up with all the dead monsters that should be here. It also doesn’t help that the doors of death are open and that monsters can come and go as they please.” He says and I can tell how stressed that makes him. I promise him that it will soon change. With getting the answers that I wanted I go check on the quest members since talking with Ares will the useless.

I teleport to the position of the quest members only to find them in the clutches of the Amazons. I let out a huff of annoyance and set forth to freeing them before the boys get killed which might as well happen. I change into the attire of prince Olympus with Hera’s emblem on my belt buckle and set into the huge shipping storage. When the amazons see who I am, they instantly bow which I hate so I tell them to rise. It’s good that the amazons know me since I was forced to visit often with Hera whenever she wanted to check up on her group and sometimes even in her Roman form Juno which makes things so much easier. Especially now that I have to save the quest members from another man hating group.
“Take me to your queen.” I command and they lead me deep inside the building full of mortal and demigod goods. I see a few items that would interest me greatly and decide that after I am done talking to the amazon queen I am going to shop around a bit. When we get to where the queen is I am surprised to find Hylla in that spot but it was predictable since she is a daughter of the roman goddess of war.
“Hylla, so nice to see you again.” I say bowing a little.
“It’s nice to see you again to Perseus, but if I may ask what brings you to our hangout, surely not just to shop around.” She says.
“You are correct about that, I know that a gang of quest members came here two boys and a girl, would you please let them go, they are on a quest from Juno to free Thanatos and can’t be stopped.” I tell her and she lets out a puff of annoyance knowing that I am right also she doesn’t want to face the wrath of her Patron. She turns to her right and tells a few amazons to go free the prisoners and lead them to the exit and I thank her for the understanding.
“One more thing before I go Queen Hylla.” I say.
“What is it Perseus?” She asks.
“Your sister Reyna says hello and that you should visit sometime in the future.” I say then go shop around for a bit shopping. I leave Hylla to think about what I have said. One amazon joins me and we walk farther into the depot to the isles filled with mythological items especially designed for demigods. There I find a few interesting things that I got among them I find a cage with a wild horse in it. I walk over to said horse and it instantly started swearing and among various sentences that aren’t meant to be said out loud. I free the horse that is called Arion and he instantly runs off much to the protest of the amazon but one quick glare shuts her up. I finish my shopping and pay for the things that I have chosen then head back out.

By now I can feel that the quest members are on the move again sailing towards Canada where they are going to Franks Grandma. Knowing that they are safe for now I teleport back to camp Jupiter to make sure they are preparing for the fight of their life’s. It’s mayhem when I got there, campers are running around setting up traps, putting weapons in strategic positions, so that they would have backup in case there weapons broke or got taken by a monster. I walk through the camp looking at any flaws in their plans and other places where they will need help. I know that I will have to talk to father to see what else we can do but that will be for tonight. I walk into the senate building where Reyna is holding a meeting about who will defend what area of the camp and if we can ask the hunters for help.
“My mission to the amazons was a success Reyna.” I say walking out of the shadows.
“So did they agree to help in the war?” She asks.
“In a manner of speaking.” I say and she nods her head.
“Now I need you to go to the hunters camp and convince them to help out too.” She says and I groan.
“But I’m a man and they hate us.” I say knowing full well that they don’t know about my relationship with the hunters.
“That won’t matter, you handle with Artemis the most because of your duty so now you will ask her to help us.” She says and with that I take my leave and go to the Hera’s cabin since it’s already late and I need some sleep. I lay down and teleported my spirit to Etnotopia. I appear in the throne room and see a bored dad sitting on his throne listening to some messenger talk about today’s happenings in the town. I let out a laugh and dad instantly perks up at my laugh.
“Son is that you who is hiding from me.” Dad says and I walk out of my hiding place to find him smiling in happiness.
“You are dismissed.” I tell the messenger who bows then walks out of the throne room.
“Dad you know about the fight that is coming up and I was wondering if you have any advice for what I can do to help?” I ask.
“You are already doing all you can do and that is what matters the other thing you can do is lean some other things to help you is learning more of your powers and training with your skills.” He says.
“I thought you said they were already as high as they could be.” I tell him.
“Well that is not true young Perseus they can develop further but you are pretty much at the highest skill someone can be.” Tartarus says walking out of the shadows at least now I know who I get that skill from.
“Well then train me to the highest skill I can get.” I demand.
“But before you do that you need to get the Achilles curse of you and go take a tip in the void river.” Dad says and I process the thing he just said. I know from class that the void river gives you immortality and strength like never before, I can’t remember the downside of it though.
“Isn’t there another way that I can help the campers without giving up the lovely mortality till I’m at least 24.” I say and at that they both laugh a little.
“Percy isn’t being 20 old enough by now even though that only applies to Etnotopia?” Tartarus asks.
“That’s just the thing, on earth I’m 18 here I’m 20, so I still want to wait a little.” I tell the two laughing idiots and at that they stop laughing and know my point.
“Fine then we will just have to train you until you have reached your limit of power without you turning immortal just quite yet. Though once you ascend the throne you automatically become the Primordial you were meant to be.” Chaos says and I agree with it. With that Tartarus and I head to the training arena so that he can continue to train me and I insist that we do it without a break.

During the training I sometimes use my powers to check on the quest members to find out what they are doing and if they are in a situation they can’t handle. But for the time being they are only visiting Frank’s Grandma and I don’t sense any harm around yet so I go back to focusing on my training, and I can feel my powers already improving and so are my sword skills and I get more advanced in duel wielding, which I find awesome especially with the swords I have. After about 3 hours of training my alarm bells go off and I check up on the quest members only to find out that they are in trouble and that a group of Laistrygonian Giants showed up and crashed there visit. Now that they are in trouble I tell Tartarus that I have to go. He nods his head and gives me a quick tip on how to defeat them then I send my spirit back to my body. I quickly change into my fighting outfit then teleport to their location just in time, to stop a deadly blow that is headed towards Frank. Since I am wearing my hood up they have no idea who I am and that is totally fine with me since they shouldn’t know. With the help of the quest members and my chaos powers we defeated the giants. I scan the members to make sure they are alright and don’t need any immediate medical attention when I notice a new member. I scan the memories of Frank since he has no metal shields what so ever to find out that Eric defeated Phineas by deceiving him into drinking gorgon poison and winning in doing so he has given Ella a harpy that was about to be eaten her freedom and she in turn is accompanying them to their destination. I smile knowing that she has read the whole prophecy book so she will be saying a few prophecies a day. I give her a court nod and she returns it knowing exactly who I am. I put my fingers on my lips and teleport back to camp and soul travel back to Etnotopia to continue my training. By the time the quest members are leaving on a plane to Alaska I am so far done with my training and feel a lot stronger than before.

I teleport to Olympus before the quest members take off and hope Zeus doesn’t blast Hazel and Eric out of the sky. To make sure that it doesn’t happen I walk to Zeus mansion and knock on the door and one of his wind spirits opens, instantly bowing when he sees that it’s me but I stop him before he does it and just asks where dad is and he points me to the wind tunnel that Thalia and I used to use to play hide and seek. I walk to it and let it carry me up to the top where you can look forever and ever and it is one of my favorite spots in the whole world. I see Zeus standing on the balcony overlooking the world and I walk beside him.
“When I was little I used to stand here to clear my head whenever someone got on my nerves.” I say to Zeus who looks to be deep in thought.
“We used to look for you everywhere and after some time you just magically reappear and even Thalia didn’t know where you were. Good to know that you were right here all the time.” Zeus says and I smile at those good memories.
“Yah those were some fun times that we all had.” I tell him.
“I know you didn’t come here just to reminisce of old memories so what brings you here today?” Zeus asks turning towards me.
“You are right about that I am here to ask you not to blast 2 quest members out of the sky.” I tell Zeus and he nods his head closing his eyes and feeling who is in the air and a frown starts to appear on his face.
“Why didn’t you mention that those two campers are a daughter of Hades and a son of Poseidon?” He asks getting mad.
“Because I knew you would get mad.” I say and at that he sees that I am right. So after a few more convincing words he promises to keep the plane in the sky and with that I teleport to the Anchorage airport. I wait there until I see the quest members got off the plane and charter a boat to Hubbard Glacier. I let my wings out and take off into the sky, it feels good to let them out again and to stretch them for a while since I haven’t used them in so long. The trip to Hubbard Glacier is very eventful well at least for me, with them almost getting attacked by Gryphons if I hadn’t stopped them by shooting them out of the sky before they reached the group. For the quest members though it was an uneventful trip and soon enough they reached the Glacier and from the air I could already see Thanatos chained to an ice wall. When I looked closer I could see that there are 4 chains each on his limbs and they look to be made of a mixture of celestic bronze and imperial gold and a slightly blue-green tint. It already tells me that they aren’t ordinary chains otherwise Tartarus would have already gotten out of them. All it tells me is that it will take a while to get thru those. I look at the quest members to see them just arriving at the dock and they go up to the ice covered fortress.

They open the gates and see Thanatos chained up and the golden eagle, without thinking they run towards the god of death who tries to warn them but in that moment Alcyoneus steps out and the three demigods stop in their tracks. They know that the Titan can’t be defeated in Alaska so they have to move him to Canada. Luckily the Titan set up his fortress not so far away from the boarder. The three demigod’s spring into action but at the same time the Titan summons shades of old roman ghosts. Hazel chooses to fight Alcyoneus while Eric and Frank go and free Thanatos. I help out Hazel by directing the wind to distort the titan so that Hazel can knock him unconscious. I notice that Eric has summoned a Fluctus to help against the roman legions so that Frank can light a stick on fire to free Thanatos. So it means that they figures out how to free him. With the powers of Hades I notice something different about the stick when Frank’s life force is shortening drastically. So it takes great sacrifice to break through those chains and there is nothing more brave then shortening your life span especially if its connected to a. It is a long and slow process and Eric is getting tired supporting the Fluctus to protect Frank from the Roams. Finally the last chain is cut but Frank doesn’t know who to help. Eric assures him that he is fine so Frank runs to help Hazel while transforming into a grizzly bear, just as I let the winds die he knocks the giant unconscious. They then turn to run and help Eric but realize that he’s about to pass out from exhaustion so in a last attempt he drives his sword into the ice and everything crumbles into the ocean below. Not being able to do anything else the two of them go to drag Alcyoneus to Canada to kill him. As Eric falls into the icy water below, I know he’s going to fine since he fell into dad’s territory.

I swoop down and catch Eric before he hits the ice cold water and fly him back up to a spot that is safe. A few minutes later he wakes up and looks around a little disorientated. When he spots me he stands up and tries to take a swing at me but I just duck out of the way and he stumbles forward.
“Enough with the games Eric, when you get back to the Roman camp there is a large battle happening and there is a cargo full of imperial gold weapons down there the same with the eagle. Better tell your quest members that, just don’t tell them that I was here.” I tell him and he nods his head.

I mist travel back to the roman camp to see how the preparations are coming along. They are thankfully all done and are holding a meeting in the senate house. I don’t want to go inside so I fly to see where the army is at, noticing they are almost to our doorstep. I know that I have to do something to stall them so I draw their attention towards me. I summon my swords and attack them head on. I know that the quest members will arrive soon. I slice and dice at the various monsters that are heading towards camp, cutting down countless. By the time they push thru the boarder of camp the campers are ready and the quest members are just about to arrive. We all attack and it’s a messy few minutes with a bit of disorganization and the front line falling a few times. Then the campers seem to regain strength and I see Hazel walking down the slope with the golden eagle and Arion behind her pulling a chariot full of weapons which the Mars campers instantly go to and got the weapons. I can’t believe that Arion is here and that he made friends with Hazel. Eric and Frank are already in battle and I begin to just slash and hack with Reaper and Fluctus creating a few storms here and there and in a few more hours all the monsters are defeated. The only on that is left is the Giant Polybotes. Eric marches through the crowd knowing that this was his fight and challenges him to a duel.

Knowing that he can’t defeat him on his own I spike up my power to that of a god and walk over to help Eric. All those who can feel my powers shudder at the rawness of it and instantly take a step away. With a murderess look I walk toward Polybotes who takes an involuntary step back and I smile at that. I nod at Eric and he gives me one in return then we begin the battle. It’s a hard one with a lot of slashes on both sides and a lot of ducking but finally while I am distracting Polybotes, Eric give him a fatal blow, and I finish it off by beheading him. Everyone cheers and once I have muted my power level the Romans surge forward and put Eric on their shoulder heading for the mess hall. With the battle won they throw a huge feast and a party. Later that night all the legions meet in the senate building to have the discussion about what will happen next. Both Eric and I are barely awake when it occurs but Eric explains Hera’s plan and there is this big objection by Octavian but after a dagger to the shoulder by me he shuts up and agrees to give the Greeks a chance. With that the meeting is adjourned and everyone goes to bed but I have one more matter to attend. I teleport to Olympus letting out a big yawn and walking towards Olympus to tell Zeus that the quest was a success, I barge into the throne room scaring about half the gods but one look at my drained and extremely pissed off face and those gods don’t say anything. I give my report in short form and once finished, just teleported to Poseidon’s palace take of my weapons belt and other dangerous weapons drop them on the floor and pass out on my bed.

Chapter Text

Percy’s P.O.V

I wake up to someone slamming their fist on my door but I ignore it still being tiered from the lack of not sleeping for the past 4 days. I lift my head to see that it is still 6am in the morning and that no one should wake up a person at this hour. I lie back down and the pounding finally stops and I fall back asleep only to wake up a few seconds later by cold water being poured on me. I sit up straight, turning the water to ice on my bed and making it fly all over the room. I sit up and glare at the two people responsible for this not at all surprised when I see Apollo and Hermes stuck on the wall with ice daggers connecting them.
“Next time you try to wake me do it at noon or better yet in the afternoon.” I tell them and get up, they quickly flash out of my room before I kill them. I make the ice dagger vanish and head back to bed.
“Ahh Percy glad to see you awake, Zeus has called a meeting.” Das says as I was about to get back into bed. I let out a groan and just flash into my clothes and the to the throne room where I arrive just before the meeting is going to start. I sit down in my throne with a sour mood for having to be here at an early hour.
“So Percy, how are you awake at this early hour?” Ares asks knowing full well I wasn’t in the mood. I take one of my daggers out of its holster and fling it at him with deadly accuracy making it land right before his manly parts. It instantly shuts him up while the rest of the council tries to suppress their laughter. I sit in my throne and we wait for the rest of the council members to arrive. When Thalia flashes in I give her a smile then go back to dozing until Zeus voice fills the area.
“The Greek guest members are building a ship to fly it to the Roman camp and it will be good way for our two camps to be reunited so that there can finally be peace.” Zeus says and before he can say more I interrupt him.
“So you want Thalia and I to make sure that everything goes smoothly?” I ask him to which he nods his head. I let out a sigh and can’t believe that we always have to help.

With the meeting dismissed Thalia and I make our way through Olympus to Poseidon’s Palace and from there on back to camp. At a slow pace we make our way and towards the doom that lays ahead. On our way Apollo catches up to us and apologizes for the cold water prank that he pulled and I say its fine. Instead of walking the rest of the way I just flash both of us to the veranda of out cabin. We instantly notice the Hephaestus cabin is running around gathering supplies, bringing things from point A to point B, the Hermes cabin carrying things from a truck and loading them onto the ship, and I don’t even want to know where they got the stuff from, probably not legally. We walk towards the ship that is seen all the way from the cabin circle. It’s being built in a temporary ship yard stationed by the ocean, when Chiron sees us coming he smiles and we give him a nod of greeting. When Annabeth sees us she runs our direction and gives Thalia a bone crushing hug and I give her a nod.
“So Annabeth what’s all this?” I ask her.
“It’s the Argo II the finest Greek war ship out there and it will lead us together with the Romans towards where Eric is.” Annabeth says and I am quite impressed at the speed they’re building the war ship but I have a few more plans for this ship other than the normal weapons on there.
“So what can this thing do?” I ask and Leo comes down from the ship at that moment.
“Why don’t I show and tell you.” He says all excitedly.
“Then lead the way.” Thalia says and together we walk on board.
“This ship can not only sail through the sea but it can also fly. It has the latest system in weapons from celestic bronze spears, and Greek fire bombs, to imperial gold cannon balls, and other things. Down below are the bedrooms and food storage which the Hermes cabin has provided even with a few plates and goblets from the dining hall. Then on the very bottom part there is the engine room and stables for the pegasis.” He says and I am kind of amazed at the ship. With nothing more to see we step of and go to get some food.

As we eat Chiron comes towards us and tells us the plan about what is going to happen and we agree to come along the ride to make sure that the transition between the Greek’s and Roman’s goes over well. After we eat not really knowing what to do Thalia and I head to the arena to practice a little and make sure we don’t get rusty. Since Thalia hasn’t handled a sword in a while we spar a bit and even though she prefers the bow, Thalia is still a force to be recon with even with a sword. As we take a break Jason walks into the arena and frowns as soon as he sees us. Walking over he has this cocky way about him that reminds me so much of dad in the old days that it bothers me so much.
“So I heard that you have met my fellow Romans. What do you think of them?” Jason asks me and I just shrug my shoulders saying that they are alright. At that he takes offence but doesn’t let it show. I ignore him, and motion to Thalia to continue sparing with each other while Jason just stands there observing or every move. After a few more back and forth dueling, the conch horn sounds, signaling that there will be a meeting in the amphitheater in a few minutes so we make or way there, we grab a bottle of water and head to the meeting with Jason trudging after us. There waiting on the stage for us is Chiron together with our two dads. When everyone sees the two gods standing there they bow to them then head to find a seat.
“Since we have all taken our seats it’s time to announce who will be going to retrieve Eric then head to Greece for the battle against Gaia.” Chiron starts but is interrupted by Racheal the new Oracle going into Oracle mode.
“Wisdom's daughter walks alone,
The Mark of Athena burns through Rome.
Twins snuff out the angel's breath,
Who holds the key to endless death.
Giants bane stands gold and pale,
Won through pain from a woven jail.” The whole arena looks at Annabeth and she swallows very hard. She then looks away and runs out of the theater, no one wanting to follow her. Breaking the tense atmosphere, dad starts to explain all the details that Greeks and Romans need to unite to close the doors of death.
“The people going will be, Jason Grace, Piper McLean, Annabeth Chase, Eric King, Leo Valdez, Frank Zhang and Hazel Levesque. They will also receive help from Percy and Thalia.” Zeus says.
“Together it will be 4 greeks and 3 romans, and before anyone asks, Percy and Thalia don’t count.” Poseidon adds and with that they flash out with all the campers covering their eyes. It is truly amazing to see a god disappear in a flash of light and it’s something to see.
“The members of the quest shall set of at dawn tomorrow towards the Roman camp, for now everyone head to your cabins and get some sleep.” Chiron says and everyone does as they are told. Thalia heads off to find Annabeth and assure her that everything will be fine since we know the peril she is to face. I head to our cabin to get myself some food then head to my bed on Olympus instantly passing out.

I wake up to the sound of someone screaming my name so I bolt up only to find that Thalia is trying to wake me up. I look at the clock and groan, its only 6am and with that way to early to get out of bed.
“Come on Percy we need to convince the Romans that the Greeks won’t be attacking them.” Thalia says so with a final glare in her direction I get out of bed and head into the closet to find an outfit. I decide to wear tan cargo pants, with a white t-shirt, then I put on some tan timberlands and my sword belt. When I step out of my closet Thalia frowns.
“Percy you have to stop wearing something that makes you look like an army sergeant.” Thalia says.
“I like these kinds of outfits and it’s not like you are wearing anything different.” I simply look at her outfit which consists of black cargo pants, black sneakers, a silver t-shirt, and a black leather jacket. She just shrugs her shoulders and with that we head out. All of us meet at the ship which is docked by our temporary harbor. Chiron is there to see us of and to wish us good luck on our long journey across the world. Thalia and I tell the quest members that we will meet them in New Rome and to prepare the Romans for the incoming arrivals. Annabeth nods her head taking the lead of this since Jason is too busy making sure he looks Roman enough. I role my eyes then teleport away, with Thalia following me to New Rome.

When we arrive Terminus has a tantrum not just because we land right in front of him with weapons physically showing. All I do is walk past him ignoring the shouts of outrage. That border god is really starting to get on my nerves. Thalia laughs at the expression on my face but soon enough we reach the senate building where I’m sure a meeting is being held. Marching in we stay to the shadows till it’s time to interfere, they are pretty much just talking about how the rebuilding of the war zone is coming along and a few buildings that were damaged in the resent battle. Just as Reyna is about to dismiss the meeting I step into the circle.
“One more thing is to be said.” I say. Reyna looks shocked but quickly recovers.
“What would that be?” She asks.
“There is a ship of 3 Greeks and 1 Roman flying towards New Rome to pick up the quest members and retrieve their lost camper Eric King.” I say and the senate building goes instantaneously quite. Murmurs start to commence and Reyna calls for quite.
“Then we will welcome these Greeks with open arms as long as they don’t cause any trouble.” Reyna says and I almost want to laugh at the last statement. With that she dismisses the meeting but I wait for everyone to leave until it is only Reyna, Thalia and I left in the senate.
“It’s good to see you again Percy, I though you let for good.” Reyna says.
“Hey I wasn’t gone that long, two days at most. Anyways I had other buisness to attend to and being a messenger for both the Greeks and Romans is a full time job.” I say.
“Who is this?” Reyna asks pointing behind me.
“This is my sister Thalia she will be helping me make sure everything runs smoothly around here when the ship arrives especially with Octavian running around.” I say and Reyna smiles. We talked for a little while then we hear a commotion coming from the grounds and head outside. In the air flying above new Rome is a ship that looks just like the Argo 2.
“Wow they got here fast.” I say and walk to where 5 people are climbing down the ladder and a large crowd of Romans gathering. We push our way to the front and see that Leo is the last demigod to come down. Just as Reyna is about to say something Eric runs into Annabeth’s arms, they kiss and hug each other. Just as Eric pulls away Annabeth grabs him and judo flips him over her shoulder and tells him to never leave her again. I just laugh a little and to ease the tension Jason introduces the Greek campers to the Romans. The first encounter goes well for both sides and with that we head to the dining hall for a feast.

Of course the only one who has something against all this is Octavian and he thinks that he can throw a tantrum of insubordination and other hum buck then he is wrong. Before I can do anything to make him shut-up he is sent away by Reyna. With him gone we all go to the pavilion to eat and for the quest members to get to know each other. Everything goes really well and everyone got along great which is already a very big surprise but I am slightly glad about it, makes my work so much easier. Reyna toasts the return of their praetor Jason which the Romans cheer at, and toasts to the hopeful friendship between the two demigod races. Everyone agrees to that and slowly the rest of the Roman campers head of in different directions. The rest of the group members begin to pack their stuff for the long trip. Since Octavian is still convinced that we have come to kill him Leo shows him the ship as an offer to calm him down. I don’t think that it’s a good idea since there are a ton of weapons on the ship, but I don’t interfere and let it play out. Jason shows Piper around camp, and Reyna leaves with Annabeth to talk about the buildings and the senate set up plus a whole bunch of other stuff. That left Thalia and I alone in the food hall so after some fun brother to sister talk we decide to just take a walk. After a few moments of peaceful quietness a huge boom shakes through camp and as the dust clears there is a huge creator in the forum of New Rome. There are some small flames so I use my powers to douse the water but everyone heard the boom and gathers around the area. The obvious cause is definitely the Agro and since the Romans aren’t allowed to have weapons they start throwing food and rocks at the Argo. It is funny to view since Octavian is climbing down and getting hit by the incoming projectile. Of course he is proclaiming at the top of his lungs that Leo fired upon them and only making the angry legionnaires worse. In that moment Eric uses his powers and douses the angry mop which paralyses them with shock for few minutes. It looks so funny to see all the legionnaires wet and confused about what just happened. Of course at the same time as we want to climb up the ladder Octavian comes down saying that we came here to destroy the Roman camp which will forever put a rift between the two camps. With not enough time to explain everything all the quest members plus Thalia and I climb aboard the ship where Annabeth runs to the controls right away and sets a course for Greece. Meanwhile the rest of us try to find Leo. We find him but he is in a confused and dazed state about to fire another shot at the camp but before he can do that Jason tackles him to the ground where he hits his head and passes out. We then feel the ship lurch forward and away from the camp and away from the angry roman legionnaires.

It takes a while before Leo wakes up and all the while Annabeth is steering the ship. Thalia and I talk at the front of the ship away from anyone else and come to the conclusion that Leo was taken over by an Eldolion that wants to cause chaos between the two camps and are probably on the order from Gaea to do anything they need to do it. We see that Leo is coming to and walk over with the others to find out what has happened. He can’t remember anything and only knows that he felt a cold presence coming into his body but after that nothing. We carefully break the news to him that he fired on the Romans and his face instantly goes a shade lighter. Hazel instantly comforts him that its alright and we’ll solve it on a latter day. Knowing that she has to distract him she says that someone needs to steer the ship which he instantly goes to do. With that done we all go do our own things. Hazel is with Leo, Piper goes with Jason to the infirmary to get him checked out since he has a pretty bad wound that he got from the Romans, Eric follows Annabeth so that leaves Frank, Thalia and I on the deck. With Frank looking longingly at Hazel, Thalia and I also head below deck. When we head below we see Coach Hedge and Annabeth talking about something that did not seem well. I let out a groan as I see Hedge, and I find out that he is going to be our chaperone for the whole entire trip to make sure we don’t do anything stupid. I instantly know that I’m not going to sleep here at all. It takes a while of bickering between Annabeth, Eric and Hedge about what to do next to finally agree on some ground rules and those are a lot and only some are fair.

Soon enough Leo and Frank come down below and Leo tells us that in order to repair the ship we need Tar, Lime and Celestic Bronze which we will apparently find in Salt Lake City, Utah. He had already set a course for the city and just wanted to warn us that is might be somewhat of a crash landing. We all head above deck and hold on to various things and Leo sets the boat down somewhat smooth and soon enough everyone heads in different directions. Annabeth, Eric and Frank head to get Tar, while Leo and Hazel head to find some Celestic Bronze and the Lime is in the ground all around us so that is no problem. Piper and Jason stayed on board along with Hedge. I know that around here Narcissus is staying especially with a slap of Celestic Bronze for the use of a mirror. Thalia and I decide to follow Leo and make sure that he gets all the Bronze that he needs. Already from far away I can feel the presence of Narcissus but also a goddess who intercepts Leo and Hazel. I dig a little deeper and soon discover that it’s Nemesis which doesn’t mean anything good, we don’t catch the conversation and Nemesis doesn’t stay very long but on the look of Hazels face it couldn’t have been anything good. They move towards the cave the Narcissus lives in which is the actual hard part since getting Narcissus to part with his Celestic Bronze mirrors, is near to impossible. Leo and Hazel approach the unknowing god only to be stopped by a nymph called Echo. She seems to want to get the other Nymphs away from the god but it doesn’t work and it seems. They quickly come up with a plan which involves Leo distracting the Nymphs and Narcissus while Hazel gets the Celestic Bronze. Seeing that they have everything covered and with nothing else to do Thalia and I head back to the ship just in time for everyone to get back at the same time. Thalia and I pop below deck just as Piper is checking her dagger Katoptris which lets her see into the future and I instantly know that it can’t be good. I use my own seer powers to see into the future and see a meeting about to happen with Bacchus who is meeting them at a road sign that says Topeka 32. I instantly know that we can’t ignore a calling like that and head out to the controls to type in the coordination’s. I then yell at everyone to get on board saying that we have a meeting with a god and Leo quickly finishes putting everything back together. Just as he is done I launch the ship up and at top speed we head towards our destination.

I land the ship a few miles away from the mile marker in an empty field. Once the ship is securely parked there is a lot of bickering about who should go and soon it’s decided that Eric, Jason, and I will head down and see what the wine god wants from us.
“The first person who arrives gets to talk to Bacchus and ask him what he wants.” Jason says and I just roll my eyes. Of course is has to be a race and Eric agrees summoning a Pegasus to his side, Jason summons a horse named Tempest and I just dive head first over the railing. Since we are on the ground I do a front flip and land in a crouch, I hear Jason laugh thinking I’m stupid but I just smirk and launch into werewolf speed. I arrive at the marker first followed by Jason who scowls at already seeing me there and a few seconds later Eric also shows up. We only have to wait for Bacchus a few minutes since he comes walking out of a field muttering something about Ceres not showing up. When he sees me a smile appears on his face but when he sees the others a frown forms.
“Hey Percy, could you contact Ceres to come here so was can talk about how Gaea is making all the plants die and wither away?” Bacchus asks turning towards me completely ignoring the other two.
“You know I’m not your errand boy Bacchus. If you want something done, do it yourself. I really don’t want to get in the middle of the two of you again.” I say and get a disgruntled rude gesture from him. But since I am nice I give Ceres a heads up to show when we are leaving, she gives me a quick reply of okay.
“We actually came here to get your help.” Jason interrupts which is a bad idea.
“And you are?” Bacchus asks.
“I’m Jason Grace son of Jupiter.” He says.
“Great another cousin to deal with.” Bacchus complains and I let out a laugh.
“So you are the wine dude that we came to ask for help.” Eric figures out.
“I am not the wine dude.” Bacchus says annoyed and before he could continue and upset him anymore, I interrupt Eric and talk to Bacchus.
“On our trip we have seen that we are running into your banes Ephialtes and Otis and are asking for your help to defeat them when the time comes.” I say.
“Why do I have to get involved into your quest I am no longer a demigod so I don’t see why I have to help you. The only way that I will help you if you give me a huge sacrifice.” He says which isn’t what I wanted to hear, but before I can negotiate and offer to use one of the favors he owes me Eric says something again
“Like what exactly it’s not like we are going to run into a truck of diet coke in the middle of the air.” Eric says.
“I prefer Diet Pepsi and you have to think about how to sacrifice something to me because without a sacrifice I will not help you to defeat the two giant twins.” Bacchus says. Before he can disappear in a puff of smoke I mind link and tell him that Ceres will meet him in a field a few miles away. Without thanks he disappears in a puff leaving only the smell of wine behind. I want to throttle Eric for what he said and to make Bacchus even more intolerable but in that moment two more presences stop me from doing that. The spirits of two Eidolons arrived and take over Jason and Eric.
“What do you want sister. I am really not in the mood right now?” I ask annoyed.
“Can’t I just send two Eidolons to see how my younger brother is doing?” She asks.
“Sure she can. But she also has other means to contact and see him, like let’s say their home planet Etnotopia or maybe even in real form.” I tell her.
“When you’re pissed you are no fun, anyways I have come to tell you that I only need the blood of a demigod boy and girl and the great news is that you get to choose who it is.” She says sounding happy about the outcome and I just groan even more and in that moment Jason and Eric go at each other with their swords raised and someone about to die. Thankfully I disarm the two quickly and with the flat of their blades hit them over the head so that they pass out. I then kneel in front of them, place my finger on their forehead and speak in my authority voice.
“As the son of Chaos I command you Eidolons to leave these two bodies and never again in your life poses anyone on this quest or someone in both the Greek and Roman camps.” I say and with that begin to chant a few words and in only a few moments the two sprits leave their bodies which now only leaves me with two unconscious demigods. I let out a sigh and teleport us back to the ship but before that telling their animals that they can go back to doing whatever they were doing. After the two animals gave me a weird looking bow they leave and so do I before Bacchus comes back and turns Eric into a crazy lunatic.

When I arrive the two unconscious demigods are taken care of and it doesn’t take long for them to wake up, Jason apologizes to Eric for attacking him and Eric also apologizes. With that done I tell them that Gaea had a nice little conversation with me telling me that she needs the blood of one girl and one boy demigod spilled on the floor of the original Olympus so that she can awaken and that she is making me choose who it is going to be. Everyone takes in the news and Leo exclaims that he is hungry so we all go to the mess hall to eat and talk about the situation we are in. We discuss more on the problem at hand and how we are going to explain to the romans that Eidolons took possession of Leo and caused the attack on camp Jupiter. In the end we decide to tell them after the war is over since Jason says they will not follow us into the Mediterranean Sea as it’s considered off limits. That was the only good news right now and it seems to make some of us a little more relaxed just not for Thalia and I. The whole time they talk I am thinking about how the quest is going to commence. Once the meeting is dismissed I trudge my way up to the top deck to enjoy the view of a flying boat. It was going to be a long and hard journey and not just for Annabeth who has to face a hard challenge but also for the rest of the quest members. As the sun sets and it is getting dark out, I slowly head below deck and knowing that I can’t sleep I go to the last level on the deck. Leo apparently built stables for pegasis even though they will never use this so us campers transformed it into a relax spot. It takes a while but I finally find the peaceful place in my mind but it doesn’t last long when I sense two people approaching. I quickly hide just as Eric and Annabeth show up. They talk about things that are very uninteresting to hear, just as I’m about to flash out they talk about how to find Phorcys and how they are going to catch him. With that being the only interesting thing they talk about I decide to teleport to the Atlanta Aquarium to find Phorcys and Keto. Finding them was relatively easy and since they didn’t know who I am or who my father is things are so much easier. Just as I’m about to walk into the Aquarium Thalia pops up beside me and I groan.
“You didn’t think I would let you go alone into this?” She asks
“Well I kind of hoped so but since you are already here you might as well help out.” I grumble not pleased at all that she just decided to come along without any warning or reason too. I need to be sneakier maybe pick up some assassin skills as to not be noticed when entering or leaving a place. I make a mental note to ask dad about that as soon as I get a free moment.
“We have 6 hours before the quest members arrive, what is your plan?” Thalia asks.
“Walk in there and confront him.” I say bluntly.
“That’s not going to work.” Thalia says and I let out a sigh.
“Then what do you suggest?” I ask her.
“How about we wait for the quest members to arrive and while they distract Phorcys we sneak around to see what he has hidden.” Thalia suggests and I don’t like that plan. The whole point of me coming was to this this myself. So instead I compromise and tell Thalia that we should at least get the lay of the land before they arrive. She agrees and with that we sneak inside and look around. We discover that they already know of the quest members coming here and have a perfect trap set up for them. Both of us want to stop whatever old Phocrusty has in store for the quest members but we have to let it play out. Once it is getting close to sunrise both Thalia and I hide to wait for two members to show up. It doesn’t take long for Frank and Eric to show up. They are let in by Keto and she is telling them all about the Aquarium trailing behind them is none other than Coach Hedge. I really don’t want to know why he decided to come along. Keto leaves the boys standing by an entry way while she leads Hedge somewhere else claiming to want to show him something cool. Soon enough Phorcys shows up and leads the two demigods down the hall showing them various sea animals from the Sea of Monsters and both of them notice that most animals are tranquilized. It seems that Eric is getting angry at Phorcys for keeping all the animals in here and robbing them of their freedom. I know that as a son of Poseidon I should care about it too, but I just have learned to ignore such things as animal cruelty in museums since there is nothing I can do about it.

They stop in front of an empty tank and after a few persuasive comments Phorcys has Eric and Frank trapped in the empty tank to use as display. Though Phorcys gets careless and tells them all about the giant twins and how they have a bronze jar which has a human boy trapped inside and I instantly know that its Nico who is in that jar. He also tells them that in order to get the person out of the jar they would have to fight to get them back and that it’s also bait for them. When Eric asks about Gaea’s plans Phorcys explains it in to many layers to understand and also that she has placed a bounty on a few demigods. He also mentions something about Charleston but I can’t hear that because in that moment Hedge and Keto return. With the help of Hedge, Eric and Frank escape the prison and run back to the ship to head to Charleston. Before we can follow them I get a text from Chaos telling me that he wants to meet us pronto and with the both Thalia and I teleport to Etnotopia.

Chapter Text

I teleport us to our rooms so that we can at least freshen up a bit, before we attend the meeting. I take a 5 minute shower before I flash on some more formal clothes. I meet Thalia in the hall then we teleport to the council chamber and when we show up in the first thing we see is absolute chaos, no pun intended.
“Everyone shut up!” I yell and they all aside from Tartarus and Chaos instantly go deathly quiet.
“What’s the problem?” Thalia asks as everyone quiets down.
“I have just told your brothers and sisters that Gaea has lost her mind and is threatening to attack the people of earth and destroy the lineage of the gods.” Chaos says.
“This is the reason you called us here, because you can’t control your children?” I ask and Chaos just nods his head. Thalia and I let out a groan at that.
“You should believe dad, what he says is absolutely and undeniably true.” I say.
“It can’t be true, she would never do that.” Aether protests.
“But she is doing it and now we have to fix the mess that she is creating.” Thalia says.
“Is there anything else that requires our help?” I ask and dad just shakes his head.
“then we are going to leave, we are busy babysitting the quest members to make sure that they don’t kill anyone important, Now if you’ll excuse us we will be taking our leave.” Thalia says and teleports to the ship, with a quick wave and goodbye I teleport away too. We land on the deck and see no one around, so both of us head below deck and find the whole gang in the dining area talking about some map that they have to find in Charleston and Jason says they should head to fort Sumter a place called the battery. Everyone agrees so Leo heads to the wheel to steer the ship and I smell a little trap but am too tired to tell them so I just decide to sleep and crash in what presumably is Thalia and my room.

The next morning just before we head to Fort Sumter, Jason tells us that Reyna might be there since he had a dream about the Roman legionnaires trying to hunt down the quest. I find it a little funny that even though they are in a little danger Jason is still insisting that they visit the place that is overrun by Roman demigods. When all I set we head there and after a short distance the fort come into few. I can already tell that the Romans have set up camp there and as we enter Fort Sumter where we see Reyna talking to someone in the courtyard. We quietly inch further and since it’s just Jason and I because we told the others to stay on the ship we actually managed to come a few ways. We can now see that she is talking to a ghost but we can’t understand what they are saying, even I can’t with my enhanced hearing. When she is done talking the ghost disappears and Jason chooses that moment to walk up behind her and demands to know what the ghost has told her. Before I can stop him there is a squadron of legionnaire surrounding Jason, they must be Reyna’s person guard. I come out with my hands up telling them that we don’t want any trouble and only want to talk to Reyna in peace. Of course I say all this in perfect Latin while also showing them my SPQR tattoo. Once they see that I am one of them they lower their weapons and step back. I then ask Reyna in a nice way about the information the ghost gave her. She answers us politely that she can’t give the information but gives a warning instead about us being hunted by Roman Eagles. I thank her for the info and before anything else can happen I grab the map out of her hands, then I grab Jason, bid goodbye to Reyna and teleport us back to the Argo2.

Once we are on board I tell Leo to put it into high speed since we have Roman Eagles following us. He instantly runs to the control panels and the ship lurches forwards with incredible speed that makes everyone stumble back a little. Leo then also deploys a few bags of dirty laundry to get the eagles of our trail. Everyone goes their separate ways and await the arrival in Charleston. I stay up on deck and watch the skies for any sign of Roman Eagles with my bow casually resting in my hand. Thalia also stays up and walks up to me.
“You need to be a little nicer.” She says.
“What does that mean?” I ask surprised.
“You have had this look on your face like you have bitten into a sour lemon for two days now.” She says and I punch her playfully.
“That is so not true. I’m just a little more focused on the quest.” I tell her.
“While you do that, don’t forget to have fun every now and then.” She says and walks away. I know she is right but I just can’t get the feeling away that something will go majorly wrong. Deciding that the members are going to be fine on their own for their visit to Charleston I walk up to Thalia, grab her hand and teleport us home for some quality sibling time. We land in the throne room and see a father in front of us who looks very board. When he sees us appear he smiles and even Thalia isn’t mad at me that I teleported her hear without permission.
“What brings my two youngest kids here?” Chaos asks.
“Thalia claims that I need a little vacation from the quest members.” I say and dad laughs at that. I grumble something about non understanding parents but no one understands me since they are too busy laughing, so I switch the subject.
“Where is Tartarus, I need someone to let my power out with?” I ask dad.
“Tartarus has gone back to his pit. But if anyone can coax him out I’m sure it’s going to be you.” Father says and I groan not wanting to make another tip down to the pit.
“Can’t you call him up here, since you are the dad.” I say dead panning it instantly shutting dad up.
“Quit fighting you two.” Mom says as she enters the throne room, probably having heard the commotion that was going on.
“We’re not fighting. I’m just telling dad that I need a sparring partner.” I say to mom who comes over wanting a kiss and a hug which I give.
“I’m sorry to say honey, but Tartarus has buisness of his own, with all those monsters escaping.” Mom says.
“Then he should just close the doors and kick those giants buts back into the gladiator games. If they try to escape I would be more than happy to fight to teach them a lesson about whose in charge.” I say getting an evil grin on my face.
“And that is brother, why no one wants to let you back into the pit. You were almost crowned champion of the pit.” Thalia says.
“I was only 2 giants away, when father had to interfere. I was having so much fun too, kicking all their asses and showing them who truly possess skills.” I say.
“My son is a fighter thru and thru and yet when it came to who will take the throne he lost a fight to his sister.” Chaos says laughing.
“It’s not funny dad. She distracted me.” I say pouting. Everyone then brakes out in loud laughter and I let out a huff then disappear, only to reappear in my room where I fall on my bed, being dead tired.

In the most deepest part of my brain I could hear a laugh too that might have belong to Tartarus spying on our conversation only giving him a very rude gesture as my reply before I fall into a deep sleep forgetting all about the quality sibling time. In the morning I get woken up by my lungs being crushed by a heavy weight, which I very quickly get rid of. Opening my eyes I find Aether standing up with a groan from hitting the wall very hard. Knowing that my sleep is over I get out of bed and get dressed. Leaving Aether where he is I go to Thalia’s room to see that she is already awake. I know that we have to get back to the quest but a part in me wants to stay here for a little while longer.
“Hey bro you ready to go?” She asks
“Not really but we don’t have any other choice. I say and she laughs. Before we head out we go and say goodbye to mom giving her a kiss and a hug then to dad who just gives us a nod before he is teleports us back onto the Argo 2 so I don’t have too.

We arrive to see that they are somewhere close to the Mediterranean Sea gate which means a visit to Hercules for passage through. Everyone is on board enjoying the sunshine and open air. Jason and Eric are sparring on deck while Annabeth and Piper watch them. Leo is explaining to Frank how the controls work and Hazel looks like she is trying not to be see sick. Pitying her I put my hand on her shoulder and mutter a few words in Ancient Greek, she glows blue for a few seconds and when it fades I can tell she is no longer sea sick. She turns around and tackles me in a hug once she sees that it’s just me.
“Thank you Percy, I don’t know how you managed to do it but thank you.” She says.
“It’s no problem and it’s a permanent solution, better than the one when you went on your quest to Alaska.” I tell her and she smiles before going back to look at the horizon but this time in enjoyment. I head below deck to eat something and maybe have a conversation with someone. After a few more miles Leo comes below deck and tells us that we have arrived before Hercules Island. We all step onto the deck to see the island stretched out before us with a man standing on its shores.

Before anyone can volunteer to head out and convince to face him, I step forward and jump onto the water.
“Hercules is mine; he has a debt to pay for hurting someone I care about a lot.” I say and run to shore. I step foot onto the sand and can tell the hatefulness of him plus the arrogance that is all around him.
“Hello Hercules, how have you been?” I ask casually resting my hands on my swords.
“I won’t talk to a son of Poseidon, I know that you are carrying one of my half-brothers let me talk to him.” He states playing with his club.
“I’m sorry, I can’t do that. You see he doesn’t have a girlfriend that wants you dead. Remember Zoe and that sword you stole from her so rudely. Well I came to take that back.” I say and take out my swords.
“She was only a hindrance in my path to finish my task.” He says but I don’t let him finish and begin my attack on him. He isn’t quick enough to raise his club so I land a blow with Aurorae but he dodged the blow of Reaper. Hercules then raises his club and tries to land a blow on me.

I dodge one swing but the other catches me in the ribs. I jump back and catch my breath letting my healing powers already let them heal. I run at him and stay low feinting an attack to the left and just as he swings there I jump up and attack his now open right side. Once I am in his guard I begin to make cuts all along it, just as he is about to swipe at me I duck and sweep his legs out from under him. Once he is on his back I take out both my daggers and launch them at his shoulders. Once he is pinned down I rip open his shirt and take the pummel of Reaper and put it on his chest. The scream that comes from his mouth is a song to my ears and I grin. I take of the pommel to see that it left a pentagram on his chest right in the middle. I then rip out one of the daggers from his shoulder and begin to write something. Once it is done I pull back to admire my handiwork. On his chest is written in Chaos a spell that binds him to this island to never leave. It is like the curse place upon by Calypso only that is can only be undone by someone of chaos blood. By now Hercules has passed out, I take out my phone and take a picture of him before sending it to Zoe, I also take back her sword Anaklusmos. With him being taken care of I teleport back to the ship and tell Leo that we can pass. He runs to the controls and we sail into the Mare Nostrum.

Once we enter it is like door was opened. Not one of us is able to get a good night’s rest without there being some sort of monster attack. Some of the monsters that attack us consist of Stymphalian birds, Venti’s and a wild Pegasus who stepped on Coaches Enchiladas. He then proceeded to attack the Pegasus with his baseball bat. It was quite a funny sight to see and it make us all laugh. We started inputting night shifts and having two demigods keeping watch and tonight it’s Jason and my turn to do that. So far it’s a quite night and you can see all the stars shining bright in the night sky. It reminds me of home where you can see the stars all the time.

After a while I get a strange sensation that something is off and the feeling doesn’t go away. I grab the hilt of my swords and get ready to fight. It’s too late though, out of nowhere comes a ship that looks very familiar and rams us straight on, that makes us loose our balance. As fast as lighting, grappling lines attach to the rails and in an instant our entire ship is overrun by dolphin warriors. Soon enough the captain arrives and attacks Jason. He has his sword out but it is useless and the captain disarms him sending Jason’s sword into the water. When I look at his mask I instantly know who it is, its Chrysaor the golden boy cursed by Bacchus after he insulted him. I smile at that because it is so easy to insult Dionysus that’s it’s almost a game. Chrysaor motions his crew to search the entire deck and I lift my hands up as two members come at me to take my swords and tie my hands behind my back. I only let them take my swords and quickly covered my other weapons in mist. A few minutes later the crew comes up with the rest of the quest members. Thalia gives me a glance and I only shake my head telling her not to do anything. I do a quick scan over the members and note that Frank isn’t with them; he must have changed into an animal. I hear Chrysaor telling some people about what he is planning to do with the quest members once they get to Greece. I don’t particularly care for what he has in store for the quest members. I see Eric trying to get to his sword which is in his pocket so that he can get out of the ropes while Hazel and Piper begin to thrash against the grip of one of the crew members. Eric and I use this time of distraction to get free and I go straight towards Chrysaor who is surprised that I got free.

Chrysaor and I stand head to head in the battle that is about to ensure. The dolphin man smiles because he thinks that I don’t have any swords on me but I let the mist drop and reveal my two daggers. He then also pulls out his sword and we attack each other. I have to admit that he is a very excellent fighter plus I am at a disadvantage with my two daggers having to wait for my swords to reappear. I don’t really plan on killing him but I provide a distraction while Eric frees the others so that they can take care of the crew members. As I realize that everyone is free I seize my fighting and strike up a conversation with him instead.
“You do realize that this isn’t out whole crew.” I tell him.
“But it is we have searched the whole entire ship and found no one else.” He says.
“That may be true, but gods only appear when they want to. Our captain Dionysus will be very upset if we don’t finish our quest.” I say. At this Chrysaor becomes very nervous and I do a little smile. As the dolphin men get more and more scared the captain tries to say that we are bluffing.
“He drove Piper and Hazel mad for punishment and will do the same to all of us if we don’t continue on our way. He will turn you fully into dolphins and have fun hunting you.” I say at the same time I see Frank transform himself into a dolphin and the two girls act crazy. This scares them all and they quickly all jump into the water to get away from the ship. By now I had moved Chrysaor into a corner with no means of escape; he takes the easy way out by jumping into the ocean losing his mask in the process. I use my summoning powers fill Chrysaor boat with diet coke as an offering to Dionysus. I then hear a laugh in the back of my head and know that he approves. After that encounter Leo decides to take the air route which makes everyone more relaxed. Jason and I head to bed while Annabeth and Piper take watch. Thankfully I have a dreamless sleep and nothing major happens again.

Once the city of Rome comes into view it is an amazing sight to behold, the ancient city full of history and brutality. All of us stand on deck when Leo finally lowers the ship already having a game plan in mind. Eric is going to escort Annabeth as far as he can, Hazel, Leo, Frank and I are going to try and find Nico while Coach Hedge, Jason, Piper and Thalia are staying behind to watch the ship.
“If you meet Tiberinus and Rhea Silvia tell them you are there to cash in the favor that he owns me.” I tell Annabeth and Eric before they start their journey. Before we leave Thalia tells me to be careful and I just give her a smile which she hates so much. Our group also sets of and Hazel tries to sense Nico with her powers but it doesn’t go so well so we get a little lost. We find our way to the Roman Pantheon which is really stunning and huge. It is made for the gods if they were in their 20 foot height. Frank and I keep watch while Hazel and Leo scout for any possible signs that may help us. In the end Leo spots a secret lock leading to a small entryway downwards. He convinces Hazel to take a look, she reluctantly agrees to go and see. We join Leo in guarding the exit and while I use my powers to sense for any dangers Frank and Leo talk about stuff. They seem to open up a bit towards each other and they talk about the things they have in common.

Soon enough trouble arrives and before the two know what is happening I push them down the whole to avoid a fight out in the open with all these people. The mist can be somewhat unreliable and it requires a strong hold and for that long even I can’t hold it that long. I slide in after them and soon enough without an explanation I try to find a lock to seal the door so the monsters can’t follow us down here. Locking the door with a sphere we look around and see that we are in a room full of old pottery and other breakable stuff. On the other side there is another door that looks very modern and very out of place. I walk up to it and try to open the door but it is locked. Leo comes over and tries to open the combination lock which doesn’t take that long. We soon enter a room full of failed duplicates of Archimedes inventions including a few automatons. I hate automatons with a passion and hope that they stay dead otherwise they are going to get blown up or melted. We explore the workshop to see where we have gone. In all our exploring we don’t notice the Eidolons take control of the automations until I hear the gears come to life. I quickly duck under an electric sphere that is thrown my way. I look around to see that Hazel and Frank have already been knocked out and Leo is running towards the control room. I pull out both my swords and the attack the stupid automatons, I disable and melt most of them before Leo finally succeeds in shutting down the automatons and we manage to trap the Eidolons inside. He comes out and I actually give him a high five for his good work. We go over to Frank and Hazel who are regaining consciousness. As I walk over to them I stumble upon a Stygian Iron Sword which belongs to Nico. It dawns on me that it’s a trap, a setup from Gaea. Knowing that she is going to appear I quickly flash a hoodie onto myself and put up the hood. No sooner have I done that then Gaea appears in the mirror and taunts all of us. Thankfully she doesn’t recognize me, she says that we won’t be able to escape, that the others will have a hard time succeeding without us. Leo is getting more and more frustrated with her, he soon ends up burning the mirror and we go find a way out of this place. Finding no exit I just grab them all and teleport us to the ship. When we appear on the ship we see that Piper and Eric are huddled around her sword to see if Annabeth is okay, but instead the sword shows them how Camp Jupiter is setting up a forward base and an invasion route into Camp Half blood. It then changes to show a mysterious staircase that is near the Roman Forum. Making ourselves noticeable I cough loudly scaring the three members. Hazel and Frank go over to talk with Piper about what we found out while Leo goes and checks on the ship and I walk towards Jason and Eric.
“We need to go to that staircase so that we can find Nico.” Jason says.
“It will be stupid and dangerous.” Eric says.
“Sounds like a party, let’s go.” I say. Then we turn serious again and hatch out a plan as to how we will proceed. With everyone busy we leave a note and head out to the Forum. No one will be happy about our disappearance but Nico doesn’t have much more time. We arrive at the Forum and find the staircase with no hindrance. It amazing how many mythology items have delta symbols on them. Eric goes down first in case there is water in the below areas of Rome. When he yells the all clear we head down to join Eric. At the bottom of the staircase there is a huge room filled with old things, plus a carving of Nymphaeum. They are the nine nymphs that watched over Zeus when he was born. Eric presses on the nymph thinking that it will open a door but instead they appear and start to flood the water with some mud brown water that didn’t look healthy. Of course Eric tries to control the water but it isn’t working and he starts to panic along with Jason. I try and calm them but it is no use. Soon the water makes us float and after another few moments the water is almost towards the ceiling. We figure out that the nymphs are also steeling our powers and youth. With Eric useless in controlling the water, I dig down deep and use my creation powers to summon fresh water. Eric begins to move the fresh water around and gives Jason an air bubble. I make the water disappear and use time powers to restore the nymphs youth. Once they are young again they tell us the location of Otis and Ephialtes.

We quickly arrive at their lair and I look around at the area we are in. I spot the jar that Nico is trapped in and see that its strangely unguarded. We start to approach the jar but are interrupted by a platform lowering. We quickly hide and see the two giants on them and they are ugly as hell. Otis and Ephialtes talk about their plans to destroy Rome in their biggest show yet. They also talk about letting Nico die out in public but he has no entertainment value because he is asleep. I motion for the boys to move towards Nico since he is our top priority. We hide behind huge props and slowly move towards the jar. The giants also move to the jar and we hold our positons. They tap against the glass but since Nico is in a death trance he doesn’t move. Out of frustration Otis whacks the jar of the table sending it flying in our direction and as it hits the ground it shatters sprawling Nico onto the cold stone floor with glass around him. Eric and Jason look at him worried while I zone in on my hearing and tap in on my Hades powers and sense that he is alive but barely. He needs food, water and some healing. We come up with an idea to distract the giants so that their attention is on one of us and not on Nico. Jason volunteers and flies into the air and calls out to the two giants who instantly start to follow him while Eric and I run towards Nico and drag him towards our safe place.

Meanwhile the two giants are contemplating about how to catch Jason and use him as bounty or whether to kill him already and make Gaea rise early. After healing Nico a little so that he is safe for teleportation I teleport him to the Argo 2 with the instruction to get the ship as close to the colosseum as possible. With that done I take out my two swords and go to help Jason. In that moment the giants activate a giant lever which raises a part of the arena up and into the open air of the colosseum completely transforming it into a fighting ring. All three of us stand of against the giants and get to work. Otis throws his spear at Jason which he deflects with a gust of wind and turning it towards Ephialtes which strikes him into his right side. Piercing his heart and turning him to dust. Turing towards Otis I launch myself at him striking in maneuvered strikes until he exposes his heart and I pierce my sword through it turning him into dusty too. The only troublesome thing is that they both need to be killed by a god, and the two banes of Bacchus are already starting to reform. I look up at the sky and send a nice greeting up to Olympus, in the next moment Bacchus appears and he doesn’t look very happy.
“Perseus that wasn’t very nice.” He says.
“But it got you down here.” I say.
“I hate it when you are right, anyway in order for me to help your two friends I want them to put on a show for me to convince me to help.” He says.
“Fine then, we’ll put on a show for you.” I say.
“Not you Percy, you will join me up here and watch them either succeed or fail.” He says and in the next moment I am in a throne beside Bacchus watching the fight happen and also notice that he has gotten a fake audience to cheer for the demigods or boo them out. Jason and Eric decided to work together and in a few maneuvers Jason is using his winds to make the fake mountain the two were holding fall on Ephialtes, then a few insults were thrown back and forth and after someone insulted Swan Lake and Otis charges the two and Jason blast him into the lake with a blast of lightning then quickly stabbing him with both their swords turning him into dust. Eric uses his power over water to make the lake swirl around so that the giant doesn’t reform although Otis head is able to reform and is bobbing around the lake trying to get his brother to help him. I let out a laugh and find it funny. Ephialtes then escapes from the mountain and charges the two and manages to disarm them both but before he can kill them the Argo 2 appears overhead and blasts the giant with Greek fire. Finally Bacchus considers himself entertained and quickly kills the giants with his Thyrsus. Before he leaves he informs us about the best place to reach Annabeth before she is killed.

Back on the ship on the way to safe Annabeth, Eric gets mad at some people and has a rant about it. Nico taps me on the shoulder and we walk to a secluded place. He tells me that while he was in his death trance, he discovered that we need to head to the doors of death that are in the house of hades, one is on the surface the other side is in Tartarus. The catch is that the doors need to be closed from both sides or not at all.

This means that I need to head to Tartarus. I haven’t been back there since my almost becoming his champion then getting stopped by dad. I link Tartarus and tell him that I am heading his way and he laughs saying I can finally become his champion and beat all the giants asses, to which I say maybe. Nico snaps me back to reality and also tells me that Gaea’s army is guarding the doors of death. I let that sink in and tell him not to tell the others until they have Annabeth back on board. We arrive at the location given and Leo blasts a big whole into the parking garage. We see that she has trapped Arachne in a Chinese finger cuff which is a tactful maneuver. When she sees us, she motions to a huge statue and we see that she found the Athena Parthenos. Leo lowers some rope and we quickly get to work in loading up the Athena Parthenos into the ship. Annabeth tells us to be careful since the floor made out of glass is the only thing keeping us from falling into Tartarus. The spider struggles to get free and slowly cracks appear on the floor and we all scramble to get off of it. Soon Arachne gets free of her trap and the floor shatters. Of course Arachne falls first, Annabeth is the last demigod to reach for the ladder to climb up but a thread attaches itself to her leg pulling her towards the pit. Eric manages to grab her arm and hold her stopping them both from falling but unable to pull her up. Before they fall alone I run to Thalia and grab her sword and tell her not to worry about me then I run towards them and the thing I hear is Thalia yelling for me to stop and Nico encouraging Eric to hold on but his grip is failing him. Eric makes Nico promise to make sure that everyone is going to be alright and he lets go. A second later I’m there telling him to get to the doors before jumping after them.

Thalia’s P.O.V

Once second Percy is beside me telling me everything is going to be alright and taking my sword the next he is running towards the pit ready to jump and make that long standing deal with Tartarus and becoming the champion of the pit. That is one of the reasons Chaos stopped him from beating the last two giants. Even though Percy thinks that I don’t know about the conversation or more like fight that went on between him and Tartarus about that topic I know. I see him say something to Nico then he jumps in and I let out the loudest cry ever as Piper rushes towards me, one to stop me from jumping after him the other to give me a hug as the rest stand there stunned that Eric, Annabeth and Percy are now on their way to Tartarus. Nico comes back on board and tells them that they are heading to Greece to a place called the House of Hades and are getting Percy, Eric and Annabeth back.

I couldn’t listen though all I wanted was to have my brother here by my side. Even though he is gone most of the time I still know that he is on earth. Not being able to stand the loneliness I teleport away from the ship as it lurched towards Greece and into the middle of the Chaos throne room. Dad is talking to some adviser and when he sees me he instantly dismisses them and also tells them to summon mother. I just sit in the middle of the room not being able to stand and am in tears. Dad is instantly there holding me and is trying to figure out what is going on. Mom comes in a few minutes later and then I tell them about Percy jumping into Tartarus and probably making the dark angel deal with Tartarus to safe them all. Dad instantly tenses stopping my tears momentarily and I look at him as he repeatedly keeps saying shit.
“What’s wrong dad?” I ask him.
“I haven’t heard from Tartarus in a while and fear that he has fallen into the hand of Gaea, I have sent Nix down to get him back and she sent me a message a few hours ago saying that the pit doesn’t look good.” He says and those news make me brake out in more tears. Percy would shake his head and tell me not to cry over him, but I can’t stop it. Mom comfort me and tells me that we have to trust in Percy and that he knows what he is going. I compose myself and have to trust my brother that he knows what he is doing and that if he ever gets out of that alive I will beat the living hell out of him and make sure he never does that again.

Chapter Text

Percy’s P.O.V

I know that it was stupid of me to just jump head first into the pit but it was all I could think of in order to close the Doors of Death. Of course I had to endure a lecture from Annabeth about my stupidity but I have other plans than sticking together with them once we land on the bottom. The worst of the fact that I was going down into Tartarus was due to the fact that I had to listen to Annabeth and Eric talk about the last words that she said to him. Finally I see the bottom come into sight and apparently so do the two love birds. Annabeth tells Eric that he needs to control the water to cushion there fall but I know the name of that river and don’t feel like reliving all the sorrow and pain in my life. Having no other choice I pull out my sword and stick it into the wall stopping but getting some nasty rock burns on my knees and side. Annabeth and Eric don’t fare any better by plunging right into the river of Lamentation as they feel the sorrow and pain from not only themselves but other people. I make the rest of the way down then heave them out of the river. Both of them then realize that they are lying on the shore that is made out of glass shards and that the air of Tartarus is made out of poison. I instantly activate the tattoo that Tartarus gave me so that I can breathe easily in the air of the pit. No one seems to notice that I’m not effected by the air so Annabeth says that in order to heel we have to drink form the river of fire. It doesn’t sound pleasing but it does actually work.

We easily find the river as Eric and Annabeth drink from it even I take a little sip as to not raise any suspicion. Out of the corner of my eye I see Arachne appearing but while Eric and Annabeth are still busy drinking to heal I pull out one of my swords and kill her. After they finished drinking it was apparently time to decide where we would head. Annabeth taking the lead which doesn’t really surprise me says that the only way to get out of Tartarus was to head to the Doors of Death. I knew that it was going to lead them straight through Nyx palace which I want to head to anyways. We encounter a gang of Empousa’s which Eric and Annabeth apparently know since Eric calls one of them Kelly. Eric stands in front of Annabeth to protect her and has his sword out. I just lazily put my hand on my sword since I don’t need to actually do anything, Powers work for me but I wasn’t going to show that to anyone so soon. She says a few nice sentences then has her head decapitated my a broom being swung around. Once I look up I see that it is Iapetus also known as Bob after Eric dumped him in the river Lethe so now he is a peaceful titan who works as a janitor for Uncle Hades. Eric is happy to see Bob and asks him how he knew that they are down here. After a lot of explaining he tells them and I send a silent thanks up to Uncle Hades for sending someone even though he is a titan. I hear a silent snicker on the other end but avoid answering back. Bob then joins us on our journey through the area of Tartarus showing us the way to the Doors of Death.

Thalia’s P.O.V

After I had told mom and dad what had happened and sworn them not to tell the Olympians I teleported my way back onto the Argo 2 who turns out are stuck being attacked by two rock gods called Ourae. When I appear Leo is firing his celestic bronze canons at them not doing anything to the two gods. Once the attack is not a success he retreats from the Apennine Mountains. Once Leo notices me he instantly runs over and so does Hazel and Nico who still looks a little under shook. Hazel explains to me that they have been trying to get to Greece but are stopped by these two rock beings who have been following them. Leo puts in that he wants to wake up the others but everyone instantly shoots him down saying that they haven’t been able to sleep properly because of reinforced monster attacks. We throw around ideas until I come up with the idea to cover us in a strong mist so that the two rock gods don’t see or feel us. They agree on the plan since they can’t come up with anything else or good for the moment. I concentrate really hard since mist doesn’t come as easily to me as it does to Percy. I still give it all my best and when the ship lurches forward I cover the whole ship in mist making it seem like a cloud. Sweat forms on my forehead as I give all my powers. I then feel Percy’s presence beside me giving me power.
“Come save me Thalia, rescue me from the dark angel.” I hear him say and I let out a tear. Finally Hazel screams that we have passed the two rock gods and I let the mist fall also falling on my knees because I’m so drained. Hazel gives me ambrosia which I gladly take to refill my energy. I sit there for a few more moments before I get up and go to talk to Nico. While we fly over the land of Italy we are glad to avoid all the monsters. In the morning hours Piper, Jason and Frank finally come up and look awake which is a good thing. We approach Bologna and are unknowingly boarded by two monkeys. They sit on the railing of the ship when Piper finally notices them.
“Who are these beings?” Piper asks.
“We are not beings, we are Akmon and Passalos, the Cercopes.” They say then run over the deck steeling Leo’s Archimedes sphere, tool belt and Pipers knife then they flee. Leo and Jason instantly pursue the two monkey dwarfs into the city which is a hide and seek game since the monkeys loose them multiple times before they are cornered in their layer which is the land mark of Bologna, a set of two towers. We follow them with the Argo 2 and stop by the two towers. Jason and Leo then force them to return the stolen items along with an astrolabe and an old book which turns out to belong to an architecture god Triptolemus who lives in Venice. Leo also manages to convince the two dwarfs to harass the Roman army marching towards Camp Half Blood. We then proceed towards Venice to return the stolen book and ask for aid.

Percy’s P.O.V

On our way to the doors of death we encounter various monsters that all want to kill us and Eric may or may not have gotten a few curses on him by fighting some monsters that he shouldn’t have. Anyways right now we are on our way to a friend of Bob’s to get him fixed up and I hate the delay. He leads us into a march area where there are a lot of Drakon bones and I instantly know where we are and want to get out of here as soon as possible.
“Damasen should be just a few more meters away.” Bob says and at that I stop. Eric notices first interrupting Annabeth while she is asking Bob a question.
“Percy why did you stop?” Eric asks.
“Sorry guys but I didn’t come down here to meet various friends of Bob, I have my own schedule to keep within Tartarus and will meet you when you reach the Doors of Death.” I tell them then leave. Eric tries to protest but I just teleport away to Nyx house, which looks as gloomy as ever. Of course not realizing who I am her servants instantly attack me. I just stand there and huff in annoyance. I then yell out Nyx name as she instantly appears since she recognizes my voice. She orders her servants to stop and she gives me a hug.
“Percy what are you doing down here?” She asks me.
“I came down here to close the doors of death and beat up Tartarus for letting them be opened in the first place.” I say and she lets out a sigh.
“Percy, Tartarus isn’t the same anymore. He has changed a lot it seems like he has been possessed or something.” Nyx says.
“What do you mean he has changed?” I ask.
“He has become more crazy and out of control.” She says. I knew that it was going to happen one day but not right now. I really hate my primordial relatives.
“I have come by to not only say hello but to also have a wardrobe change since I kind of scream demigod not prince of universe.” I say and all the servants instantly drop down on one knee which I hate and tell them to rise. Nyx only smirks but guides me to my room. It is the total opposite of the others; this one is all black, white, and grey. I walk over to the closet and get changed into a pair of black combat boots, navy blue jeans a black tank top, and a navy blue leather jacket. I then strap my two swords onto my sides and put a thin silver band on my head with various symbols and spells around it. Ready to go to Tartarus I head back down to the foyer where Nyx is waiting for me. When she sees me she just shakes her head.
“You are becoming more like Thalia and dad day by day if you keep dressing up all in black, although you are the only one to love combat things.” She says.
“I can’t help it, combat clothes are just very handy and the strange love of the color black just seems to run in the family.” I say motioning to her outfit.
“You are right about that.” She says. I give her a hug and my goodbye.
“Before I leave, there are two demigods that are heading for your palace as we speak, give them a little show but let them pass. As a favor to me.” I say and she reluctantly nods her head. With that done I set out on into the depth of the pit to set things right. Along the way no one attacks me as they are all either hiding in fear of me or out of respect not wanting to die. I still hate the pit with its gloomy atmosphere and the treacherous land stretched out before me. After what seems like forever I finally reach Tartarus palace and the guards at the doors are two giants who don’t look friendly but then again which giants ever do. They are about to block my path but see the outfit and crown on my head and let me in.

When I walk into the throne room I instantly see all the battle maps on various tables around the room and other giants and titans talking rapidly to Tartarus who seems to be looking at the maps. Before the announcer can announce that I’m here I had already taken care of him. I waltz into the throne room making my presence known by spiking my energy. Tartarus looks up and smiles when he sees me and I give him a smile back.
“Percy what a pleasure to see you here.” Tartarus says while he has a smile on his face and while the giants have a frown on their faces.
“Good to see you too. I came here to find out if you are still willing to give me that champion of the pit title and blessing.” I say and instantly Tartarus gets an even bigger smile on his face.
“So you are willing to become a dark angel and also my champion.” Tartarus says.
“In that way yes but with the condition to get the full power. No limit brake on it or other restriction.” I say and Tartarus nods his head. Knowing that there is no time to fight in the pits again he just does the chant in the old language. I close my eyes and focus on a point that keeps me grounded and not become the dark monster that I have to pretend to be to please Tartarus and cleanse him of the dark curse that the giants and my dear sister put him under. I envision Thalia and as the blast hits me I send her a message. “Come save me Thalia, rescue me from the dark angel,” I then feel her struggling and give her strength and hope. Not only to rescue me with the love that twins have but also to tell her that I’ll be just fine. When the blast stops I know that I have transformed into something dark and monstrous as it is trying to take over me, but I shove that monster out of me so that I have full control. When I open my eyes I give Tartarus a nice cruel smile to show that it worked. With that done we make our way to the Doors of Death to stop 2 demigods.

Thalia’s P.O.V

It was decided that Frank, Hazel and Nico will venture into the city to return the book. Nico who knows how to speak Italian was instantly made leader. It made him feel a little weird. Even before we had landed in a secluded place in Venice we saw that the city was infested with katoblepones which are anteater like monsters who exhale poison. I tell the members to be careful before they venture out. It takes a while but they finally return telling us what had happened. Once we have restocked on some supplies we head south down the Adriatic towards Greece and nearing the doors of death. When we reach the coast of Croatia we are waylaid by a bandit called Scrion. He is a man who makes people wash his feet then kicks them of the cliff feeding them to a giant predatory sea turtle so that the turtle can devour them. He lures Piper, Hazel and I off the ship and up towards him. Once Hazel starts washing his feet I use the mist to make him think that he is kicking her inland instead of off the cliff. She jumps out of the way before he can actually kick her off. Piper is holding back his entourage; and Hazel using her momentum pushes Sciron of the cliff and feeds him to the turtle. Pluto appears and is glad that the monster is finally in his domain after sending so many innocent souls down to the underworld. He tells us that the Doors of Death are at the lowest level of the Necromanteion in the temple of Hades in Epirus. It is also guarded by Pasiphae a Cretan sorceress.

Heading back to the ship we thank Pluto and instantly tell the crew our heading. We all go and do our own things not really wanting to sleep. Jason and Piper head below deck, soon enough Frank, Hazel, and Leo follow them leaving Nico and I to watch the ship. I look at the stars just wishing that Percy was here with me. Nico feeling my loneliness comes to stand beside me.
“He will be alright.” Nico says.
“Yah I know but I still worry about him. Sometimes he doesn’t think before he acts and gets into the stupidest things.” I tell him and Nico smiles. I feel somewhat better and as the sun rises above the horizon Jason wants to head to Diocletian’s tomb to get his scepter in the hopes that it will help in the upcoming fight at the Doors of Death. After some debating it is decided to head there. Jason, Nico and I head inside and find that we are not alone. We are confronted by Favonius Roman god of the west wind and Cupid the Roman god of love. I personally hate Cupid since he always interferes with everyone’s love life sometimes I think he is worse then Aphrodite. In order to pass them and get the scepter Cupid extorts a confession from Nico and I as a price to get the scepter. I go fist and confess that I want to continue being on the hunt and not return to my princess responsibilities on Etnotopia and Nico confesses that he is gay and may have had a little crush on both Percy and Eric and I let out a little giggle and Jason just looks really uncomfortable. Before we head out with the scepter Jason leaves a note for Reyna in how to find us.

Continuing on towards Greece the weather starts to get unseasonably and mysteriously cool and cloudy. It seems like that a god or goddess has a hand in this and I am right. A little while later Khione the goddess of snow appears and glares at Jason, Piper and Leo. They pull out there swords and get ready to fight against them. I pull out my bow and arrows since Percy took my sword. I draw an arrow and wait for her to attack. It is a quick move for the demigods but not for me. I let the arrow fly just as Khione sends a blast of ice towards Piper and Jason hitting them square in the chest and sending him flying of the boat. A few seconds later Khione summons a huge snowstorm and blasts Leo of with the Argo 2. A minute later my arrow hits Khione square in the chest. I know that Leo is now with Calypso. It would take a while until he returns and until that happens we have other buisness to take care off.

With Khione taken care of we proceed on our journey but Jason and Piper are still a little shocked and upset that we had lost Leo. It was nice though without him here. As we get closer to the shores of Greece, Jason has daily audiences with Auster, Roman god of the south wind so that we can proceed on our way to Epirus. After a few days of negotiations Auster seems more and more declined in helping us. It’s not just this news that ruins the mood but also the fact that everyone hasn’t been back at camp in a long while the homesickness has been very high and everyone is missing their home and are wondering if it is alright. Even Jason admitted that he misses camp half-blood and that he never really fit into camp Jupiter. The next day Auster finally agrees to see him but he plays a trick on him and makes him admit that his heart now lies in Camp Half-Blood.

Once Jason has admitted that Auster changes into his Greek part, Notus and decides to send the quest members on their way. We then proceed to Valletta where we find the Argo 2 fully repaired docked in the harbor. Knowing that we all can’t wait to find Leo in the city somewhere. We were right, a few meters away from the harbor we find Leo sitting at a café. He is happy to see us and tells us about his meeting with Calypso. After a few chatters we continue onto Epirus. We arrive in Necromanteion where we descend into the ruins and eat weird barley cakes to protect us from the toxic potion that me must drink later in order to enter the temple. As we enter the cavern an earthquake strikes and I use my powers to keep the earthquake at bay. As we walk further into the cavern monsters assail us. Nico uses the scepter of Diocletian to summon ghostly roman soldiers but we are having trouble controlling them as Jason has given up his roman side and only some obey Frank since he is not a centurion. After a huge fight between Frank and Jason I interfere and as princess of the universe command Jason to give his praetorship to Frank so that we have a chance of survival. Frank then takes control of all the undead soldiers and defeats the monsters.

Percy’s P.O.V

The rows and rows of monsters part for us as Tartarus and I make our way towards the doors of death. I loathe doing it this way but there is absolutely no other way then to bring back Tartarus by fighting him where he is most easily wounded. He was taken over by Gaea and as much as I hate to admit it I need this extra power boost just without the demon now sitting inside my head wanting to take over if I don’t keep it at bay and before I ensue in my fight with Tartarus I have to kick that monster out of my mind. It would still be a while until Eric and Annabeth show up and by that time everything had to be ready. Hyperion bellows for us the moment he spotted Tartarus approaching. By that time I had already changed into my prince of the universe outfit with the whole nines. My black jeans, black dress shirt, black and silver cape, silver crown and my two swords at my side, not to mention my black combat boots infused with celestic bronze, imperial gold, and chaos silver which do some real damage when someone receives a roundhouse kick or just a stomp on the foot. I wear my signature smirk and arrogance as I walk through the ranks of monsters bowing at my feet, normally I would tell people not to do that but I can’t do it here.

I won’t dare show my true power or I might as well wipe out the whole entire pit. I will only do that if it’s absolutely necessary. Once Tartarus steps out of the way and Hyperion sees me the color of his face instantly drains and in the fastest way possible I see him dropping to the floor in a deep bow. The rest of the giants instantly follow his lead. Only when I’m sure he can see my boots do I tell him in the most uninterested way possible kiss my boots. He does so a little reluctantly but after he does I tell him to get up. He gulps but then regains his composure and begins to explain to Tartarus how he is letting the monsters go up in shifts by color and number, that they have only one third of the army on the top, and that it will take another three days for all the monsters to get out since the ride is twelve minutes each way. Tartarus just nods his head and isn’t really listening. Meanwhile I scan the crowds my right hand on Reaper, as not to be suspicious I have a relaxed posture.

All the monsters are tense as I have my hand on my sword as I scan the crowd. I am the first to spot him walking through the crowd of various monsters, then everyone else does too. Iapetus is coming towards us with a cat sitting on his shoulder, but no sign of Eric and Annabeth. I look closer and see weird mist swirling around in the front of Bob trying really hard not to touch anyone. I let my eyes turn into my chaos eyes something that only a few beings in this universe can do that see through all kinds of mists. Turns out that Annabeth and Eric are hidden by death mist, the second strongest besides Chaos mist, that I haven’t learned yet but will soon. I know that Tartarus can see that mist too so I take it upon me to distract him by focusing on the one person that we can all see.
“Well look who decided to show up. If it isn’t Iapetus himself.” I say loudly and with a bored voice so that Hyperion, Coeus and his fellow giants can hear me. It worked since he instantly looks up from his charts and maps.
“Iapetus, brother I thought that you were otherwise occupied.” Hyperion says.
“I was but I decided that it was time to help out my fellow giants again.” He says sounding very convincing. It seems to work since they are instantly in a conversation about brotherhood and other things. I try to find Eric and Annabeth and see them sneaking towards the doors of death right into the line of sight of Tartarus who always has his Chaos eyes out so that he can see through any kind of mist. Now is my time to act, I first go inside of me summoning the energy that it takes to kick the demon out of my body, it takes a few minutes but then I’m free of him and only have the powers left. Then I summon all the energy that it is going to take to fight the demon of the pit. Having to take on Tartarus isn’t going to be easy. Yes I always duel him on Etnotopia but I have managed to beat him only a few times. I turn towards Tartarus and slowly draw out my swords and turn towards him. All the monsters instantly take a few steps back as I let my crown and cape vanish into thin air and replace my black shirt with a silver muscle shirt with the mark of chaos on the back. Tartarus looks surprised but doesn’t try to get out of it. Instead he complies and makes his sword appear. We stand of for a few minutes just letting our power build up to the point where the ground is starting to shake at the sheer power we are letting out. I then suck all the energy back into my body and launch myself at Tartarus who is caught off guard and barely has time to block the attack.

My goal here isn’t to defeat Tartarus but just get him out of his domain then once back on earth teleport him up to Etnotopia and let dad undo the mind control. As Iapetus works to get to the doors and Damasen appears out of nowhere to help as I push Tartarus further and further towards the doors of death. I see Eric and Annabeth cut through the chains holding the door in place and wait until they are in the elevator just as the death mist disappears and they are sensed by all the monsters nearby. But it is too late with one last push and one last blow I have Tartarus in the elevator and tell them to push the button and just hope that the others are here. With that Annabeth screams that the giants have to come with us but before she can get back out of the elevator I put a body bind around her and prevent her from helping them. She turns on me with a mad stare but all I keep doing is keeping Tartarus knocked out. When the doors open there is hectic going on. Leo’s screwdriver is lying under the button of the elevator, Thalia and Jason are fighting Pasiphae while the others are trying to keep the monsters at bay. Hazel uses the mist to get Eric and Annabeth out while I heave Tartarus out and teleport him away to Etnotopia then I help Thalia with Pasiphae while, Hecate who appears takes care of Clytius.

Before the elevator can go back down I throw Pasiphae into it just as Nico manages to make the chains appear by creating a crack in the floor. I use my two swords to cut through them then just like that the Doors of Death disappear. We turn towards Clytius who is being cremated alive with Hecate’s torch. Before Hecate disappears she warns us to leave quickly as the ruins have become very unstable. We won’t make it back by running so I gather everyone around and make sure that everyone holds on tight, then I tell Nico and Hazel to shadow travel us out of here. I help them along but let Nico direct us since I don’t know where the Argo 2 is. We appear on a hillside outside the temple with the ship hovering overhead. In that moment I have a figure of black engulf me and hit me at the same time. Getting a closer look I know that it is Thalia and I hug her back as well. When we break apart she slaps me and says that if I ever do something like that again she will kill me herself then she asks me if I’m alright or if I still have the monster inside of me. I agree but am happy that I am back in the world of the living and I tell her that I kicked the monster out but kept the power. Leo then screams up at Hedge to land the ship so that we can come aboard.

Thalia and I don’t join the quest members but rather teleport to Etnotopia so that we can tell our parents that I’m back and find out what has become of Tartarus. We land in the throne room and I am instantly tackled by mom who is happy that I am me again but most importantly not in Tartarus. Dad is sitting in his throne and has a solemn expression on his face and is talking to someone in the middle. I walk to the middle of the throne room and see that Tartarus is in chaos silver chains while the healers are trying to get the virus that is inside of him out.
“Percy do you know what exactly he has been poisoned with?” Dad asks but I shake my head. Then dad gives a go on sign and the healer pours a multicolored concoction down his throat which doesn’t seem to taste good. It takes a while but Tartarus soon snaps out of whatever spell he was under and begins to explain how it happened. In the end Chaos tells him that he is under house arrest and that he will be under surveillance till the war ends. Tartarus agrees so dad teleports him to his room. With that done I tell mom and dad everything I have experienced in the pit and what is going on down there. In the end dad says nothing more than we will see and teleports us back to earth without further explanation. It must of have hit him hard having three of his kids out of his reach. We return to earth to see a meal being set up on the mountain side and everyone being glad that Eric and Annabeth are back.

I know that I owe them an explanation but not now. Not when everyone is happy to be reunited again. Nico is the first to see us and runs over happily and the rest soon follow. Soon enough we all sit around a large table. I see Reyna sitting with Jason and Frank knowing that they have a lot to explain. As everyone digs into the food the fate we talk about the fate of the Athena pantheon. After a little debate it is decided that Nico, Reyna, and Hedge will shadow travel back to camp so that peace can happen between the Romans and Greeks. Before the group head out I bless Nico with a little power boost so that he can make the long journey across the Atlantic without dying. As the sun sets the three members and one giant statue head out while the rest of us continue on towards Athena. Three of us are haunted by nightmares from the pit, and the others having demigod dreams about what is to come.

Chapter Text

Percy’s P.O.V

As we make our way towards the original Olympus one thing is clear and that is, that things aren’t going to get easy. Almost every night I wake up drenched in sweat because of my dream of Tartarus. They aren’t as bad as the nightmares that Eric and Annabeth are suffering from though. But they are still gruesome; the nightmares are mostly from the demon that was inside of me. I haven’t told Thalia yet but I have a strange suspicion that she already knows but is waiting for me to say something. Right now I am leaning on the railing of the Argo II watching Jason, Piper, and Annabeth infiltrate Odysseus Palace. At first I wanted to go but the thought of being around evil spirits quickly changed my mind. So the three members disguised by Hazels power over the mist left to do whatever they needed to get done. I don’t know why they didn’t ask Thalia or I with the mist help, so instead we had made a bet after they left. I bet that on the slim chance of them winning that I would clean her room at home and she said that if the plan failed I would have to help them. I hated the bet but here I am standing on the railing and watching them. I really hoped that they would succeed since Thalia’s room really needs to be cleaned and you can’t call her a tidy person.

After a few minutes of quite all hell breaks loose in the palace and I inwardly groan and Thalia has a grin on her face. Giving her a glare I teleport to the front door and don’t even bother knocking and just use my foot to catapult the door inward. It somehow manages to hit a few spirits and they instantly flee. When I survey the room there is hell going on. Jason has been stabbed again, Piper trying to help him and Annabeth is holding of the spirits. I really don’t know how Jason got to be Praetor of New Rome since he keeps getting hurt on this quest. Shaking my head I join the fight and slash through spirit after spirit. I am beginning to hate them and really want to punish Gaea for this. As I am in the middle of the fight there is a loud crack silencing the room and stopping all the fighting, looking around I see Juno appears telling us very quickly that we have to find the Goddess of Victory and stop her rampage, then Apollo and Artemis who are hiding from Jupiter after making him mad, she then disappears before uncle has any chance to find her. After she leaves, Jason passes out and all hell breaks loose again. I mind link Thalia to tell her we need a quick exit and Frank comes shooting down from the ship in huge eagle form to bring Jason back to the ship and I yell at Piper to go with him at first she wants to help me but after a bit of convincing she finally does. I run over to Annabeth slicing spirits in half on my way there. I then grab her around the waist let out my wings and push off into the sky leaving a creator where I stood before. I then summon a huge fire ball and incinerate the rest of the spirits and also say sorry to Odysseus for destroying his palace.

Once we land on the Argo II, I demand answers from Annabeth who tells me that Gaea has poisoned one of the quest members and the only cure is the Physicians cure that we will never get, also that Apollo no longer has control over Delphi and thus the Oracle is useless and that Nike is running rampant, then Beryl, Jason’s mom appeared and broke the spell then all hell broke loose and that’s when I came in. The news about one of us being poisoned and Delphi not being in our control is bad, we can handle Victory, but it seems that Jason somehow always manages to screw things up, one way or another. I take a breath and look over to where Thalia is helping Piper tend to a passed out Jason, after they got the bleeding to stop by force feeding his Ambrosia and Nectar they take him into the infirmary. I call for a meeting and tell everyone to meet in the dining room on thirty. Before that I go find Leo who has been working on something that may help us, after looking around for a bit I find him in the engine room. Once I arrive he shows me this new weapon, as I take a closer look I see that they are tiny bees each filled with greek fire. He shows me that they detonate when landing on a monster, only causing harm to them since it’s such a small dose of fire. It is a brilliant idea and I tell him that we might also want to use shadow and chaos fire both of which I possess. He instantly smiles at that and gets to the drawing board. Before he can get any deeper into it I tell him that we have a meeting to attend and he groans at the news but joins me in going to the dining room. We join the others minus Jason who are already seated around the table eating some food.
“Our first order is to stop Nike from doing something stupid.” I say.
“So that means going towards Olympia and trying to find her in a huge city.” Eric says.
“Once we are in Olympia which demigods would go look and which ones should stay on the ship?” Hazel asks.
“We need to send people who won’t try to outdo each other.” Thalia says.
“Then it makes the most sense to send Frank, Hazel, and Piper.” I say.
“I can’t, I have to tend to Jason’s wounds how about Leo instead.” Piper says talking herself out of it.
“No Leo doesn’t work, he as to do some more work here on the ship, so we still need one more person.” Thalia says.
“How about you Percy, since you are the best at showing no emotion what so ever.” Annabeth says in a sneer turning towards me. I think she still hates me for the stuff I did down in Tartarus. I don’t really want to go but after Thalia agrees with Annabeth and they block of all my ways of getting out of it I agree.

Once we land in Olympia, Hazel, Frank and I are looking through the ruins. After we searched through all the ruins and don’t find any sign of Nike, we decide to walk around and wait for something to happen. After nothing happening, Hazel comes up with the idea to look around for statues of Nike. Our first destination is an old temple of Zeus. Once we find what is left of the statue with a few well-chosen words from me to provoke the goddess to come out by saying that Adidas shoes are better than Nike shoes, it was the only thing that I could come up with on the spot but it worked. When she appears we find that both sides are fighting, sometimes her Greek side is present and sometimes her Roman. It makes me wonder if all gods are having that problem and the urgency to travel to Olympus is getting greater. After coaxing the Nike side out of her she challenges us to fight to the death. I block of my mind and shield the others so that we can pretend to kill each other. Nike then blabbers something about that this place isn’t worthy of a fight and seeks an arena and gives us four minutes to be there. To make sure that we don’t kill each other we come up with a plan to trick her without killing. To make sure that we come, Nike sends metal statues after us which we easily avoid and four minutes later we stand in the arena that she has chosen for us to fight in. After a bit of pretend play, Nike grows restless and demands result. Hazel then uses her powers to control the underground and the power of Archimedes sphere to disappear and find her way over to Nike, while we boys continue our battle. We distract Nike long enough that she isn’t focused on Hazel anymore who at that moment pops up behind her and using a rope that is lying around ties her up cowboy style. After we make sure that she is secure Nike starts trashing and shouting about how we will never get the Physicians cure in time, and we still don’t know who will die. To stop her from shouting Frank takes off one of his socks and sticks it into her mouth stopping her from shouting and we take her with us to the Argo 2.

Nico’s P.O.V

Travelling with a huge statue through the shadows with two other occupants isn’t easy, neither is when you as the guide accidentally fall asleep and are now plummeting from the sky above Mount Vesuvius at a hundred miles per hour trying to bend the shadow to stop you from falling and your two companions screaming at you to hurry up. The only thing is that my energy is wavering even with the blessing that Percy gave me it is still not enough. Reyna finally lends me her strength which is a special ability only the kids of the goddess Bellona have so that I can put us down. With the added help I easily pull the shadows around us and aim for the ground and with a somewhat soft landing we are in a forest that is close to Pompeii. Exhausted I slide of the statue and just lie on the ground for a few minutes breathing deep breaths. After a few moments of lying still I get up and we get ready to set up camp. Hedge who has designated himself as our protector takes watch while Reyna and I pass out in the tents thoughtfully provided by Thalia which are also full of food. After eating a little to gain back strength used and drinking some Nectar I pass out on my cot. Also thanks to Percy’s blessing not that many demigod dreams have been hounding my nights or the nightmares of Tartarus that I sometimes get and I sleep somewhat peaceful. I know that I have slept for a solid 12 hours since its sunset when I wake up. As I step outside I can feel the heavy mist around us and instantly know that its coming for the Pantheon another reason that get that thing over to camp quickly. Once I sit down by the fire and start to eat Reyna tells me about a dream that she had.

It took her to Octavian and the legion settled outside Camp Half-Blood. Octavian had personally taken the highest title of Pontifex Maximus which no demigod has ever done. Octavian’s fellow centurion Mike Kahale, and the eagle bearer Jacob stand beside him listening to him reinstate Bryce Lawrence, a legacy of Orcus who was banished from camp for killing a centurion and other crimes. Then when Reyna got a closer look Octavian had an army mostly of two dozen different murders, thrives and traitors. Mike disagrees with Octavian about that and about attacking Camp Half-Blood against the orders of Reyna but Octavian is convinced about eliminating the Greeks and that with it the war will be over. As she is done telling me this I can’t help but wonder if we aren’t already too late and that when they get there the whole camp will be destroyed. She then says something about a giant but all I can think about is saving the camp and stop the destruction of the safe place for demigods. Once I snap out of my thought Hedge and Reyna say that fighting will be the best option and that Reyna will contact the Amazons for help. I consider contacting Thalia to ask the hunters but since she is on the Argo2 the chances of them helping us are slim. Reyna then decides to work out the details until the next jump which will hopefully take us across the ocean. As we are sitting down to eat, Hedge becomes very stiff and soon Gaea’s voice comes forth and taunts us by saying that we are going to be too late, of course we don’t believe her and she gets upset about that and out of the fog come multiple earthen ghosts. As they attack Reyna quickly tells me to get Diocletian’s Scepter so then she can command the dead legionnaires since she is a praetor. I concentrate on the power source of the Scepter then shadow travel to the place it resides. Quickly grabbing it I travel back and give her the scepter and Reyna easily controls the legionnaires but we were still out numbered. We knock out Hedge strap him on and I strap myself in with Reyna being the last one. I gather up the shadows around us and we plummet into darkness. I make it all the way to Évora, Portugal before taking a break making sure that there is at least a little distance between us and Gaea. Hedge soon wakes up and wonders how we got here and also wondering why his head hurt so much but otherwise he is back to his normal self. We decide not to tell him that he hosted Gaea for a few minutes or that Reyna knocked him unconscious with his own baseball bat. We eat some food then decide to go to bed, again Hedge takes watch and I just crash. After only a few hours of sleep Hedge wakes me up and says that a spirit has been wandering around us for a few minutes now demanding to talk to me. I approach the spirit and she takes me to a chapel, where Hades is waiting. Hades thanks the girl then sends her back wherever she came from.
“Hey dad, what are you doing here?” I ask.
“I wanted to tell you, that Orion has escaped from the underworld and is contracted by Gaea to hunt you down.” Hades says.
“That can’t be good.” I say.
“What’s worse is that he has already scented your group and it’s only a matter of time before he finds you.” Hades says and it will be an almost impossible task to shake of Orion since he is such an experienced hunter. I thank dad for the news then head back to the camp, just as I am about to tell them to pack up, we are surrounded by wolves and out comes Lycaon. Knowing that we can’t win we hold them off while slowly backing up to the statue. In the last meters we run, Reyna and Hedge hold on while I gather enough strength to travel across the Atlantic Ocean.

Percy’s P.O.V

Right now we are on the Port of Pylos looking for the poison which is like trying to find a needle in a stack of straw. Frank, Piper and I almost give up looking till we make our way down to Nestor’s cave after Piper charmspeaks some old ghost into telling us. Frank goes in alone and explains that his cousin another descendant of Periclymenus has been living there for generations. They talk for a while but he finally emerges with the vile of poison in his hand. He seems to have found other valuable information but will only tell us once we are back on the Argo2. It takes a while but once we are back on the ship Frank says that Ares is the chained god, mostly because the Spartans believed that if they chain him up, the spirit of war will never leave them. Eric then says that they should continue this conversation once we are in the air since a sea serpent is checking out the ship. Leo quickly runs towards the controls and gets the ship up in the air. He has been very distracted lately and I keep wondering if it’s because he was on Ogygia and may have fallen in love with Calypso like so many others have, that he has sworn to get her out. He doesn’t want anyone to know but I have been secretly spying on him and occasionally helping out when no one was around so that he could rescue her. Knowing that we are en-route to Mykonos and it will still take a while, I teleport myself to my room on Camp Half-Blood then use the door to travel to Olympus and knock some sense back into Uncle Zeus.

As I walk along the streets of Olympus it is very deserted and the few spirits and minor gods I do see hide very quickly from my sight. Getting closer to the throne room I hear the shouts of yelling and arguing and let out a long sigh. I thought that they had changed but I guess sending Thalia and I to Camp Half-Blood wasn’t such a good idea after all. I transform into my prince outfit, open the throne room doors with my magic and step inside to the bickering council.
“Will you all shut up and take a seat.” I yell which startles most of them. They look at me but after a few minutes they take a seat.
“I already wondered why you would shut down Olympus, then we get sent on this suicide mission from Chaos, then you are mad at Artemis and Apollo but what takes the cake is you chasing down all gods just so you can control them and wait till Gaea falls back asleep.” I say directly looking at Zeus.
“So what, I am king of Olympus I can make that decision.” He says.
“That doesn’t give you the right at all.” I yell slowly losing my nerve.
“What do you suggest we do?” He asks.
“Help us out, open up Olympus and when we fight against the Giants and Gaea. We can’t do it alone.” I say and after a moment of silence Zeus agrees.
“One more thing, when we find Artemis and Apollo, you will apologies for whatever you have done.” I say and it takes a nudge from Hera for him to agree to it. Satisfied I decide to have a nice long sleep knowing that the quest members will be alright without me for a while. I take a nice long stroll and enjoy the for once quite night. Standing out overlooking the skyline of New York a few things go through my head, just thinking about what is to come and why my sister decided to take revenge. It was already bad that Tartarus joined in and hopefully no more will join. Waiting a little while longer I head to Poseidon’s palace and crash out on my bed in my room.

In the morning I wake up to someone shaking me furiously. I open one eye to see dad trying to wake me up, just turning around I dig myself deeper into my bed. The next moment I am soaking wet and sit upright in bed. I growl at dad but get up anyways.
“You have to go back to your quest members Percy.” Dad says.
“Can’t I wait a while longer?” I ask.
“No you can’t, they just fought of Kymopoleia, then Eric and Jason descended to the sea floor to the ruins of my original palace.” He says.
“Still don’t see the point of me going back.” I say.
“Eric was caught in a net by Polybotes, and Jason is in the process of getting him out and they need your help.” Dad says and I groan, flashing on my cloths and teleporting on board of the Argo 2 and just as I arrive, Jason and Eric emerge from the ocean. I mentally curse dad and promise him that there will be a prank coming. Since I am already here there is no point in going back to sleep so I decide to stay. We proceed to Mykonos, and to the island of Delos. Frank, Leo and I step on the island to find Apollo and Artemis and I hope that Zeus will hold his promise. We find out that the twins are trapped on the island and that the Oracle stopped working because the ancient Python is now coiled in the caverns of Delphi blocking the spirit. While the twins explain the situation Leo is playing with various things and end up making a music-making gadget for Apollo, in exchange Leo asks him to give him a daisy picked by the god from the soil of Delphi so that we can obtain the physicians cure from Asclepius. Apollo gladly gives us the flower and after he has done that I summon Zeus so that he can apologize to the twins so that they can get of the island and get ready to fight the giants with all the other gods. With our buisness completed we head of to Sparta.

Chapter Text

Reyna’s P.O.V

We are being hunted by Orion and after landing in my old home town of San Juan, I get abducted by the amazons and hunters all so that I can talk with Hylla and Zoe about what we are going to do about Orion. We decide to lay a trap for him, but we receive news that he has come to our front door and is itching for a fight. We yell at everyone to gear up and get ready to battle and not soon enough since the hunter is making his way towards us. A few hunters and amazons who are trying to stop him are flung away or shot by arrows and are instantly dead. Zoe stands at the ready with a black bow that I have seen on Percy before, but I don’t see any arrows and she just draws back her string and an arrow appears. She aims and lets it fly and a huge explosion happens as soon as the arrow hits. With the confusion that is happening Hylla takes me and we escape to our father’s house which brings back bad memories but I push them down telling myself that I have to stay focused.

Orion catches us outside the building and Hylla pushed me behind her. I try to help out but all she keep saying is that I should get out of here and finish my mission. With that she summons the power of Bellona our mother and attacks the hunter. I reluctantly leave her to battle him and run towards our camp site. Once I reach the boys I am glad they haven’t unpacked yet and I quickly tell them to put everything back on the statue and that we have to get out of here because Orion is after us. Without a moment’s hesitation they get ready and soon we are ready to leave. We plunge into the shadow and all I see are the ghosts of my ancestors calling me a coward, traitor and murderer. I shut out the voices and just concentrate on completing the mission at hand. Nico manages to get us to a small town in South Carolina called Charlotte. We only unpack the necessity items and set up a small camp, once we are seated Nico asks me why my ancestors called me that. I didn’t want to tell him the full version, so I say the basic items. That my father was a war veteran with PTSD who somehow managed to get the attention of Bellona, that after she left him with us, he deteriorated mentally and eventually became violent, abusive and eventually to protect myself I defended Hylla from him and killed him with an imperial gold saber that belonged to Roberto Cofresi.

Nico tries to cheer me up, but it fails when Bryce Lawrence comes out of the bushes, summoning a horde of undead British soldiers and yelling at me that I am a traitor and that he will force me to tell the story and that he will execute me himself in front of the Roman Legionnaires. The warriors pin down Hedge and me while totally ignoring Nico, I want to give him the power of Bellona again but he uses his own power to destroy the undead soldiers and killing Bryce by stabbing him in the back, turning him into a ghost and directly sending him directly to the fields of punishment. He commands the undead warriors to return to the underworld and with a bow and a salute they all do as they are told and Nico faints. After three days he finally wakes up and thanks to Hedge we got some Pegasis and even the mighty Pegasus himself to get us the rest of the way to Camp Half-Blood.

Nico’s P.O.V

We land upon the deck of a yacht just a few feet away from camp. I thank the Pegasis and Pegasus for the lift and they fly away. Once we step of the yacht we are instantly confronted by Michael Kahale, Dakota and Leila who want to arrest us and take us to Octavian. They seem like they don’t want to do the task at all. Before they can take one step further a bright light shines on us coming from a boat. A voice sounding strangely like Octavian’s tells the three to stand down and lay down their weapons. Then a large figure jumps of the boat turning out to be Tyson knocking out Michael. I smile in relieve as I see him. Reyna stops him from knocking out the other two who instantly tell us that they are on our side and that they don’t like what Octavian is doing. With no time to spare I quickly summon my undead chauffeur that dad gave me for my birthday so that Dakota, Leila, Hedge, and Reyna can go to camp with all out stuff so that I have less things to carry while maneuvering the statue to its final place. With them gone I tell Tyson to hurry back to camp and to stop them from attacking anytime soon. He nods his head, quickly going back to his boat and sailing away. I then hop onto the statue and shadow travel the rest of the way. When I emerge out of the shadow by Half-Blood hill I see a riot was started amongst the romans that distracted them enough. Close to the shore Reyna is fighting Orion which means he must of have defeated Hylla and the rest of the hunters. For Orion’s sake I hope Zoe is alive otherwise Percy will resurrect him and kill him over and over again. Octavian is trying desperately to get his legion under order but fails, I then see Will Solace, Lou Ellen and Cecil Tamper with the onagers making them unusable. Before a proper fight can start Reyna comes and helps me with the Athena Parthenos and both of us manage to set it down beside Thalia’s Pine Tree. We feel a shift in the air and know that the rift between Greeks and Romans has been healed and that the gods can now help the quest members. After the shift there is a huge earthquake that is taking on a shape.

Percy’s P.O.V

We arrive in Sparta where Annabeth and Piper visit the ancient Spartan temple of Phobos and Deimos gods of fear and terror and the sons of Ares. In front of the temple they find Mimas the Giant created to oppose Hephaestus. In order to defeat him the two must chose to get the aid of fear or terror. After a moment of consideration they choose fear and embrace the passion that is love and fear, by doing so they manage to defeat Mimas and obtain the makhai, the spirits of fear and anger. With all the ingredients gathered to make the Physicians cure we make our way to Epidaurus where the temple of Asclepius lies. Leo, Jason, and I manage to get past the menacing automaton guarding his office, by playing a simple game of distract, and occupy. Once inside Asclepius doesn’t look happy but we bring him the ingredients and using my prince of the universe card we convince him to make the Physicians cure for Leo who we found out had the curse through a dream.

Before we leave he gives Jason a medical exam and finds out that he needs glasses since he is near sightedness which explains a lot. I am the last one out the door and before I exit Asclepius warns me that Gaea wants to use my pure blood to awake her with the help of Annabeth and Eric, that I should also watch out what powers I use since some can be turned against me. I only give him a slight nod and follow the others back on board where Leo instantly disappears down below. Hazel and Frank finally tell us that he is using Festus to try and rescue Calypso from her island by sacrificing himself and using the cure to bring him back to life. I shake my head at what love can do to people and instantly have to think about Zoe and what she is doing right now, which reminds me that I still have to give her back her sword and connection to the sea. But for now I push the thought out of my head and instead focus on the task at hand. We need to reach Athens and destroy the Giants before they can use our blood to resurrect Gaea and make sure her spirit is sent back to Etnotopia so the family can deal with her punishment.

We reach Athens in no time and are led to the Acropolis by Kekrops, the ancient half-snake king of Athens who once we reach the Acropolis promptly betrays us to the Giants waiting inside. Someone should have seen this coming but I guess no one was thinking ahead. We all pull out our weapons and quickly get ready to fight. It isn’t easy and without the help of the gods the demigods can’t make it. Thalia and I may have primordial blood and may be half immortal but even for us it isn’t easy to defeat all these Giants. I look over towards Annabeth and Eric to see Annabeth get a cut across her leg deep enough for blood to spill onto the earth which is instantly absorbed, by her cry of pain Eric gets distracted and one of the giants hits him making his nose bloody and before he can stop the blood from flowing down a drop from his chin hits the ground. I curse at that since now all they need are a few drops of my blood to make her rise fully but for now it is enough to awaken her and cause a little destruction to the camp. Then when all seems lost the gods appear and I know that Nico and Reyna made it to camp Half-Blood and repaired the rift. Every god pairs up with their child and takes on the bane that opposes them. Thalia and I help out the gods that don’t have demigod children here. I go together with uncle Hades at first and together we make quick work of Alcyoneus, then I move on to help with someone else. Thalia is helping Artemis and Apollo with Orion. Thankfully with everyone we defeat the giants with only minimal injuries that Apollo quickly heals.

With this done it only leaves Gaea to deal with, who according to Zeus she has actually risen at camp. With a little bickering it is decided that Zeus is going to literally slap the ship back to Long Island with the campers on it. Not wanting to die today Thalia and I decide to teleport since it seems much safer. Once the campers have boarded the ship, we tell them to close their eyes while Zeus transforms into his godly from. Once he has done that he lifts up the ship and lets it hover in the air then moves his hand back and takes a swing. Once his hand connects with the ship it flies across the ocean and straight towards camp, I am so glad that I am not on that. Thalia and I say bye to the gods and teleport there. We have a silent agreement that we will let the demigods think that they defeated Gaea when she is weak I’ll sneak up from behind and teleport her to Etnotopia where she will be dealt with permanently and Thalia will get someone to think they landed the killing blow. When we look down to the camp there is literal chaos going on. I see the Argo2 disintegrate while landing and the members landing in the lake, all except Leo who rides in on Festus while also letting out the bees that he and I have been working on and they instantly descend on the monster army and explosions soon ring out upon the battlefield and leave piles of golden dust lying around everywhere. He of course heads straight to Gaea engaging her in a fight. Jason and Piper are close behind. Leo is blasting Gaea with fire which won’t do a thing. Since Gaea is attached to the ground she will just keep healing herself. I run up to Jason and tell him to tell Leo that he has to lift her of the ground with Festus. Jason nods his head and together with Piper takes off towards Leo. I summon my swords and engage in the monsters that are on the ground. I see Octavian reload on of the onagers that look very damaged.

He loads one and in the process snags his robes in the mechanism. If he fires he is going with it, which is fine by me and probably everyone else since no one likes him. I see Will trying to get to him but is stopped by Nico who convinces him that he must die. A Roman demigod runs up to Octavian and allows him to fire the onager explosive payload. Knowing that it will follow its path and hit Gaea straight on where she is held in the air by Leo and Jason with Piper trying to get her to fall asleep. I yell at Leo to summon the biggest fireball possible and he nods his head. In that moment the onager hit Gaea while Leo also lets of his fireball doubling the fireballs destruction. Before Gaea can disappear fully I summon a containment field to contain her power and teleport her to Etnotopia with a lovely note. With Gaea finished and mysteriously nothing left of her we disperse the monsters, and count up the heavy casualties that have occurred. I see the rest all celebrating and can’t keep the smile of my face. Nico tells Eric something which earns him a confusing look and a high five from Annabeth, Jason and Piper hug and kiss and I can feel Leo on Ogygia where he is happy with Calypso. Thalia comes running up to me with Zoe in tow. Thalia gives me a hug which I gladly return and Zoe jumps at me and we have a good five minute makeout session. I then remember the little present that I have a present for her. I pull out the pin and show it to her, instantly tears start to come to her eyes.
“Percy where did you get this?” She asks me.
“On our way into the Mare Nostrum we had to stop by Hercules and I decided to teach him a little lesson.” I say and also show her the picture on my phone. When she sees what I did and recognizes the spell she gives me another big kiss and holds the pin tightly in her hand. Once we separate I notice the Romans standing around a little awkwardly and want to say something when Chiron comes over the hill and invites everyone to a feast.

Two days have passed and everyone is getting along well, Piper and Jason have decided to stay at camp half-blood while Frank and Hazel are going back to camp Jupiter. Everyone is getting along very well and when they left the camp felt emptier. Thalia and I had decided to stay for a little while before returning home. Chaos had send me a nice long letter for just dropping Gaea of at his front door step so I was pushing the going home part. Thalia didn’t argue with that, and she could find a way to tell mom and dad about her wanting to be a hunter for a few more years. I told her it was going to be fine. Zoe and I only had a brief conversation about what happened with the ordeal with Orion and I was about to summon him her to kill him again but she assured me that Nico made sure he’s now suffering eternal hell in the fields of punishment. The rest of the time the two of us were inseparable, and used each moment alone to do things that no one should know or just spending time at the beach kissing. After the two days of organizing everything I could finally sleep again but it was while the gods had thanked the campers for the help and gave out a few gifts to the demigods. I was pretty much past out in my room with Zoe at my sides, her presence kept the nightmares from Tartarus at bay and I could sleep in peace.

Right now Thalia, Zoe and I are walking along the streets of Olympus saying our goodbyes to everyone, well mostly me since Thalia will likely stay here. Once we enter the throne room all the gods are there with sad expressions. Apollo and Hermes are the first to come up and they tell me that they will miss me a lot, we hug after which I tell them to give me back my wallet which they laugh at then leave, Dionysus only gives me a handshake since he is too drunk and doesn’t really care, Demeter and Aphrodite give me a hug and a kiss on either cheek which I wipe of when they aren’t looking and Zoe gives them a glare, Artemis gives me an awkward hug which I find weird before she says goodbye to Zoe once again, Ares and Hephaestus give me a firm hand shake and they all leave.

Hades comes up and engulfs me in a hug and tells me he will miss me a lot and that I will be welcomed in the underworld anytime. Then Hera and Hestia came up to me and each give me bone crushing hug with tears in their eyes and each give me a kiss on the cheek which they return since they were like mothers to me and thank them for everything they did and after they flash out. Then it’s only Poseidon and Zeus left who are trying and failing to hold back their tears.
“We will miss you a lot Percy.” Zeus said.
“I will miss you too, and anytime you need me just tell Thalia and she will contact me.” I say and he nods.
“She will also make sure that you will keep in line.” I say and he laughs but knows I mean business. He then gives me a hug and leaves.
“I have been your father for 19 years and it is hard to say goodbye. Knowing you will be off in the universe saving planets and doing your prince things and also having a beautiful potential wife with you, I can always be proud of you.” He says then gives me a hug and a kiss. I return the same with a few tears in my eyes and he moves on to Zoe telling her that he is glad we found each other. Having done that we walk back outside and go to the balcony that overlooks New York. We have already said goodbye to the campers so I create a portal to Etnotopia. Before we can step in mom and dad step out and I let out a small laugh. They summon all the Olympians here to this spot one by one which I find a little humiliating.
“Thalia, you will hopefully represent the Chaos family in a good manner while being in the hunt.” Dad says and I can feel the excitement coming of her that she gets to stay.
“I hope that you will come and visit us at least a few times a year.” Mom says and Thalia nods her head, gives them both a hug and a kiss then goes to Artemis to get her hunter-ship back. Mom and dad head back in the portal, and I go with them with Zoe by my side. I turn around one more time giving them my lopsided smile and a wave then step through to the life that I will now have.